Home

ID850QB Ver. 3.40 Integrated Debugger Operation UM

1. OK The corresponding window is displayed from the address Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files 180 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Symbol To Address Dialog Box This dialog box is used to display the address of the specified variable or function or the value of the specified symbol Refer to 5 3 4 Convert symbol symbol to address Figure 6 25 Symbol To Address Dialog Box symbol To Address Symbol main 1 lta Radix of Hex Dec C Oct C Bin 2 Close Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select View menu gt Symbol Explanation of Each Area 1 Symbol conversion area Symbol This area is used to specify the variable function name symbol name or line number to be converted Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols To change the contents of this area click the lt OK gt button The conversion result will be displayed in the area below The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal Up to 16 input histories can be recorded Conversion result If bit symbol have been specified they are converted to the Address bit format Also display area equations that include bit symbols cannot be specified The variable address of the function value of the symbol address of the line number or value o
2. Table 6 24 Number of Events Settable in Condition Setting Area Total Event Condition Before Connected IE Execution After Execution Event Link Condition Access IECUBE 16 2 8 6 MINICUBE Nx85ET 14 2 8 4 RCU0 TEU TRCU fmiNtCUBE2 With debug funtion 2 Event manager area This area displays the list of registered events Each event condition can be set easily just by dragging and dropping the event icon displayed in this area onto the event setting area in each event setting dialog box Refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions This area is common to all event related dialog boxes lt Add gt The event condition and event link condition selected in Event Manager area add to setting area with a focus User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 3 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE lt Info gt Opens the Event Info Dialog Box This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event names Event In X lt Sort by Name gt Sorts events into name order d lt Sort by Kind gt Sorts events into type order lt Unsort gt 0008 Displays events in the order in which they have Sort by Kind been registered without sorting the events 7 lt Detail gt 008 Sets the detailed display mode Unsort f f lt OVEIVIEW gt 00 Sets the list display mode ell lt Cancel gt occ Closes this dialog box same as ESC key Overvie
3. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data Closes this window View Menu Assemble Window dedicated items The following items are added in the View menu when the Assemble Window is active Event Information Displays the event information of the address at the cursor position If an event is set the Event Dialog Box is opened Context Menu The menu items are effective for the selected line or item not the position where the mouse pointer was clicked Same operation as when selecting the main menu with the same name Move Add Watch Moves the display position Opens the Address Move Dialog Box Adds the specified data to the Watch Window Opens the Add Watch Dialog Box Symbol 176 Displays the address of the specified variable or function or the value of the specified symbol Opens the Symbol To Address Dialog Box Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Come Here Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position Refer to Table 5 7 Break Types Change PC Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC Break Point Sets or deletes a hardware breakpoint at the cursor position Note Breaks before execution B are set with priority Software Break Point Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position Source Text Displays the corresponding source text and source line
4. Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 287 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE This chapter explains the details of the command functions of the ID850QB Command Line Rules Command List List of Aliases List of Variables List of Packages Key Bind Expansion Window Callback Procedure Hook Procedure Related Files Cautions Explanation of Commands 7 1 Command Line Rules The specification of command lines has the following rules Command name option and argument are specified for command line To divide words a space space key or tab key is used At the end of a line a line feed character or a semicolon is used When a command name and an option are entered to the point of identifiability they are recognized In script command names have to be entered completely Command format command options arg1 arg2 arg3 288 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7 2 Command List Table 7 1 Debugger Control Command List Command Name Function Executing batch with echo fo Centinuous execution ic Disease of IE register User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 289 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Table 7 2 List of Console Tcl Commands Command Name Function Remark For details of the Tcl commands select the start menu gt All Programs gt NEC Electronics Tools gt ID850QB gt VX xx gt ID850QB VX xx Tcl8 4 Help 290 Users Manual U18604
5. Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 381 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fb002 File not found Fb003 Function not found Fb004 Selected load module different from kind Chip was loaded Fb005 Symbol not found 1 The address could not be found Specify a location holding address information Fb008 Illegal expression Ab009 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files FbO0a Illegal symbol in load module file FbOOb Current program does not exist Fb00c Current file does not exist Ab00d Current function does not exist Ab00e Current line does not exist AbOoof Tag not found Ab010 Failed in loading symbol table Ab011 Illegal line number Fb012 Too large line number Ab015 Reading of file went wrong 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Ab016 Can not open file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Ab017 Failed in writing file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Ab019 Reading of file went wrong Ab0O1a Can not close file Fb01b Too long load module file name Ab01c Too many entries of the task kind Fo0O1d Address not found Wb01e No debug information not compiled in Debug Build mode
6. 65 5 7 3 Filling copying and comparing memory contents 65 5 7 4 Flash memory writing function MINICUBE MINICUBE2 5 8 Register Manipulation Function 67 5 8 1 Displaying and changing register contents 67 5 8 2 Displaying and changing peripheral I O registers contents 5 8 3 Displaying and changing I O port contents 68 5 9 Timer Function IECUBE 69 5 9 1 Timer event conditions 70 5 9 2 Run Break event 70 5 9 3 Cautions 71 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE 72 5 10 1 Trace memory 72 5 10 2 Setting trace data 73 5 10 3 Checking trace data 73 5 10 4 Mixed display mode Trace View Window 74 5 10 5 Tracer operation 74 5 10 6 Setting conditional trace 76 5 10 7 DMA point trace function 76 5 10 8 Cautions 77 5 11 Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE 78 5 11 1 Coverage mesurement result display 79 5 11 2 Coverage measurement range 79 66 68 5 11 3 Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed 80 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis 81 5 12 Event Function 82 5 12 1 Using event function 82 5 12 2 Creating events 83 5 12 3 Setting event conditions 83 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition 85 5 12 5 Managing events 86 5 12 6 Cautions MINICUBE MINICUBE2 87 5 13 RRM Function 89 5 13 1 Real time monitor function I
7. F0c47 Emulation of ROM correction has already been enabled FOc60 FOc61 Event before execution cannot be set up other than break conditions 1 Use an event after execution Can not register event numbers which can not be used for hardware break FOc62 Event numbers reserved for hardware breaks can not be used FOc63 Event link conditions cannot set FOc64 Too many ROM emulation RAM areas FOc67 Writing of flash memory during block is not made 372 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES FOc68 Cannot emulate of ROM correction in undefined code FOc69 The address outside the data flash area was specified FOc6a The address outside the external flash memory area was specified FOc70 DCU cannot be accessed 1 The device file selection may be incorrect Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration Dialog Box Check the power to the chip Check the connection of the signal lines DCK DMS DDI DDO and DRSTZ Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N Wire Checker MINICUBE 2 IE may be malfunctioning IECUBE FOc71 Reset cannot be performed 1 Check the clock signal This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock 2 This error occurs when the RESET pin of MINICUBE2 does not become low level after reset The fol lowing cause is assumed MINICUBE2 There is a problem in
8. Usage example IDCON 1 cache config i NB85E212 d NB85E252 IDCON 2 cache i cache NB85E212 d cache NB85E252 IDCON 3 cache clear i false IDCON 4 cache i cache NB85E212 persist d cache nouse User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 303 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE dbgexit dbgexit Terminating ID850QB Input format dbgexit options Functions Terminate the ID850QB The following are options saveprj Project is saved on terminating ID850QB Usage example IDCON 1 dbgexit saveprj 304 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM dbgopt CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE dbgopt Selecting the debugger option Input format dbgopt options value Functions Selects the option of the debugger The following are options function func lECUBE Switches the RRM function trace function or coverage function When func is omitted the current function is displayed func is selected from the following rrm RRM function is selected trace Trace function is selected coverage Coverage function is selected Usage example IDCON 1 dbgopt function trace Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 305 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE download download Download of files Input format download options filename offset Aliases Functions Downloads files specified with filename according to options The load module format files and HEX format files
9. is prefixed to the data By double clicking this all the elements of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data is prefixed to the expanded data If this is double clicked the expanded display is canceled If the number of data to be displayed is fixed such as when a variable in C lan guage or register is to be displayed the specified number of data is invalid 3 Watch data display area The left area displays symbol names and the right area displays data values Symbol name display area Data value display setting area 4 Function buttons This area is used to display watch data variable names symbol names and types and tag names of structures or unions Refer to Watch Window This area cannot be edited This area is used to display and change data values Refer to Watch Window View Displays the data specified in 2 Watch data specification area in the field below Add Adds the data specified in 2 Watch data specification area to the Watch Window Close Closes this dialog box Data that has not actually been written to the target memory will be canceled 192 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Watch Dialog Box This dialog box is used to register watch data to be displayed in the Watch Window Refer to 5 6 Watch Function Multiple data with the same symbol name can be registered
10. 3 Buttons Add Adds an I O port of the specified address Change Changes the setting of the I O port selected in I O Port List Delete Deletes the I O port selected in I O Port List 4 Function buttons OK Reflects the results of addition in the IOR Window and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the changing closes this dialog box Restore Restores the original status Help Displays this dialog box online help files 228 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to register and set timer event conditions and display execution time measurement results Refer to 5 12 Event Function and 5 9 Timer Function IECUBE The Execution time display area can be constantly displayed as the Timer Result Dialog Box by clicking the lt View Always gt button Registration and setting of timer event conditions is done by setting each item 256 items max in this dialog box and then pressing the lt OK gt button The registered timer event conditions are managed by the Event Manager The number of timer event conditions that can be simultaneously used validated is limited Refer to 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition The execution time measurement result is displayed when the set timer event condition is selected Remark1 The measurement result display contents are updated at each sampling t
11. 46 Upload Dialog Box 161 V Verify check 131 view file 93 View File Load Dialog Box 278 View File Save Dialog Box 276 W Watch function 60 Watch Window 186 window list 102 window reference 102 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 393 For further information please contact NEC Electronics Corporation 1753 Shimonumabe Nakahara ku Kawasaki Kanagawa 211 8668 Japan Tel 044 435 5111 http www necel com America NEC Electronics America Inc 2880 Scott Blvd Santa Clara CA 95050 2554 U S A Tel 408 588 6000 800 366 9782 http www am necel com Europe NEC Electronics Europe GmbH Arcadiastrasse 10 40472 Dusseldorf Germany Tel 0211 65030 http www eu necel com Hanover Office Podbielskistrasse 166 B 30177 Hannover Tel 0 511 33 40 2 0 Munich Office Werner Eckert Strasse 9 81829 Munchen Tel 0 89 92 10 03 0 Stuttgart Office Industriestrasse 3 70565 Stuttgart Tel 0 711 99 01 0 0 United Kingdom Branch Cygnus House Sunrise Parkway Linford Wood Milton Keynes MK14 6NP U K Tel 01908 691 133 Succursale Fran aise 9 rue Paul Dautier B P 52 78142 Velizy Villacoublay C dex France Tel 01 3067 5800 Sucursal en Espa a Juan Esplandiu 15 28007 Madrid Spain Tel 091 504 2787 Tyskland Filial T by Centrum Entrance S 7th floor 18322 T by Sweden Tel 08 638 72 00 Filiale Italiana Via Fabio Filzi 25 A 20124 Milano It
12. Breakpoint setting Setting breaks to variables Hardware break and software break Fail safe break function IECUBE Cautions 5 4 1 Break types The ID850QB has the following break functions Table 5 7 Break Types Hardware break Notet Function to stop user program execution upon detection of the Event detection break set break event condition gt Refer to 5 4 2 Breakpoint setting Software break Notet Function to replace the instruction at the specified address software break instruction and stop the user program executed Refer to 5 4 4 Hardware break and software break gt Refer to 5 4 2 Breakpoint setting Come Here break Note2 Function to stop user program execution selected by selecting Simple break Run menu gt Come Here upon detection of address speci fied in the Source Window or Assemble Window Break on satisfaction of condition of step Function to stop execution upon satisfaction of the stop condi execution tion of each command Step In Next Over Return Out Slowmotion Forced break Function to forcibly stop execution by selecting Run menu gt Stop or selecting the STOP button It is valid for all the execution commands Fail safe break IECUBE Function to forcibly stop execution when the user program performs an illegal operation in relation to the memory or registers Refer to 5 4 5 Fail safe break function IECUBE gt Refer to Fail safe Break Dialog
13. CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Clear IECUBE Clears the display color through the access monitor function Accumulative IECUBE Enables disables cumulative display of access status memory content change Selected Cumulative display of memory contents changes Not selected Display of only memory contents changes from previous update Context Menu The menu items are effective for the selected line or item not the position where the mouse pointer was clicked Same operation as when selecting the main menu with the same name RRM Setting Opens the RRM Setting Dialog Box IECUBE Move Moves the display position Opens the Address Move Dialog Box Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays hexadecimal numbers default Nibble Displays in 4 bit units Byte Displays in 8 bit units default Half Word Displays in 16 bit units Word Displays in 32 bit units Ascii Selects whether ASCII characters are displayed or not Selected Displayed Cleared Hidden default ID tag Switches whether to display the data flash memory ID tag Selected Displayed Cleared Hidden default This ID tag display is displayed exclusively with the Ascii Clear Access Monitoring Clears the display color through the access monitor function IECUBE Accumulative Enables disables cumulative display of access status memory content change IECU
14. FbO1f Can not find structure member Fb020 Can not find value Fb021 Fb022 There are neither debug information nor symbol information in load module file 1 To create a load module with appended debug information execute build in build mode of Debug Build Illegal line number Ab023 Current stack frame is not active Ab024 Different section 382 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fb026 Too many array dimensions gt 4 Fb027 Found end of file 1 The specified file may be damaged Recreate the file Fb028 This feature is not supported Fb029 Illegal address Ab02a Can not communicate with ICE Fb02b Can not stack trace with current PC value Fb02c Too many blocks for one function Fb02d Illegal argument Fb02e The file does not exist in the SOURCE PATH 1 On stopping the program the source that the debugger tried to display could not be found Check if the path connects to the source in the Debugger Option Dialog Box or check if the source is in the same directory as the out file Refer to the Assemble Window on which the error message is displayed and check if the corresponding path connects Fb02f Information has been deleted because of optimization Ab030 Monitor timed out 1 Check the power of the emulator cable connections and setting of the interface b
15. Figure 6 29 Add Watch Dialog Box Add Watch Name Radix f Proper Hex f Dec f Oct f Bin f String Size fe Adaptive f Byte Half Word f Word Number Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select View menu gt Add Watch or click the lt Add gt button in the Watch Window Explanation of Each Area 1 Watch data registration area Name This area is used to specify symbol to be added to the Watch Window Refer to Table 6 14 Watch Window Input Format In the default condition the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed As necessary the character string displayed can be changed This area is blank if no character string is selected Up to 16 input histories can be recorded lt Add gt Adds the specified data to the Watch Window The dialog box remains open User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 193 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6 14 Watch Window Input Format Variable Name of C language Variable expression Variable Name Variable expression Constant value Variable Name Elements of array Variable expression Member name Entity members of structure union Variable expression gt Member name Members of structure union indicated by pointer Variable expression Value of pointer variable amp Variable expression Address where variable is located Register name IOR name IOR bit name Label and ad
16. IECUBE start Timer starts on executing the program stop Timer stops on executing the program gobreak Time from Go to Break is displayed in nsec Usage example IDCON 1 xtime start IDCON 2 xtime stop 338 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE xtrace xtrace Operation of tracer Input format xtrace dump append frameno filename xtrace start xtrace stop xtrace clear xtrace addup bool xtrace mode mode xtrace complement bool Functions Operates tracer The following are options IECUBE start The tracer starts on executing the program stop The tracer stops on executing the program clear Clears the trace memory dump The trace data is dumped default The dump result is redirected to the console window append The dump result is added to a file If the file name is specified the dump result is written in the file addup bool Whether the time tag is totaled or not is selected When bool is omitted the current mode is displayed mode mode The trace control mode any one of all cond nonstop fullstop When mode is omitted the current mode is displayed complement boo Selects whether to perform trace complementation When bool is omitted the current mode is displayed Usage example IDCON 1 xtrace start IDCON 2 xtrace stop IDCON 3 xtrace dump 3 _ 01685 2 00
17. Memory Size Min Max Ww Glear trace memory before run fe 9 WwW Complement Data Ww Add OMA Point 5 10 3 Checking trace data The trace data saved to the trace memory can be checked in the Trace View Window Trace data can be searched in the Trace Search Dialog Box displayed by clicking the lt Search gt button The display start position can be changed in the Trace Move Dialog Box displayed by selecting View gt Move The display items in the Trace View Window can be selected in the Trace Data Select Dialog Box This area is used to set the division ratio of the counter used for time tag display in the Trace View Window The division ratio is set in the Extended Option Dialog Box Setting a time tag counter count rate and total time tag are performed in the Extended Option Dialog Box Figure 5 20 Checking Trace Data W Trace View DBR Search lt lt gt gt Refresh Close Frame Time Address Nata status Address Data status Dis amp sm 102408 214445 Oet IED HI calli tite 214445 oole 214445 214455 00000454 40063F00 BRN dispose Ux Ip 214455 USFF Pao 14465 QUUU04F 214465 000004F6 0132 ERM mov xl r su 14465 000004F8 SOFFICOO W jarl _subl Ip 214465 00000514 9515 ERM br sublte i 214475 00000536 64072100 BRN prepare lp 0x8 214475 OSPF Fao it 214405 QUUUU4FC M 214495 00000053A EBED H br _subl 0x 214405 00000516 633 0500 ERN st w rh Ox4 sp 214495 USFF r356 it
18. The data in the internal RAM is corrupted after a CPU reset Normally the internal RAM data after reset is not guaranteed in the actual device but note that the operation may vary 146 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Data Flash Option Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to make the data flash error emulation function settings Data flash This dialog box cannot be opened during user program execution Caution This dialog box cannot be opened when using a device that does not incorporate the data flash memory Figure 6 10 Data Flash Option Dialog Box Data Flash Option 1 Enable Data Flash Error Emulation Writing Time Emulation 2 Writing Time C Min Typ Typ worst Max Erasing Time Min ft Typ Typ worst Max EEPROM Library Error Emulation Address W Generate Word rite Error T 2000 3 Generate Block Erase Error Generate BlockIverity Error Generate Block Blank Check Error 4 p Cancel Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Cautions Opening Select Option menu gt Data Flash Option User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 147 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Enable Data Flash Error Emulation If this item is selected data flash error emulation function is enabled This enables setting of 2 Writing Time Emulation and 3 EEPROM Library Error Emulation This item is not selected by default 2 Writin
19. CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE map map Setting deletion of memory mapping Input format map options address1 address2 accsize cs Functions Sets deletes and displays memory mapping Remark The access size of 8 16 or 32 is specified by accsize unit byte the default is 8 Caution To map an emulation memory alternate ROM RAM with the ID850QB specify either cs0 cs1 cs2 cs3 cs4 cs5 cs6 or cs7 for cs for chip selection In the case of the V850ES microcontrollers this specification can be omitted because the alloca tion by chip selection may be fixed or the chip selection function may not be provided If cs is spec ified specification of accsize cannot be omitted The following are options erom Alternate ROM is mapped With memory board IECUBE eram Alternate RAM is mapped With memory board IECUBE target Target area is mapped targetrom Target ROM area is mapped IECUBE protect I O protect area is mapped rrm Start address of RRM area is set If performed during user program execution CPU is stopped for an instant RRM area can be divided into 8 partitions The start address and size are specified in pairs in list format as follows address size address size address size size is one of 256 512 768 1024 1280 1536 1792 2048 bytes and the total size is up to 2048 clear All the settings for the mapping are deleted information Refer t
20. Enable Disable Validates enables or invalidates disables the selected event condition However event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or disabled Same operation as the clicking the mark of event icon Clear Clears the contents of the event condition Restore Restores the contents of an edited event condition If an event condition not registered is displayed all the fields other than the event name field are blank or the default values are set Cancel Closes this dialog box Even if an event condition is being edited it is not registered and Close the dialog box is closed Help Displays the help window of this window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 215 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View File Save Dialog Box This dialog box is used to save the current display information of the current window to a view file Refer to 5 15 2 Window display information view file Figure 6 62 View File Save Dialog Box Save in O smp e E Chapter3 1 io Chapter3_2 1 Chapter4 O Dev Save as type Source Text swm v Cancel 3 Help Save range Restore 2 C All Screen shot C Specify Line Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the window to be saved is the current window select File menu gt Save As Explanation of Each Area 1 Save file setting area Save in This area is used to specify a file name A file name can
21. Event Link By clicking each button the corresponding event setting dialog box can be opened with Break the new event name set Trace Timer Manager Opens the Event Manager Expand gt gt gt Turns on or off display of the event manager area Shrink lt lt lt The size of the dialog box is expanded or reduced 8 Function buttons for registering deleting validating and invalidating event conditions These buttons are used to register delete validate and invalidate the events The event with the specified event condition is registered or set by clicking the lt OK gt or lt Set gt button This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 4 Function buttons for registering deleting validating and invalidating event conditions in the Break Dialog Box 268 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event Link Dialog Box This dialog box is used to register and display event link conditions Refer to 5 12 Event Function Registration of event link conditions is done by setting each item 256 items max in this dialog box and then pressing the lt OK gt button The registered event link conditions are managed by the Event Manager However the number of event link conditions that can be simultaneously used is limited 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition Figure 6 60 Event Link Dialog Box Event Link Trace ok Restore Cance
22. Explanation of Each Area 1 Load module file display area Module list This area displays the names of the files that have already been downloaded No The numbers displayed indicate the sequence in which the load module file names were read Format The file formats are displayed BIN Binary file HEX Hex file HEX IDTAG Hex file with ID tag COV Coverage data file ELF CA850 Load module file ELF CA850 ELF DWARF2 Load module file ELF GHS extended DWARF2 ELF ELF load module file ELF without symbol information unknown Unknown File name The file names are displayed with the full path if Add Path is selected otherwise only the file names will be displayed Add Path This should be selected to specify file names are displayed with the path lt Download gt Opens the Download Dialog Box A new load module can be downloaded The file name of the newly file will be added to the file name display area when the Download dialog box is closed Caution If symbol information has been reset in the Reset Debugger Dialog Box or if symbol information has been reset in the Download Dialog Box the file names downloaded before that are cleared 2 Function buttons Close Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files 164 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Window This window is used to displa
23. The start address of the programmable I O area can be specified only if the device selected by Chip supports the programmable I O area The start address of the programmable I O area can be input by selecting the checkbox when the programmable I O area is used The address is aligned to 16 KB Remark In the case of a device with an extended I O area with fixed addresses the device selected by Chip Setting of this area is performed automatically 122 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 ID Code MINICUBE MINICUBE2 This area is used to input the ID code to be used when the code on the internal ROM or internal flash memory is read by ID850QB ID code authentication Input a hexadecimal number of 20 digits 10 bytes as the ID code all F by default The ID code is saved to the registry If inputting the ID code fails three times the ID850QB is forcibly terminated Remark1 This area does not have to be set with a ROMless product or a product without a RCU security unit Remark2 For the details of ID code authentication refer to N Wire CARD MINICUBE or MINICUBE2 User s Manual 6 Peripheral Break This area is used to specify whether the peripheral emulation function of in circuit emulator is stopped during a break Break Stopped Non Break Not stopped default Caution Whether or not to stop the peripheral I O functions during a break can be selected only when t
24. aCvar v 5 aCyvar 0 Sub3 aCvart J Sub3C aCvar SubS aCvartt J Sub3 a var Sub3 Cv r t J Sub3 avar Sub3 Cvar Sub3 v r J Suba aCvar 80 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION lt Assemble 00000000 000003FE Sele Search lt lt gt gt Watch Quick Refresh Close Epopl po 40063 00 dispose Ox 4z_info_r_call 42063f00 dispose lxi SzZz_info_r_call 44063f00 dispose 0x6 f az_ info r call 46063 00 dispose Oxc lp 8Z_info_r call 48063f00 dispose 0x10 lp Start 250600000000 nov Oxf tp 24060cb1F EOS mov Ox3tftbi0ec gp c 21 add tp gp 23063033 03 mov Ox3f 3330 sp Je060030F 03 nov Ox3ff3000 ep 20a6ff00 novea Oxtf r r20 2d060c31 03 mov Ow3it310c r13 2cO62d31 03 moy Ox3ff3led rl12 ec6b9 cmp riz r13 e905 bno __start 0x3e 60070100 st wrO0 Ox0 rl13 446a add Ox4d r13 ec6h9 cmp riz ri3 clfd be _ start4 0xa4 2d063031 03 moy Ox3ff 3130 r13 2c063033 f 03 moy Ox3ff3330 r12 ecg cmp rlz r13 e905 bne _start 0x58 6d070100 t w r OxO0fri31 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis RRM Function Trace Function IECUBE and Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE are functions that are used on a mutually exclusive basis Accordingly the trace and coverage functions cannot be used when the RRM function is selected the RRM and c
25. program name file name function name argument list line number If this line is double clicked the operation will be the same as jumping to the Source Window of the Jump function i e the local variable in the function to which execution has jumped will be displayed in the Local Variable Window If the function has a local variable the local variable will be displayed on the next and subsequent lines If the stack contents consist of a local variable Its type and name are displayed Refer to Watch Window Note that the internal Static and Register variables are not displayed 3 Stack contents display setting area This area is used to display or change the stack contents Values are changed through direct input The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed During user program execution however the change cannot be written if attempted an error occurs The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key If the stack contents are a function ig displayed and the function cannot be changed If the stack contents are a local variable The variable value is displayed Refer to Watch Window 4 Function buttons lt Shrink lt lt lt gt button is clicked Refresh Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data Shrink lt lt lt Collapses the loc
26. 1 Save file setting area Save in File name This area is used to specify a file name A file name can be directly input or selected from the list at the upper part of this area Up to 257 characters string with a extension can be specified Save as type This area is used to specify the extension prj of the project file to be saved If the extension is omitted prj is appended as the default extension 2 Function buttons Save Saves the debugging environment to the selected file After saving the dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without saving the file Help Displays this dialog box online help files 156 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project File Load Dialog Box This dialog box is used to restore the debugging environment to the debugging environment saved to the project file Refer to 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file If there is an active Source Window after a project file has been loaded it is displayed at the top Caution Following the ID850QB startup if a project file with settings that differ from those of the target device at startup has been loaded the target device specified at startup is used Figure 6 15 Project File Load Dialog Box serial d jt l 2 Files of type Froject k prj h Cancel Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening click the Proj button
27. Ac004 Fc005 Reading of file went wrong Illegal file type Fc006 Kind Chip of load module is illegal Fc007 Specified file is not load module 1 This is not a linker output file Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker Specify the load module output from the linker Fc008 Specified load module file ELF is old version Ac009 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files Fc00a FcOOb No mapped address was accessed Load module is not loaded Fc00c Illegal argument Fc00d User program is running Fc00e User program is being traced FcOof Interrupted Ac010 Can not communicate with ICE Fc011 Illegal load module file format Fc012 Check sum error Fc013 Too wide address range to upload gt 1MB Fc014 Fc015 Failed in writing file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Illegal program number Fc016 Load information is full Wc017 Symbol information is duplicated please reset symbols 384 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fc018 Specified file is not load module 1 This is not a linker output file Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker Specify the load module out
28. Number of enabled events for each event condition Managing events Cautions MINICUBE MINICUBE2 5 12 1 Using event function Events event conditions and event rink conditions consist of the event conditions listed in the following table by assigning various debugging functions As a result event conditions can be utilized according to the debugging purpose Table 5 16 Various Event Conditions oo Contents evenreonamon ae Dialog Box ecaa ooo event a onnee ean in which the execution of the user program or operation of a tracer is stopped Refer to 5 4 Break Function gt Break Dialog Box Trace event IECUBE Condition in which the process of user program execution is saved to the trace memory Refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE gt Trace Dialog Box Timer event IECUBE Condition for specifying the time measurement start timing and stop timing Refer to 5 9 Timer Function IECUBE gt Timer Dialog Box 82 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 12 2 Creating events Events can be used as action triggers of various event conditions described before through registration of event conditions and event link conditions individually naming states called events 1 Creating and registering events The creation of event conditions is done in the Event Dialog Box Set an address condition status condition and data condition in this dialog box Specify a combination of these as o
29. The ID850QB timer function performs measurements using an external clock Therefore the measurable time differs based on the setting in Table 6 7 Relationship Between Timer Count Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time Timer counter Timer The Run break time is also displayed in the status bar in the Main Window Caution1 The time measured using the time measurement function is illegal in the following cases The PRM window of the Expansion window is open during program execution A hardware break or software break is set during program execution A value is written to the memory using the DMM function during program execution Caution2 If time is measured with a resolution lower than the one determined by the division ratio the measurement result is not displayed When time is measured with a 4K division ratio and a resolution lower than 81 920 ns the measurement result is not displayed in the case of section measurement In the case of Run Break the measurement pass 1 and total 0 is displayed This section explains the following items Timer event conditions Run Break event Cautions User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 69 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 9 1 Timer event conditions A timer event condition specifies the trigger by which time measurement is started or stopped Timer event conditions are set in the Timer Dialog Box Refer to 5 12 Event Function In the ID850QB time out break settings can
30. Write Data not Equal WND Data write An event occurs only if a data condition is not satisfied Note Note1 Multiple items can be specified but only two items including access events can be enabled The address range cannot be specified Can be used only for break event conditions Note2 In this case data condition can not be omitted For access size condition No Condition and Bit can not be selected User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 265 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Access Size This area is used to select an access size condition By selecting an access size condition from the drop down list the access width of a data condition to be detected by an access event is determined If no access size condition is specified a judgment is automatically made from the address condition and data condition Byte Detects data condition with 8 bit width only during 8 bit access Half Word Detects data condition with 16 bit width only during 16 bit access Word Detects data condition with 32 bit width only during 32 bit access No Condition Does not detect access size nothing can be input to the Data area Bit Detects data condition with 1 bit width only during 8 bit access Note Note In this case a search is made for a data condition with 1 bit width Because of the operation of the emulator access to a bit is not directly detected the simulator searches a dummy bit access by internally settin
31. init Processing is performed using the device file setting If the device file contains no information an error occurs during internal flash memory write In this case use the user option user Clock IOR of the clock generation function is manipulated Specify for clock the frequency MHz of the CPU clock fCPU determined by the IOR manipulation In this case perform the IOR setting using the hook procedure Usage example IDCON 1 flop user 13 5 312 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM go go Continuous execution Input format go options Aliases g Functions Executes program continuously If waitbreak is specified the command waits until the program stops The following are options CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE ignorebreak Breakpoint is ignored waitbreak The command waits for the program to stop Usage example IDCON 1 go w Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 313 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE help help Display of help Input format help Functions Displays Dcl help Usage example IDCON 1 help For more information on a specific command type HELP command name ASSOC Displays or modifies file extension associations AT Schedules commands and programs to run on a computer ATTRIB Displays or changes file attributes BREAK Sets or clears extended CTRL C checking CACLS Displays or modifies access control lists ACLs of files CALL Calls
32. tkcon cmd arg Functions Controls the Console window CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE This command is one of the console Tcl commands Refer to Table 7 2 List of Console Tc l Commands tkcon buffer size tkcon close tkcon destroy Sets and references the maximum buffer size number of lines of the console If the specified buffer size is exceeded the excessive lines are deleted from the oldest order Close the Console window tkcon font fontname Sets and references the fonts used in the Console window tkcon gets Performs standard inputs such as Sidin Opens a dialog box tkcon history newline Displays the command history tkcon version tkcon save filename type Saves the buffer data for the Console window as a file When the file name or the file type is omitted a dialog box is opened Select the type from all history stdin stdout and stderr Displays the console version Usage example IDCON 1 tkcon save c temp logfile txt all Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 331 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE upload upload Upload Input format upload options filename address1 address2 upload coverage filename Functions Saves the memory data or coverage data within the specified range in a file The following are options binary The data is saved in binary format coverage The coverage data is saved When saving coverage data all t
33. FO0c25 Flash macro service ROM was accessed or stepped in will be displayed In such a case execute Go or Restart Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B ADDITIONAL CAUTIONS 3 Ifa forcible break is acknowledged in the flash environment the values in the on chip flash memory area are undefined and cannot be displayed normally f a forcible break is acknowledged and generated in the flash environment the on chip flash memory area in the Assemble Window is masked te and the all values in the on chip flash memory area in the Memory Window become 0 Note Nothing is displayed in the disassemble display area in the Assemble Window 4 Do not set a software breakpoint in the on chip flash memory area When a software breakpoint occurs in the on chip flash memory area Software Break is displayed in the break cause area on the status bar the error message FOc25 Flash macro service ROM was accessed or stepped in will be displayed 5 Do not to stop the peripheral macro when using the flash self programming function in the user application Select Non Break option to not stop the peripheral macro in the Peripheral Break area in the Configuration Dialog Box of the ID850QB when using the self programming function in the user application otherwise the on chip flash memory may be damaged B 1 2 When MINICUBE2 Is Connected MINICUBE2 Do not perform the following operations when debugging the self programming function by
34. Flash Memory 8 bit mode Flash Memory 16 bit mode Flash Memory 16 bit mode Flash Memory 8 bit mode Flash Memory 8 bit mode U18604EJ1VOUM 16 erase CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE erase Erasure of the flash memory Input format erase Functions Erases the internal flash memory The following are options Erases the code flash memory if none of the following options is specified Usage example code Erases the code flash memory data Erases the data flash memory external Erases the flash memory in an external space IDCON 1 erase code data Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 309 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE extwin extwin Creation of expansion window Input format extwin scriptfile Functions Creates expansion window with scripftfile Usage example IDCON 1 extwin d foo tcl 310 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE finish finish Returning from function Input format finish Functions Executes until it returns to the program that called the current function Usage example IDCON 1 finish Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 311 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE flop MINICUBE flop Manipulation related to user flash memory Input format flop init flop user clock Functions Selects whether the clock related settings during user flash memory write are the device file settings or user settings
35. Last frame Moves the display start position to the last frame of trace data Frame No Moves the display start position to the specified frame number Refer to Table 6 18 Frame Number Specification Format In the default condition the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box or Last is selected The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal If O is specified the display start position is moved to the first frame of trace data Up to 16 input histories can be recorded User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 245 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6 18 Frame Number Specification Format numeric value None Moves backward downward on screen the display start position from the frame at the cursor by the specified number of frames numeric value numeric value None Moves forward upward on screen the display start position from the frame at the cursor by the specified number of frames numeric value ee fo vest cpa atpston tootsie C Season 2 Function buttons OK Starts trace display from the specified position Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the input data to the original status Help Displays this dialog box online help files 246 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to register set and display trace event conditions Refer to 5 12 Event Function 5 1
36. The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is refer to Table 6 19 Number of Events Settable Table 6 19 Number of Events Settable Connected IE Event Conditions Event Link Conditions Total execution access IECUBE a Can be used to events after execution 2 Event manager area This area displays the list of registered events Each event condition can be set easily just by dragging and dropping the event icon displayed in this area onto the event setting area in each event setting dialog box Refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 2 Event manager area in the Break Dialog Box 248 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc These buttons are used to display or delete the event conditions displayed in the event condition setting area and to display or hide the Event manager area This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 3 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc in the Break Dialog Box 4 Function buttons for registering deleting validating and invalidating event conditions These buttons are used to register delete validate and invalidate the events The event with the specified event condition is registered or set validated by clicking the lt OK gt or lt Set gt button
37. are automatically recognized If offset is specified the address is shifted by the offset if the data is in binary format the load start address is specified for offset binary Binary format data is downloaded coverage Coverage data is downloaded IECUBE append Additional download is executed nosymbol Download is executed Symbol information is not read symbolonly Symbol information is read erase The contents of the internal flash memory are erased all before download Only a product with internal flash memory MINICUBE reset CPU is reset after download information Download information is displayed extflash Data in the flash memory in an external space is given priority for downloading When using an E2 core addresses in internal instruction RAM area and the flash memory area in an external space may overlap so use this option to give priority to one of them Data in internal instruction RAM takes precedence for downloading when this option is omitted default idtag HEX file with an ID tag is downloaded highspeed The clock is switched to the highest one for downloading IECUBE CPU reset occurs when the clock is switched Usage example IDCON 1 download test Imf 306 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE efconfig efconfig Setting of flash memory in external space Input format efconfig options filename address size parall
38. button in the Setting dialog box After the event has been set a debugging action occurs as various event conditions User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 83 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 2 Settings using selection mode settings after checking contents The Event Dialog Box or Event Link Dialog Box are open in the selection mode by placing the focus on the condition area to be set and then clicking the lt Add Event gt button or the lt Add Link gt button Because when a condition set in the dialog box is selected the corresponding detailed condition is displayed conditions can be set after checking the contents 3 Copying and moving event icons In the event condition setting area event conditions can be copied and moved through drag amp drop operation using the following methods If event condition was dropped using only the mouse move event condition If the event condition was dropped while pressing the Ctrl key copy the event condition 4 Manipulation in event manager area Event conditions can be set by clicking the lt Add gt button after placing the focus on the condition area to be set and selecting an event icon Event setting content display Select an event and click the lt Open gt button or double click the event The setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event will be opened and the set contents of the event will be displayed Deletion An event can be deleted by selecting the event and then cl
39. e mm cH mm sE Ces mm cH mm oh pial Se C a I 57 fan a5 mm f O fa cA sE mm C fa fem Ha D A mm CS k z n B om om om om eS om om eS om om om om om om om a om om SESE a Co co BSE H mm cc La ES ia a As x com EIS ot I ta ASE Ci Cum zE m ASE ma fom co co Lom co m Lom om Lom Ca o4 o7 T oo eS Colao ann 5 pm ome SA Ole SE m a cp Se Biss Se Se mm MEREEN D A a A fe o mmm D mm D mm D mm mm H A A2E A D e O e So e aa La Bese Hen mm cc La cc La Et bet bet oe bet D D ps SO e Si aa La cc La a La ASE Mag i Se eS o Se HEA m mm A mm ES mi z B mmm m mmn mm mmm m mm mmr mn mm mm mm om om am Se mmm mm mm m m m eS om a Ha EAE j Ca A mm CT I z B mm m Se om m mm mm m m mm m mm Lo cB Lo m t mm Sey Fe bet Ch OS he oe o SE Lo fo CBs fo Be fo Lon fo bl Da e RsesEs Chey oo pa o tet oid COB oi La La E Ho E SSEse Cee Oo i o B BSEse DO p ot ira Ca z e E om z mm Soo gt Cea oi o 5 z iS mmm mm mm eS mmm mmr mmm mr mm
40. gt Select All Event in the Event Manager Ctrl C Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer 364 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM Key Ctrl D Ctrl E Ctrl G Ctrl J Ctrl M Ctrl O Ctrl S Ctrl U Ctrl V Ctrl W Ctrl X Ctrl Shift Left arrow Ctrl Shift Right arrow key x 4 i APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window Opens the Assemble Window Same function as Jump menu gt Assemble Opens the source file displayed in the active Source Window with the editor specified by the PM when the PM is running Same function as Edit menu gt Edit Source Performs a search Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window Same function as View menu gt Search Moves the display position Opens the each dialog box depending on the current window Same function as View menu gt Move Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window Opens the Memory Window Same function as Jump menu gt Memory Loads a view file source file or text file Opens the View File Load Dialog Box The operation will differ depending on the extension of the file view file Displays the file in the corresponding window Others Displays the file in the
41. lECUBE Code Coverage Displays the trace results Opens the Trace View Window lsame operation as this button Displays code coverage measurement results IECUBE Opens the Code Coverage Window Bilsame operation as this button Console Opens the Console Window Others Displays other windows Refer to APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW 112 Displays a user defined window list Displays a name of tcl file in the bin idtcl tools folder except the extension Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 8 Jump menu Source Text CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Displays the corresponding source text and source line using the data value selected in the current window as the jump destination address If no line information exists at the jump destination address however you cannot jump Opens the Source Window If the Source Window in active is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Assemble Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window Opens the Assemble Window If the Assemble Window in active is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Memory 9 Window menu New Window Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window Opens the Memory Window If the Me
42. or select File menu gt Project gt Open Explanation of Each Area 1 Load file setting area Look in This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded A file name can be directly input from the keyboard or selected from the list Up to 257 characters string with a extension can be specified File name Files of type This area is used to specify the extension prj of the file to be loaded 2 Function buttons Open Loads the selected file After loading the file this dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 157 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Download Dialog Box This dialog box is used to select the name and format of a file to be downloaded and downloads memory contents to the in circuit emulator and the target system Refer to 5 2 Download Function Upload Function If a load module file has been downloaded the corresponding source file is searched and the Source Window is automatically opened Caution Ifa file other than a load module file is loaded source debugging cannot be executed Remark1 The internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded refer to 5 7 4 Flash memory writing function MINICUBE MINICUBE2 MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Remark2 Files can be downloaded to the external flash memory refer to 5 2 2
43. previous value can be canceled by the ESC key 2 Function buttons Refresh Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data Close Closes this window View Menu Local Variable Window dedicated items When this window is the current window the following items are added on View menu Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays octal numbers String Displays character strings Proper Displays the default value of each variable default Context Menu The menu items are effective for the selected line or item not the position where the mouse pointer was clicked Same operation as when selecting the main menu with the same name Add Watch Opens the Add Watch Dialog Box Bin Displays the selected line in binary numbers Oct Displays the selected line in octal numbers Dec Displays the selected line in decimal numbers Hex Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers String Displays the selected line as a character string Proper Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option Dialog Box default User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 199 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Stack Window This window is used to display or change the current stack contents of the user program Ref
44. the settings in the Configuration Dialog Box Table 3 2 Error Message Output Pattern IECUBE Target Area in the Configuration Dialog Target Exchange Adapter Target Power Supply Error Box Message Not Not Not Ff606 Please Selected Selected check connection with the target board and power on it W607 Selected Selected Selected Selected Please check connection of the exchange adapter Ff608 Please Selected Selected Selected disconnect the target board Ff609 Please Selected Selected power off the target board and disconnect it FO100 Can not communicate with ICE Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board FOc43 Connection of emulator cannot be performed FOc70 DCU cannot be accessed FOc 76 Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 33 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING FOC77 DCU access is unusuall Ff606 Please check connection with the target board and power on it W607 Please check connection of the exchange adapter Ff608 Please disconnect the target board A0105 Failed in reading device file file name FOca2 This device file does not include the on chip debug information FOca4 This device file does not include the IECUBE information FOc71 Reset cannot be performed FOc72 Monitor memory
45. use the lt Browse gt button 172 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE To Specifies the file name or address to be displayed Up to 16 input histories can be recorded When Address Symbol is selected Specifies the address from which display is to be started The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or a expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols Clicking the lt OK gt button displays the source text so that the source line corresponding to the specified address value can be viewed When Line File is selected Specifies the line number or a file name from which display is to be started The line number is specified by path name file name line number The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal The file name can be specified just bythe file name or using the absolute path and relative path If just the file name or the relative path was specified the file in the source path specified in the Debugger Option Dialog Box is searched The file whose specified line number was specified as the first line is displayed by clicking the lt OK gt button When the file name is omitted the currently displayed file is displayed from the specified line If the line number is omitted the file is displayed from the first line 2 Function buttons OK Starts di
46. using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destination address Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function If no line information exists at the jump destination address however you cannot jump Opens the Source Window If an active Source Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Memory Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Memory Window If an active Memory Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Related Operations 1 Line assembly To change the disassembled contents move the cursor to the mnemonic field the overwrite and insertion modes are alternately selected by pressing the Insert key If an attempt is made to move the cursor to another line after the disassembled contents have been changed in the mnemonic field the new contents are checked If the new contents are illegal the code data on the line where the contents have been changed is indicated as The contents changed in the mnemonic field are written into the memory by pressing the Enter key By pressing the Enter key the new contents are checked If even one line is illegal the new contents are not written into the memory To discard the contents press the ESC key If the contents are correct and if the Enter key is p
47. 10 7 DMA point trace function The DMA point trace Direct Memory Access Trace function is performed prior to normal trace functions For frames to be accessed using the DMA point trace function the M mark is displayed in the Trace View Window Below are the types of DMA point trace function operations 1 During unconditional trace Not only all the points that are traced using the normal all trace function but also the DMA start and end points are always traced using the DMA point trace function 2 During section trace Not only the points that are traced using the normal section trace function but also the DMA start and end points which may be located outside of the section trace area are always traced using the DMA point trace function 3 During qualify trace Not only the points that are traced using the normal qualify trace function but also the DMA start and end points are always traced even when conditions for the qualify trace are not satisfied using the DMA point trace function 76 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 10 8 Cautions Note the following points regarding the trace functions 1 Disassemble display is not output in the Trace window when trace complement mode is off and execution of the user program is in progress The read access frame and write access frame may be displayed in reverse in the Trace window A large amount of invalid frames are output when step wise execution is
48. 3 Registering and deleting watch data This window allows easy setting of breakpoints to variables via a Context Menu Remark1 Ifa local variable and a global variable exist with the same name the local variable takes priority Remark2 A maximum of 10 000 lines can be displayed in the Watch Window Caution1 If an area that extending over a bank boundary 256 bytes in the RRM area is accessed during user program execution the invalid values are displayed for the higher addresses Consequently the corresponding variables are highlighted with red in the Watch window In such a case the val ues displayed in the Memory window are also invalid but they are not highlighted with red This phenomenon occurs only during user program execution The correct values are displayed at a break IECUBE Caution2 When a function to assign external variables to the registers of the CA850 is used the variable cannot be browsed or set in the Watch window Manipulate such variables in the Register Window or register the relevant register in the Watch window before manipulating the variables Figure 6 27 Watch Window 6 Watch E S fx Add _Deete Up Down Refresh Cose 9 2 num_data 10 num data 0 num dataLl num dataLl 1 num data 4 num data 4 num data 6 num data num data num data 9 num data 5 _ Symbol name display area Data value display setting area Opening Explana
49. 6 30 6 31 6 32 6 33 6 34 6 35 6 36 6 37 6 38 6 39 6 40 6 41 6 42 6 43 6 44 6 45 6 46 6 47 6 48 6 49 6 50 6 51 6 52 6 53 6 54 6 55 6 56 6 57 6 58 6 59 6 60 6 61 6 62 6 63 6 64 6 65 6 66 6 67 6 68 6 69 6 70 7 1 A 1 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9 E 1 Source Window 165 Source Search Dialog Box 170 Source Text Move Dialog Box 172 Assemble Window 174 Assemble Search Dialog Box 178 Address Move Dialog Box Example When Memory Window Is Open 180 Symbol To Address Dialog Box 181 List Window 183 Watch Window 186 Quick Watch Dialog Box 191 Add Watch Dialog Box 193 Change Watch Dialog Box 196 Local Variable Window 198 Stack Window 200 Memory Window 203 Memory Window When RRM Function Is Selected 204 Memory Search Dialog Box 208 Memory Fill Dialog Box 210 Memory Copy Dialog Box 211 Memory Compare Dialog Box 212 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box 213 DMM Dialog Box Ex When Memory is selected 214 Register Window 216 Register Select Dialog Box 219 IOR Window 221 IOR Select Dialog Box 225 Add I O Port Dialog Box 227 Timer Dialog Box 229 Timer Result Dialog Box 232 Trace View Window 234 Trace Search Dialog Box 239 Trace Data Select Dialog Box 243 Trace Move Dialog Box 245 Trace Dialog Box 247 Delay Count Dialog Box 250 Code Coverage
50. Box Time out break IECUBE Function to stop user program execution when the measure ment time exceeds the specified time out time Refer to 5 9 Timer Function IECUBE gt Refer to Timer Dialog Box Note1 This break is valid for Go Go amp GO Come Here and Restart Refer to Table 5 9 Type of Execution 50 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Note2 After user program execution has been stopped the breakpoint by this function is eliminated During execution of a user program by this function break events set before the cursor position does not occur 5 4 2 Breakpoint setting Breakpoints can simply be set to the desired location by clicking in the Source Window or Assemble Window Since breakpoints are set as break event conditions and managed using the Event Function restrictions apply to the number of breakpoints that can be set Refer to 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition 1 Breakpoint setting method Breakpoints are executed by clicking lines in which is displayed lines where program code exists In the default setting software breakpoint B is set but if Breakpoint is selected in the context menu hardware breakpoint B or B is set Refer to 5 4 4 Hardware break and software break If a breakpoint is set on a line on which an event breakpoint has already been set A indicating that multiple events have been set is marked Refe
51. Downloading to External Flash Memory Remark3 The following dialog box appears while downloading and the downloading can be can celled at any time Figure 6 16 Download Dialog Box Download Look in ico Chapterd_1 Chapters ie Chapter4 Dev File name b as Files of type Load Module Gout Cancel 7 Help Load Reset to external FlashROM Restore atHigh Speed 4 W Object Offset Address W Symbol i Symbol Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Bloic the Load button or select File menu gt Download 158 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Load file setting area Look in This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded A file name can be directly input from the keyboard or selected from the list File name Up to 257 characters string with a extension can be specified Files of type This area is used to specify the extension prj of the file to be loaded Refer to Table 5 3 Type of File That Can Be Downloadea These are default extensions other extensions can also be used The default extension of the displayed load module can also be specified in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Remark Two or more files can be specified in this dialog box To specify two or more files delimit each file name with double quotation mark Files can also be specified by clicking the mouse
52. ICE A1008 Not enough memory for tables 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files A1009 Already initialized A100a Not initialized F100b User program is running F100c Different bus size has been already specified F100d Too large bus size F100e Too large bus partition size W100 Target is not turned on F1010 Illegal map range F1011 Failed in setting internal ROM and RAM F1012 This feature is not supported F1013 No terminal name W1014 Data is not exist A1015 Programmable lIOR does not exist F1016 Programmable lIOR does not movable 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the latest device file F1017 I O Protect mapping is possible a target attribute only F1018 F1019 Illegal Internal ROM size Illegal internal ROM size or internal RAM size F101d Data flash area does not movable F101e A10ff Data flash area does not exist Can not communicate with ICE A1idbe Error occurred inside debugger 3 From X2000 F2000 Illegal IOR name Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 375 APPENDIX E MESSAGES A2001 Illegal address F2002 User program is running F2003 Illegal IOR number F2004 Illegal bit number W2005 IOR of Rea
53. ICE Please confirm the power of ICE connection of the interface cable or I O address of the PC interface board FOca1 Monitor file not found 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger 2 This error occurs when an unsupported device is selected Check if the selected device is supported FOca2 This device file does not include the on chip debug information 1 An attempt was made to start with a device file not supporting on chip debugging The device file may be old Install the latest device file MINICUBE MINICUBE2 2 IE may be malfunctioning IECUBE FOca3 Unsupported information is included in the on chip debug information in the device file 1 An unknown flag is included in the on chip debug information of the device file The exec module may be old Install the latest exec module FOca4 This device file does not include the IECUBE information 1 An attempt was made to start with a device file not supporting IECUBE The device file may be old Install the latest device file FOcaf Trace block can not be stepped over 374 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES 2 From X1000 A1000 Failed in initializing ICE A1001 No entry exists for specified number A1002 Can not relocate internal RAM F1003 Illegal relocation address F1004 Illegal condition A1005 Invalid attribute F1006 Illegal address A1007 Not enough memory on
54. ID850QB is terminated Remark1 Up to 65 535 lines of C and assembly language source files can be displayed If the source files exceed 65 535 lines partition them Remark2 The number of characters that can be displayed on 1 line in each area of a window Is 319 Figure 6 19 Source Window Source serialc it set baudrate 7m UAQCTLY UART_CTL1_115200B6PS UAQCTL UART_CTL2_115200BPS uart enable Cand THE REE set to 1 fe G data bits no parity ik 3 enable receive and transmit lines UAQCTLO UART_CTLO_DATALENGTH_ UART_CTLO_PARITY_NOWE UART CTLO LEB UART_CTLO _STOPBIT_ 1s 4 UAQCTLO UART_CTLO_PYR UART_CTLO ENABLE TH UART_CTLO_ UART_CTLO_DATALENGTH_ amp UART _CTLO PARITY NONE UART_CTLO_ LSB whilef 1 i unsigned char data for data 1 data lt 256 datatt jf UAOTSEF UAQSTR translation status fl User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 165 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu Source Window dedicated items Context Menu Opening 21 Click the Src button or select Browse menu gt Source Text This window is automatically opened if the corresponding source file exists after the download module file has been downloaded Explanation of Each Area 1 Point mark area This area is used for the Event Setting Status Event Mark and program codes display as well as Breakpoint setting Breakp
55. Illegal pass count Ff30e Illegal register name Ff30f Illegal register bank Ff310 Illegal delay count Wf311 Only one XXX can be enabled Do you make this YYY to enable Ff312 XXX is already there Ff313 Event number already exist Ff314 Event name is not set Ff315 XXX is already there Ff316 Max number of enabled XXX event is over Please disable other enabled YYY event Ff317 Max number of set event is over Ff31e Illegal start address Ff31f Illegal end address Ff322 Illegal count rate Ff323 Illegal time out break count Ff324 Section and Qualify can be specified at the same time Wf825 User program is running Do you want to stop user program for a moment and set it Wf826 User program is running Do you want to stop user program for a moment and delete it User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 387 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Ff327 RAM monitor was enabled a software break point cannot be used W328 The software break conflicted with the hardware break There is a possibility of executing an illegal instruction by re execution after the break 1 Reset the CPU If a fetch hardware break is set do not set a software break in its neighborhood If an access hardware break is set do not set a software break Ff850 There is a phase which event are not in the middle Ff351 The same event is contained
56. Software break call conditions number overflow F4025 Illegal snap condition F4026 Too many event conditions cannot be set as Phase1 and Phase2 of event link conditions F4027 Software break conditions number which can be set as internal ROM was overflow F4318 Illegal memory bank setting 6 From X5000 A5000 Illegal device file type A5001 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files A5002 Can not open device file A5003 A5004 Reading of device file went wrong Can not close device file A5005 Illegal device file format 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the device file A5006 Failed in initializing ICE A5007 378 Device file has broken or error is in a file Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES F5008 Can not open device file 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the device file F5009 Can not open ie703000 ie F500a Specified device file is illegal version 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the device file W500b Specified device file does not relocate internal RAM A500c Failed in reading expc ini A500d Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files W500e No tag data which
57. Source Window Same function as File menu gt Open Saves the data displayed in the current window to the view file Same function as View menu gt Save Displays the corresponding source text and source line using the data value selected in the current window as the jump destination address Opens the Source Window Same function as Jump menu gt Source Text Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data Opens the Quick Watch Dialog Box Same function as View menu gt Quick Watch Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer Same function as Edit menu gt Cut Expands the selection range one word to the left Expands the selection range one word to the right User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 365 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Display Format Types of Messages Message Lists E 1 Display Format Messages are output to the error warning dialog box By pressing the F1 key while the error warning dialog box is open the related online help files are displayed If the This message is not to be shown until restart checkbox is selected in dialog boxes that appears with this checkbox the message will no longer displayed while the ID850QB is running When the ID850QB is started next time this message can be displayed default cleared Figure E 1 Error Warning Dialog Box Produc
58. Symbol Meaning Explanation Arithmetic operator Addition Returns the sum of the first and second terms Subtraction Returns the difference between the first and second terms Multiplication Returns the product of the first and second terms Division Divides the value of the first term by the value of the second term and returns the integer of the results MOD Remainder Divides the value of the first term by the value of the second term and Yo returns the remainder of the results Unary Returns 2 s complement of the value of the term operator negative Unary Returns the value of the term operator positive Logical operator Logically negates each bit of the term and returns the results AND Logical Obtains the logical product of the values of the first and second terms on amp product each bit and returns the results Logical sum Obtains the logical sum of the values of the first and second terms on each bit and returns the results Shift operator XOR Exclusive Obtains the exclusive logical sum of the values of the first and second terms h logical sum on each bit and returns the results 360 Right shift Shifts the value of the first term by the value number of bits of the second term to the right and returns the results As many Os as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the higher bits Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS Symbol Be st Left shift E value otihe fis E E
59. Text txt Text file Note1 The mark for indicating the code coverage measurement result executed not yet executed is added to the contents of the displayed file Refer to Table 5 15 Format of View of Locations for which Coverage Measurement is Executed IECUBE Note2 The extension of the source file can be changed in the Extended Option Dialog Box 5 15 3 Window setting information setting file A setting file is a file that records the window setting information watch data settings peripheral I O registers settings and event settings Setting files can be loaded and saved for each window When a setting file is loaded the target window is displayed and the setting information that was saved is restored Setting files are loaded and saved in the Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box and Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box respectively Table 5 22 Type of Setting Files File Type Current Window Name Watch wch Note Watch Window I O Register ior Note IOR Window Event evn Event Manager Event Manager Note A variable value can not be loaded 94 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 16 Functions Common to Each Window The windows have the following common functions Functions Common to Each Window Jump function Trace result with linking window IECUBE Drag amp drop function Cautions 5 16 1 Active status and static status Each of the Windows
60. The following items must be installed when the ID850QB is used Table 2 1 Install Item Procedure ID850QB When using the installer on the ID850QB Disk Install the contents of this disk according to the automatically executed installer When using the installer downloaded from Version up Service webpage Run the downloaded executable file following the guidance of installer Device file Install this file according to the DFINST exe dedicated startup installer by selecting start menu gt All Programs gt NEC Electronics Tools gt DeviceFile Installer 2 2 Uninstalling Perform uninstallation using Add Remove Programs on the Control Panel 26 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING This chapter explains the following items related to the starting and terminating the ID850QB Cautions Before Starting MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Cautions on connecting Midas Lab emulator Startup Option and Argument Specification Starting Terminating Error Messages at Start Up 3 1 Cautions Before Starting MINICUBE MINICUBE2 When the N Wire CARD MINICUBE or MINICUBE2 is connected start the following check tools before the Starting the ID850QB to check that the emulator and the target system can be normally debugged N Wire Checker MINICUBE OCD Checker MINICUBE2 Caution For the connection between the emulator and the target system and the power application sequence r
61. Traces data by the number of delay count frames and stops the tracer when a delay trigger event has occurred User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 15 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 10 6 Setting conditional trace A trace event condition triggers starting stopping trace execution when a conditional trace is set By setting a trace event condition in the Trace Dialog Box the conditional trace can be set Refer to 5 12 Eveni Function To use the conditional trace select Run menu gt Cond Trace ON There are the following types of conditional trace Table 5 13 Types of Conditional Trace Section trace Executes a trace between two specified conditions in a specific zone A section trace can be executed by setting a trace start event and trace end event in the Trace Dialog Box and selecting Run gt Cond Trace ON Qualify trace Executes a trace only when a condition is satisfied If two or more events are set as qualify trace events a qualify trace can be executed by executing a conditional trace A qualify trace can be executed by setting a qualify trace event in the Trace Dialog Box and selecting Run gt Cond Trace ON Delay trigger trace Executes a trace by the number of delay counts after a condition has been Satisfied A delay trigger trace can be executed by setting a delay trigger event in the Trace Dialog Box setting a delay count in the Delay Count Dialog Box and selecting Run gt Cond Trace ON 5
62. U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage Address Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to select the coverage measurement range to be displayed in the Code Coverage Window Refer to 5 11 Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE The measurable ranges are given below In this dialog box any 1 MB range can be selected Table 6 20 Coverage Measurement Range Detail Connected IE Code Coverage Measurement Range IECUBE 1 MB space of addresses 0x000000 to OxOFFFFF fixed measurement areas Any 1 MB space of addresses 0x100000 to Ox3FFFFFF selectable by this daialog Default 0x3F00000 to OxSFFFFFF Figure 6 55 Coverage Address Dialog Box Coverage Address Eg Address Range 100000 1FFFFF 2 FFFFF 3FFFFF 4FFFFF BFEFFE 6FFFFF Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Option menu gt Coverage gt Select Explanation of Each Area 1 Address selection area Address Range This is an area for selecting any 1 MB space that performs coverage measurement Changing the measurement range clears the measurement result coverage data in the previously selected range but does not clear the coverage data in the fixed measurement areas 0 to OXOFFFFF To determine the coverage measurement range select the area and click the lt OK gt button User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 255 2 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE OK Va
63. a read lt Modify gt button Opens the Memory Mapped I O dialog box The address at which the cursor is placed is the input address displayed in the Memory Mapped I O dialog box If this button is clicked after the cursor position is changed in the Memory Mapped I O dialog box the Address field in the Memory Mapped I O dialog box is also changed 346 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW lt Close gt button Closes this window Context menu Select the display format from Byte HalfWord and Word Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 347 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Memory Mapped I O dialog box This dialog box can be opened by clicking the lt Modify gt button on the Memory Mapped I O window It is used to write data to any address Remark1 When the area to which data is written is displayed in the Memory Window or Watch Window data is read in these windows after the lt Write in gt button is clicked Remark2 If Data Size is less than Access Size specified in the Configuration Dialog Box ID850QB reads data in Access Size once changes the corresponding part of the read data and writes the changed data in Access Size Figure A 6 Memory Mapped I O Dialog Box Memory Mapped L O Address 0z1016f Value Joxone Data Size C Byte C Half Word Word wi rite Ir Close Address Input the address to be written The address corresponding to the data for which the cursor is placed in th
64. after branch The frame which is BRM1 and is also M1 is included If the fetch address is the start of the symbol the first line is highlighted in blue M1 Fetching of first byte of instruction Blank Any of the following Data access frame 3 frames max 2 frames max when RRM function is selected Frame of the second instruction when two instructions are executed at the same time Invalid flame IF Fetch address that entered interrupt and was canceled The address where the breakpoint was set and this correspond INFO Trace start delay trigger trace traces start trace end section trace Fetch address qualify trace start end Data access display area This area displays the result of accessing data In complement frames this area is not displayed Address Displays access address Data Displays access data Status Displays access status R Data read W Data write DisAsm This area displays the disassemble results only when Status is BRM1 M1 or complement frames For the frame that only displays access addresses global symbols are displayed instead Remark1 When a 6 byte or 8 byte instruction code is displayed the first 4 bytes are displayed in the first frame and the other bytes are displayed in the second and third frames If two instructions are executed at the same time one frame is displayed on two lines The instruction code at the lower add
65. as the current window 2 Select View menu gt Window Synchronize to select a window to be linked 3 Move the cursor to the line to be linked in the trace result display area of the Trace View Window 4 Using the address of the line selected in 3 as a pointer the corresponding part is highlighted or indicated by the cursor position in the display area of the window selected in 2 Remark The linking source address differs as follows depending on the cursor position in the trace result display area if the Memory Window is linked Access address access data access status gt Access address Others gt Fetch address When the Source Window or Assemble Window is linked the fetch address is always used as the pointer 5 16 4 Drag amp drop function Selected and highlighted line numbers addresses and text can be dragged and dropped in another window using the following method 1 Drag the selected line number address or text gt The shape of the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to 2 Drop the selection in a window or area where it can be dropped gt The shape of the cursor changes from to OK when the cursor is placed over a window or area where the selection can be dropped In the window in which the line number of the address has been dropped an operation is performed on the dropped address or the address that is obtained from the dropped line number For example a variable can be simply
66. buttons Yes Saves the current debug environment to a project file closes all the windows and terminates the ID850QB If a project file name is not specified the Project File Save Dialog Box is opened If the lt Cancel gt button is selected on the Project File Save Dialog Box the environment is neither saved to a project file nor is the ID850QB terminated If a project file is loaded or saved during debugger operation this button has the default focus No Closes all the windows and terminates the ID850QB If a project file is not loaded or saved during debugger operation this button has the default focus Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 283 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE About Dialog Box This dialog box displays the version information of the ID850QB the year is displayed in 4 digits Remark The version information can be copied to the clipboard by selecting Select All and Copy amp C from the context menu in the dialog box The following version information is displayed Product version of ID850QB Version of device file Version of GUI Version of debugger DLL Version of assembler DLL Version of executor Version of Tcl Tk Product ID and product version of in circuit emulator Figure 6 68 About Dialog Box NEG Integrated Debugger IDS50N6 Version YAAK MK Hx 200 OGO Device File LuPDPOFa259 WREEK vool IE Debug
67. chip debug function is prohibited FOc34 Writing to the on chip debug reserved area is prohibited A010a A01a6 Cannot run debugger and a utility at the same time Executor is running User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 35 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM The ID850QB can automatically perform a series of operations in development processes such as creating source files gt compiling gt debugging gt correcting source files in association with the PM This chapter explains the following items related to association with the PM For details of the PM functions refer to the PM User s Manual Setting Build Mode Registering Debugger to PM Project To Start ID850QB from PM Auto Load Caution If a load module file is created by using the Windows command prompt the function to associate the ID850QB with the PM cannot be used 4 1 Setting Build Mode To debug the load module file created by the PM on the ID850QB at the source level build to output symbol information for debugging must be performed to create a load module file This setting can be performed by select ing Debug Build on the PM 4 2 Registering Debugger to PM Project The debugger to be used or the load module files to be downloaded can be specified for each project in the PM 4 2 1 Selecting debugger The procedure for selecting the debugger is as follows The ID850QB is registered as the debugger of the active p
68. conditions cannot be used for section trace conditions Too many identical events are registered gt 3276 7 F400e Specified event condition does not exist F400f Illegal event link condition F4010 Function not found A4011 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files F4012 Timer is being disabled Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 377 APPENDIX E MESSAGES W4013 Access size is different from its mapped bus size F4014 Can not use software break F4015 Can not use event condition specifying address range F4016 Can not change event condition F4017 A4018 Can not access word at odd address Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files F4019 This feature is not supported F401a No Event F401b Can not use tag event W401c Software break can not be set on this area F401d Start event and end event of timer are not made to the same setup F401e Too many trace events F401f Path count cannot be set up F4020 Address range cannot be set up in event before execution F4021 Event conditions number overflow F4022 Software DMM conditions number overflow F4023 Real time call conditions number overflow F4024
69. connection with the target system RESET FOc72 Monitor memory cannot be accessed 1 Revise the Main OSC value in the Configuration Dialog Box Check the setting of main clock in the Configuration Dialog Box the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N Wire Checker The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem MINICUBE 2 Revise the Main OSC value in the Configuration Dialog Box If this does not solve the problem IE may be malfunctioning IECUBE 3 This error occurs when writing to the monitor program fails The following causes are assumed There is a problem in connection with the target system communication pins or FLMDO pin Selecting UART or CSI is wrong in the Configuration Dialog Box The oscillation frequency that has been input in the Clock area in the Configuration Dialog Box differs from that of the device on the target system MINICUBE2 FOc73 Monitor execution cannot be performed 1 Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N Wire Checker The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem MINICUBE 2 IE may be malfunctioning IECUBE 3 This error occurs when the ID code was changed during user program execution Do not change the ID code in the user program MINICUBE2 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 373 APPENDIX E MESSAGES FOc74 CPU register cannot be accessed 1 Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the
70. deleting validating and invalidating event conditions in the Break Dialog Box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 231 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Result Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box displays the results of measuring the execution time Refer to 5 9 Timer Function IECUBE By clicking the lt View Always gt button in the Timer Dialog Box this dialog box is opened corresponding to a timer event condition on a one to one basis Two or more of this dialog box can be simultaneously opened Up to 256 1 Run Break event Timer Result Dialog Boxes can be opened the number of events that can be measured at the same time is the number of valid events described in 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition 1 Run Break event Remark The measurement result display contents are updated at each sampling time of the RRM Function even during user program execution Figure 6 47 Timer Result Dialog Box Timer ITmrO00001 Pass 2 timetis Total 4400 nsec Average 2200 nsec Naz 4400 nsec Mlin O nsec Initialize Copy I Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select a timer event condition in the Timer Dialog Box click the lt View Always gt button Explanation of Each Area 1 Execution time display area Same area is Timer Dialog Box Pass Number of passes Total Total execution time in the measurement zone specified by start event and end e
71. environment can be restored by clicking the lt Project gt button Refer to 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file 5 1 2 Setting option Perform setting related to the debugger or in circuit emulator in the following setting dialog boxes Configuration Dialog Box Extended Option Dialog Box Fail safe Break Dialog Box RRM Setting Dialog Box Flash Option Dialog Box Data Flash Option Dialog Box Debugger Option Dialog Box 42 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 1 3 Setting mapping The mapping settings are performed in the Configuration Dialog Box Table 5 2 Mapping Attribute Emulation ROM IECUBE Emulation ROM With memory board The memory area specified as the emulation ROM area is equivalent to the memory area when the target device is connected to ROM The target device accesses the memory in the in circuit emulator If the target device attempts writing to this memory area a write protect break occurs Emulation RAM IECUBE Emulation RAM With memory board The memory area specified as the emulation RAM area is equivalent to the memory area when the target device is connected to RAM The target device accesses the memory in the in circuit emulator User area mapping The memory area specified for user area mapping becomes the area to accesses the memory in the target system or memory incorporated in the CPU Target ROM IECUBE Target ROM Areas specified as target ROM a
72. from the CPU Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT HLDRQ and so on 1 Check the HOLD signal WAIT signal clock signal etc The IOR value or SFR value may not be correct AO1ia1 Failed in reading ie703000 ie A01a2 Break board is not connected A01a3 Emulation board is not connected A0Q1a4 Board configuration of ICE is not consistent A01a5 POD EM1 board is not connected A0Q1a6 Executor is running 1 MINICUBE2 is being used by MULTI or C SPY so terminate it first A01a8 Failed to find configuration file lv8hw ini AO1ad Please update the device driver for the PC interface board 1 The device driver may be old Install the latest device driver AO1ae Failed in reading configuration file lv8hw ini AOtaf Failed in executing monitor command A01b0 Can not communicate with monitor program Please check the availability of communication port the setting of CPU board or the type of cable A01b1 Can not communicate with monitor program Please terminate the debugger and check the power of CPU board or the connection of cable then restart the debugger A01b2 The firmware of the emulator is old version Please update it with utility to the latest firmware 1 Update firmware using MQB2UTL FO200 Verification error occurred Failed in writing memory 1 External memory could not be accessed as it is not set Change the register values necessary for accessing the external me
73. from the drop down list The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events Refer to Table 5 18 Event Icon The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet By clicking the left mark an event condition can be validated or invalidated Delay Trigger This area is used to set an event condition for a delay trigger Refer to 5 10 6 Setting conditional trace Event conditions are easily set by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area For details refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is refer to Table 6 19 Number of Events Settable Section Start Event conditions are easily set by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event Section End manager area and dropping it in this area For details refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is refer to Table 6 19 Number of Events Settable Qualify This area is used to set an event condition for a qualify trace Refer to 5 10 6 Setting conditional trace If two or more events are set trace is performed when each event occurs Event conditions are easily set by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area For details refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions
74. if there is no change of values default lt Close gt button Closes this window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 343 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Hook window This window is used to set a hook to the debugger using a hook procedure The hook procedure enables changing the register value before downloading a program or after a CPU reset On this window a hook can be set by using the following five tabs AfterDownload tab Hook after downloading BeforeDownload tab Hook before downloading AfterCpuReset tab Hook after CPU reset during break BeforeCpuRun tab Hook before start of execution AfterCpuStop tab Hook after break Remark By setting a IOR by using the BeforeDownload tab before downloading the load module for example downloading can be executed at high speeds Access to the external memory is also facilitated by using this tab If the setting is saved as project file name tcl in the directory where the project is stored the setting is executed when the project is next opened Figure A 4 Hook Window DAK AfterD ownload BeforeDownload AfterCpuRieset BeforeCpuRur AfterCpuStop register PHCMID Ox ar CKC Oe 344 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW AfterDownload tab Hook after downloading After downloading is performed the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value BeforeDownload tab Hook before downloa
75. in Link and Disable Ff352 An event isn t specified Ff357 AND event is in Phase Ff400 Coverage mapping error Wf401 Clear coverage Ff500 Illegal symbol Ff501 Illegal value Ff502 Illegal parameter Ff503 Max number of symbol is over Ff 504 This variable cannot be set as a break 1 Break cannot be set for the following variables Local variables static variables Array variables member variables of structures unions Register peripheral I O registers Variable expressions Wf600 Save project file Wf601 When connecting the target system please turn on the target system 1 When a target system is not connected simply click the lt OK gt button Wf602 Please change a MODE mask condition or connect the target system Ff603 Incorrect ID Code 1 This may be caused by the following MINICUBE The ID code is incorrect gt Input the correct ID code The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMDO pin is high gt Make the FLMDO pin low The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code bit 7 of address 0x79 is 0 gt Erase the internal flash memory once 388 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Af604 Incorrect ID Code Abort the debugger 1 This may be caused by the following MINICUBE The ID code is incorrect gt Input the correct ID code The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMDO p
76. in a misalign access Restriction on read access event Events can be detected in a misalign access by setting the read access event as shown below Access Address Access Size in Program Access Size Specified with Event Condition Multiple of 4 O of 4 Word Word ee of 4 Byte Multiple of 4 2 Half Word eoo L Multiple of 4 Half Word When the memory contents and a program shown below exist describe the event conditions as shown below to generate the access event Memory contents 0 1 2 3 3FF8000 11 22 33 44 Program OOFFE nop 01000 mov 0x3FF8001 gp 01006 nop 01008 Id w OxO gp r6 Event condition Event Name Evt0001 any Event Status R Access Size Byte Address 0x3FF8001 Data 0x22 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 87 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 3 Events may not be detected with the event link function The conditions differ for execution events and 88 access evenis Execution events If the address of an execution event satisfies the conditions shown below the second event cannot be detected normally This condition does not apply when the event at the second address is executed again using a branch etc The interval between the first and second instruction is within 4 bytes internal ROM internal RAM The first and second instruction are executed consecutively target A detailed example for a program and the event setting is shown below If events are set as shown in t
77. in accordance with the type of the member variable If a structure or union is defined in the structure or union the structure name or union name of the internal structure or union is also displayed The internal structure or union can be also expanded by using User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 187 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Data value display setting area This area is used to display and change watch data values A value is updated when execution is stopped To save a value select File menu gt Save As This area is blank if getting data has failed Values are changed through direct input The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key Display Data Contents Integer Hexadecimal Oxxxxx Decimal xxxx Octal Oxxxx Binary Obxxxx Character Character Enumeration type Member name If scope is specified Displayed in accordance with specified scope Floating point type 2 Single precision double precision supported The input display format is as follows inf nan integer e Jexponent integer fraction e Jexponent Data that has been invalidated because of a change in the scope or optimized compiling Remark1 Ifan array has too many variables and takes too long
78. in gray indicates that an event link condition is being edited and has not been registered yet Phase 1 This area is used to specify the sequence in which event conditions and events are Phase 2 detected Phase 3 Up to four sequences can be specified If a disable condition is detected while the program Phase 4 is being executed however the event conditions that have so far been satisfied are initialized and the event conditions are detected again starting from the first event condition If a link condition and a disable condition are detected at the same time the disable condition takes precedence Set Phase 1 gt Phase 2 gt Phase 3 gt Phase 4 in that order Phase 4 does not have to be set In this case an event occurs when the event condition set for the last phase has been detected An event condition can be set for only Phase 1 or the same event condition can be set for two or more Phases The number of event conditions that can be set to each phase of this area and while the dialog box refer to Table 6 23 Number of Event Conditions in Event Link Dialog Box Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area For details refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions Disable This area is used to set an event condition that invalidates the event conditions that have so far been satisfied The number of event condi
79. in this area is selected and internal verify of flash self write is always performed read verify is not performed MINICUBE User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 131 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 7 Clear register when reset Select this checkbox in order to clear the program registers r1 to r31 and registers EIPC EIPSW FEPC FEPSW CTPC CTPSW and CTBP upon CPU reset Under the default setting the registers are not cleared 8 Check monitor overwriting when downloading MINICUBE2 Select this checkbox to output an error F0c34 when overwriting to an area reserved for use by MINICUBE2 is attempted default selected 9 Function buttons OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box Restore Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened Help Displays the help window of this window 132 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Fail safe Break Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to perform the fail safe break settings Refer to 5 4 5 Fail safe break function IECUBE When a project file is read the results obtained by reading this project file are reflected in this dialog box Remark For details on the fail safe break function refer to the user s manuals of the in circuit emulator and the emulation board that are used Figure 6 7 Fail safe Break Dialog Box Fail sate Bre
80. instructions that caused destination access data i j access instructions ere re ee ee All PC TracedNotet a AwessDae ft rot Branch Poe Aec Traced Trae All PC Access Data TracedNotet TracedNote2 ame ee RTE mA E Ket ae Se Note1 When trace data that contains All PC is selected the unconditional trace mode is enabled In this case the qualify trace mode and the section trace mode cannot be set at the same time The condi tional trace setting is disabled Note2 When trace data that contains Access Data is selected when the high speed priority mode select Speed Priority in e Mode is selected and when access to the internal RAM area is performed 32 times in succession data may be missed e Mode Specify the trace collection mode Remark When Option menu gt RRM Function Coverage Function is selected the setting is fixed to Speed Priority User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 129 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Speed Priority This mode performs tracing by prioritizing speed real time operation In this mode data may be missed depending on the trace data to be collected Refer to Table 6 6 Relationship Between Meaning of Trace Data to Be Collected and Trace Collection Mode Trace Priority This mode performs tracing by prioritizing data collection non real time Since in order to reliably collect all the trace data the CPU s execution pipeline is momentarily stopped w
81. is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed During user program execution however the change cannot be written if attempted an error occurs The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key Note that the values of read only peripheral I O registers and I O ports cannot be changed The value of read protected peripheral I O registers and I O ports can be read by selecting Context Menu gt Compulsion Read The contents are displayed differently as follows depending on the attribute Black Display Read only or read write Write only Kk Value changes if read 2 Function buttons Refresh Updates the contents of the window with the latest data DMM Opens the DMM Dialog Box Close Closes this window View Menu IOR Window dedicated items When this window is the current window the following items are added on View menu Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays octal numbers default Sort By Name Displays in alphabetical order Sort By Address Displays in address order default Unsort Does not sort Attribute Switches on off display of Attribute Pick Up Displays only the registers selected in the IOR Select Dialog Box Select Opens the IOR Select Dialog Box Compulsion Read Forcibly r
82. is displayed in the form of Swb number in the default condition It can be changed to an alphanumeric string of up to 256 characters To change an event name select and click a name Then directly edit the name To set the editing press the Enter key When an event is enabled the checkbox is selected To be disable the checkbox is not selected Furthermore the name jumps to the Source Window by double clicking an event name if the event name corresponds to the source line whereas the name jumps to the Assemble Window if it does not correspond to the source line Brk The gt mark is displayed for a software break event that is set at the current PC position so that the software break event that caused a break can be easily identified File Line Symbol Offset This area displays the location at which a software break event was set as follows Program file name line number If the event corresponds to the source line Program file name symbol offset If the event dose not correspond to the source line Events are evaluated based on this when a symbol is re downloaded Address This area displays the address at which a software break event is set 2 Item label area The displayed items are sorted by clicking each item label ascending descending order is switched each time the label is clicked Name Sorts the character strings in alphabetic order ascending descending order Br
83. it was going to refer to device file A5300 A5301 Illegal device file type Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files A5302 A5303 Can not open database file 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger and device file Reading of database file went wrong A5304 Can not close database file A5305 Illegal database file format 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger and device file A5306 Database information has been already initialized A5307 F5308 Database information does not exist Can not open specified database file 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger F5309 Specified database file is illegal version 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger and the device file 7 From X6000 F6000 Current function does not exist F6001 Illegal symbol name F6002 Illegal condition F6003 Illegal function name F6004 Overflowed output buffer size F6005 Illegal expression 8 From X7000 F7000 Illegal mode User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 379 APPENDIX E MESSAGES F7001 User program is running F7002 User program has been stopped F7003 Trace enabled F7004 Trace memory is not set F7005 Function return address does not exist can
84. mask option Status Utilization status in the program Unknown Address Starting address of the interrupt handler Size Size of the interrupt handler unit bytes Maximum size for statuses other than use Fetch Number of bytes executed fetched Coverage Coverage of the interrupt handler 0 100 When the interrupt handler is outside the coverage measurement range 3 Function buttons Refresh Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data Close Closes this window Context Menu Source Text Displays the corresponding source text and source line using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destination address Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function If no line information exists at the jump destination address however you cannot jump Opens the Source Window If an active Source Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Assemble Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Assemble Window If an active Assemble Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Clear Clears the coverage measurement results Select Selects the coverage measurement range as a space of 1 MB or more Opens the Coverage Address Dialog Box 204 Users Manual
85. occur if an event break or software break occurs when rewriting the memory contents using the DMM function or reading the memory contents using the pseudo RRM function When NMI2 is input in a device with NMI2 the NMI2 interrupt routine of the user program is executed even if a break is taking effect Do not input NMI2 during a break period MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 8 If a breakpoint is set in the vicinity of address 0 in the D70F3166 the error message F0c25 Flash macro service ROM was accessed or stepped in will be displayed as a result of target reset or internal reset generated by the watchdog timer MINICUBE MINICUBE2 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 55 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 5 Program Execution Function The program execution function is used to start stop execution of the user program by the CPU and operation of the tracer Through user program execution the program counter PC advances until the set breakpoint or forced break Refer to 5 4 Break Function Remark While the user program is being executed trace event condition and timer event condition can be set Refer to Trace Dialog Box Timer Dialog Box IECUBE This section explains the following items Execution types Cautions 5 5 1 Execution types The following types of ID850QB execution functions are provided They are operated using the execution buttons on the toolbar or from th
86. of Aliases Functions Explains the functions of the command Usage example Shows an example of the usage of the command User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 297 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE address address Evaluation of address expression Input format address expression Functions Converts the address expression specified by expression into address Usage example IDCON 1 address main Oxaa IDCON 2 address main 1 Oxab 298 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE assemble assemble Disassemble line assemble Input format assemble options address code Functions Line assembles the character strings specified by codefrom the address specified by address When is specified for address it is understood as an address continuing from the immediately disassemble When code is omitted it is disassembled from the address specified by address The following are options They are ignored for line assembly code Command code is also displayed It is ignored for line assembly number number Number line is displayed It is ignored for line assembly Usage example IDCON 1 assemble n 5 main 0x000000aa B7 PUSH HL 0x000000ab B1 PUSH AX Ox000000ac 891C MOVW AX SP Ox000000ae D6 MOVW HL AX O0x000000af A100 MOV A 0H IDCON 2 assemble main mov a b IDCON 3 assemble mov a b User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 299 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
87. one batch program from another CD Displays the name of or changes the current directory CHCP Displays or sets the active code page number CHDIR Displays the name of or changes the current directory CHKDSK Checks a disk and displays a status report CHKNTFS Displays or modifies the checking of disk at boot time CLS Clears the screen 314 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE hook hook Setting of hook Input format hook scripitile Functions Sets the procedure for hook with scriptfile The hook setting is initialized when the project file is loaded and when the ID850QB is reset Usage example IDCON 1 hook d foo tcl User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 315 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Display setting of IE register Input format le reg address value ie dcu address value Functions The ie command depends on the IE When reg is specified for the subcommand referencing and setting of the IE register is executed When dcu is specified for the subcommand referencing and setting of the DCU register is executed When using a Midas Lab emulator input an rte4win32 internal command following ie For details on commands refer to the rte4w32 user s manual Example ie rom1 100000 20000 1m rom16 bus16 wren Caution The value of a register will be reset by 0 if a DCU register is referred to Usage example IDCON 1 ie reg 0x100 1 IDCON 2 ie dcu 0x100 1 316 Users Manual U186
88. position This button is displayed as the lt Stop gt button during a search gt gt Searches backward downward on screen for the text that satisfies the search condition set in the Source Search Dialog Box starting from the address at the cursor position This button is displayed as the lt Stop gt button during a search Stop during a Stops searching search Watch Adds the variables selected in the source text display area to the Watch Window If the Watch Window is not opened it is opened If no text is selected in the source text display area the Watch Window Is only opened This is the same operation as selecting View menu gt View Watch Quick Temporarily displays the contents such as a variable selected in the source text display area in the Quick Waich Dialog Box If no text is selected in the source text display area the Quick Watch Dialog Box is only opened This is the same operation as selecting View menu gt Quick Watch Refresh Updates the contents of the window with the latest data Close Closes this window View Menu Source Window dedicated items The following items are added in the View menu when the Source Window is active Create Break Event Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed Break when Access to Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read this Variable wri
89. referred to as the ID850QB is a software tool developed for NEC Electronics V850 microcontrollers for embedded control This software tool is intended to enable efficient debugging of user programs The functions that can be implemented with the ID850QB vary depending on the emulator connected descriptions in parentheses show the symbols used to indicate each device in this manual When the IECUBE is connected IECUBE When the N Wire CARD or MINICUBE is connected MINICUBE When the MINICUBE2 is connected MINICUBE2 Figure 1 1 ID850QB IDB8500B File Edit View Option Run Event Browse Jump Window Help TEE ic E kE BIBA gea Q All Seel E U Source rain c Search lt lt gt gt Watch Quick Refresh Close void dbe _func void dbg_func_sub afi I INT _user C Abstract main function Time Address Data Status DisAsm 48151 0000054 40063F00 BRM dispose 0x0 481532 aaa E0876001 BRM i Parameters None I enable interrupt Returns void maini void THPO_Start dbz_func while 1 TimerPO sta O3FFFO04 O3FFFOO04 O3FFFOOS O3FFFOO6 O3FFFOOA O3FFFOOC O3FFFO24 O3FFFO24 O3FFFO25 main c 44 dbg func OOO006BS POWOFF 9ms 64444us This chapter explains the following items regarding the ID850QB Features System Configuration Operating Environment Cautions During Debugging Notes on Using GHS Compiler 18 User s
90. registered by dragging and dropping in the Watch Window such a variable located in the Source Window 98 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 1 Drag amp drop details The operation to be performed after dropping the line number or address differs depending on the window or area in which the line number or address has been dropped Table 5 24 Details of Drag amp Drop Function Line Address Window Area to Drop to Operation After Drop The Event Manager or the event Automatically creates an execution event condition by using the manager area in each various event dropped line number or address as an address condition setting dialog box Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001 Evt00002 and so on A path count is not specified The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name offset value Condition setting area in each Automatically creates an execution event condition by using the various event setting dialog box dropped line number or address as an address condition other than address and data setting The automatically created event condition is set in each condition areas setting area in which the line number or address has been dropped Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001 Evt00002 and so on A path count is not specified The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name offset value Condit
91. s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 217 Context Menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add Watch Registers a selected character string to the Watch window Opens the Add Watch Dialog Box Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays hexadecimal numbers default Pick Up Displays only the registers selected in the Register Select Dialog Box Select Opens the Register Select Dialog Box 218 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Register Select Dialog Box This dialog box is used to select registers that are not displayed in the Register Window Refer to 5 8 Register Manipulation Function Figure 6 42 Register Select Dialog Box Register Select Display Hide All gt gt RS id 2 Cancel Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Register Window is the current window select View menu gt Select Explanation of Each Area 1 Display register selection area Display Registers displayed in the Register Window Button The following buttons are used to change register to be displayed Two or more registers can be selected by clicking any of the above buttons while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key lt lt Show Moves the register selected from the No Display list to Display Hide gt gt Moves the register selected from the Display lis
92. s manual of the target emulator When MINICUBE or N Wire CARD is used the support status depends on the target device so refer to the user s manual of the target device At present MINICUBE2 does not support this function Figure A 9 OpenBreak Window w OpenBreak Seles Setting of Timer terminal Wher CPU stops terminal i f OFEN HI Z C Output signal When When CPU stops termi stops termi E E EE E E E E E operation of the open break target pin after the CPU is stopped nal is OPEN Hi Z The open break target pin becomes the Hi Z state after the CPU is stopped Output signal The open break target pin outputs the signal even after the CPU is stopped User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 351 APPENDIX B ADDITIONAL CAUTIONS This chapter explains cautions on connecting each emulator and functional differences between when a Midas Lab emulator is connected and IECUBE is connected Cautions on using On Chip Debug Emulator MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Cautions on using Midas Lab emulator RTE 2000H TP B 1 Cautions on using On Chip Debug Emulator minicuBe minicuBe2 Note the following points when connecting on chip debug emulator MINICUBE N Wire CARD or MINICUBE2 1 2 3 4 B 1 1 The contents of the internal RAM may be lost if the CPU reset button is pressed in products supporting a boot swap function The following restrictions are applicable when using the AZ850 The hardware trace method cannot b
93. step execution is performed again Same operation as clicking this button each time a break has occurred Resets the CPU Elsame operation as this button 110 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change PC Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source Window or Assemble Window to the PC Break Point Sets or deletes a breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source Window or Software Break Point Assemble Window Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source Window or Assemble Window Delete All Breakpoints Uncond Trace ON IECUBE Deletes all the set break events Validates unconditional trace so that trace can always be executed during program execution default At this time the set trace event conditions are ignored The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated Cond Trace ON IECUBE Tracer Control Mode IECUBE Validates conditional trace and traces in accordance with the trace event condition during program execution The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated Sets trace control mode Non Stop Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest frame default Full Stop Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer Full Break Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program execution Delay Trigger Stop Traces data by the num
94. symbol information or other information for debugging debugging information Therefore perform the following processing during source file compiling 1 When using the PM Specify Debug Build when the Build mode is selected 2 When not using the PM Add the g option 1 4 2 Security ID MINICUBE MINICUBE2 The object file used when N Wire CARD MINICUBE MINICUBE2 is connected must include the security ID ID code information For the security ID settings refer to CA850 Operation For details about the security ID refer to the N Wire CARD MINICUBE MINICUBE2 user s manual The security ID from the ID850QB is set in the Configuration Dialog Box 24 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 5 Notes on Using GHS Compiler ID850QB V3 20 and later support Green Hills Software compiler that is compatible with the GHS Extended DWARF2 format 1 5 1 Supported version The following versions of the GHS compiler are supported Integrated development environment MULTI T M V3 5 1 V4 0 5 DWARF2 format Caution C is not supported In addition the V850E2R cores are not supported 1 5 2 Option added for debugging debug option The following option debug option should be added for debugging with the GHS compiler G dual_debug 1 5 3 Cautions on Using DWARF2 Load Module Note the following points when using a DWARF 2 format load module file GNU C expanded specifications are not yet suppor
95. target memory when the Enter key is pressed During user program execution however the change cannot be written if attempted an error occurs The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key The upper area displays the program register and the lower area displays the system register The program register display This area is used to display and change the program register change area The system register display This area is used to display and change the system register change area By double clicking flag name and flag value are displayed first character changes from to Expanded display is canceled by double clicking first character changes from to Caution When overflow of a register occurs due to an illegal value entered by the user the register will be updated with a value of OxFFFFFFFF 2 Function buttons Refresh Updates the contents of the window with the latest data DMM Opens the DMM Dialog Box Close Closes this window View Menu Register Window dedicated items The following items are added in the View menu when the Register Window is active Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays hexadecimal numbers default Pick Up Displays only the registers selected in the Register Select Dialog Box Select Opens the Register Select Dialog Box User
96. the ID850QB using the hook procedure The hook procedures are shown below BeforeDownload Hook before downloading AfterDownload Hook after downloading AfterCpuReset Hook after CPU reset during break BeforeCpuRun Hook before starting execution AfterCpuStop Hook after breaking By using hook procedures register values can be changed before downloading programs or after resetting the CPU An actual example of the procedure is shown below A hook is valid till the ID850QB is closed 1 When hook is set with ID850QB control command 1 Create script file a with an editor 2 Start up the ID850QB select Browse menu gt Console and open the Console Window 3 Ifthe script file is executed in the window as below the hook in the script file is set hook test tcl 2 When hook is set on downloading of project file 1 Create script file a with an editor Note 2 Start up the ID850QBand read test prj The hook in the script file is set proc BeforeDownload register MM 0x7 register PMC8 Oxff register PMC9 Oxff register PMCX 0xe0 proc AfterCpuReset register MM 0x7 register PMC8 Oxff register PMC9 Oxff register PMCX 0xe0 Note Be sure that the script file name is the same as the project file Example The script file corresponding to test prj is test tcl Allocate test prj test pri and test tcl in the same directory User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 295 CHAPTER 7 COMMA
97. the address range start address end address of the copy source To Specify start address of the copy destination 2 Function buttons OK Copies the memory contents in accordance with a given condition Stop copying Stops copying Cancel Closes this dialog box During copying this button is replaced by the lt Stop gt button Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 211 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Compare Dialog Box This dialog box is used to compare the memory contents in the Memory Window Refer to 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function Figure 6 38 Memory Compare Dialog Box Memory Compare Address 1 Memi i Meme oO 2 Cancel Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Edit menu gt Memory gt Compare Explanation of Each Area 1 Comparison range specification area Address This area is used to specify the comparison source address and comparison destination address The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols Mem1 Specify the address range start address end address of the comparison source Meme Specify the start address of the comparison destination 2 Function buttons OK Comp
98. the cursor and move the character string following the cursor forward Deletes a various event condition selected in the Event Manager or each event dialog box Deletes the data selected in the Watch Window Insert Alternately selects the insert mode and overwrite mode in the Source Window and Assemble Window However this key is invalid in the Memory Register and IOR Windows and only the overwrite mode can be used as an input mode PrintScreen Loads the entire display screen to the clipboard as a bitmap image function of Windows Esc Closes the pull down menu Closes the modal dialog box Restores the input data Up arrow key Moves the cursor up If the cursor is at the bottom of the screen scrolls the screen up one line at a time Down arrow key Moves the cursor down If the cursor is at the top of the screen scrolls the screen down one line at a time Right arrow key Moves the cursor to the left If the cursor is at the left most position on the screen scrolls the screen one column to the right Left arrow key Moves the cursor to the right If the cursor is at the right most position on the screen scrolls the screen one column to the left Opens the Help window o_o Enter Sets the input data Presses the default push button User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 363 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Executes the program to the cursor position in the Source or Assemble Window Same fu
99. the else statement has not been executed Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 9 10 Nr CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION A function that has been expanded in line cannot be stepped in Because the original function code is created separately from the part that has been expanded inline it is possible to set an event there but the event does not occur because the original code is not executed whether inline expansion has been performed can be checked by the mixed display on source window When two instructions are executed simultaneously in a program be aware of step wise executions and breaks based on the breakpoint setting Refer to examples 1 to 3 below lt Example 1 gt Two instructions are stepped from Address A where one instruction should be stepped Address A MOV r1 r2 Address A 2 XOR r1 r2 lt Example 2 gt When a breakpoint before execution is set at address A 2 and Go is executed a break does not occur at address A 2 Address A MOV r1 r2 Address A 2 XOR r1 r2 lt A breakpoint before execution lt Example 3 gt When a hardware breakpoint after execution or a software breakpoint is set at address A 2 and Go is executed a break occurs at address A 2 Address A MOV r1 r2 Address A 2 XOR ri r2 lt A breakpoint after execution software breakpoint User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 59 5 6 Watch Function CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION This section explains the following items related to the watch functi
100. the left mark an event condition can be validated or invalidated Start Event End Event This area is used to set an event condition for the timer The number of event conditions that can be registered in this area is one for each of the start and end conditions Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area For details refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions Time This area is used to select the unit in which the 2 Execution time display area is to be displayed Count Rate This area displays timer count rate values the values set in 2 Timer IECUBE in the Extended Option Dialog Box The timer count rate value at the time of the event creation is displayed when the contents of the existing timer event conditions are displayed The current timer count rate value is displayed when the event is newly created or when the contents of the Run Break event conditions are displayed This area cannot be edited When the timer count rate value of the existing timer event conditions needs to be changed first change the value of 2 Timer IECUBE in the Extended Option Dialog Box Then reset the timer event conditions When the timer count rate value at the time of the event creation is different from the value set in 2 Timer IECUBE in the Extended Option Dialog Box the timeout time is affected Therefore the valu
101. to be opened and its status differ as follows depending on the file to be loaded Loading source file to which symbol information has been read If there is a Source Window in the active status it is opened in the static status otherwise the Source Window is Opened in the active status Loading source file to which symbol information has not been read or view file A window of text format files is opened in the Source Window in the static status Figure 6 63 View File Load Dialog Box ea Chapters Sy Chapter3_2 Chapter4 3 Dey Files of type Source Mocks bi Cancel 2 Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening E click the Open button or select File menu gt Open 2 8 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Load file setting area Look in This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded A file name can be directly input from the keyboard or selected from the list File name Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified Files of type This area is used to specify the type extension of the file to be loaded Refer to Table 5 21 Type of View Files 2 Function buttons Open Loads the selected file After loading the file this dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything Help Displays this dialog box online help files Users M
102. to expand a warning message is displayed Remark2 The radix can be changed per variable using the Context Menu The display format of integers and the number of elements for arrays can be changed in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Remark3 Lines cannot be deleted and radices cannot be changed by selecting multiple lines on the Watch window Select one line at a time 2 Function buttons Add Opens the Add Watch Dialog Box If watch data is specified and the lt Add gt button is clicked in the Add Watch Dialog Box the specified watch data is added to the Watch Window Delete Deletes the selected watch data from the window Up Moves the selected line one line up Down Moves the selected line one line down Refresh Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data Close Closes this window 188 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View Menu Watch Window dedicated items When this window is the current window The following items are added on View menu Only the selected item is subject to this manipulation Create Break Event Creates a break event by using the selected item as follows this Variable Beak when Access to Creates a break event that can be accessed for read write by using the selected item Variable Break when Write to this Creates a break event that can be accessed for write by using the selected item thi
103. used however select Mode00 to Mode1F the modes to be displayed are determined by the definition of the device file When the IECUBE is connected and when the target is connected Target Depend can be selected 13 Memory Mapping This area is used to set the mapping Select the memory access size with Access Size specify the mapping attribute with Memory Attribute and specify the address range with Mapping Address The memory setting is performed by clicking the lt Add gt button and the result is listed in the area at the bottom of the window The mappable area depends on the product type Access Size Selects memory access size This setting is used to specify the access size on the ID850QB software the operation of the external bus hardware is set in accordance with the settings of the MODE pin and I O register 8Bit 16Bit Accesses memory with Id b instruction st b instruction Accesses memory with Id h instruction st h instruction 32Bit Accesses memory with Id w instruction st w instruction Memory Attribute The following mapping attributes can be selected Select a mapping attribute according to the usage Refer to lable 5 2 Mapping Attribute Emulation ROM lECUBE With memory board Selects the in circuit emulator alternate ROM The mapping unit is 1MB Emulation RAM With memory board IECUBE Selects the in circuit emulator alternate RAM T
104. using the following procedure Compiling and re downloading the file can be automatically executed Refer to 4 4 1 Auto load by correcting source code The load module is downloaded again to the ID850QB by compiling and linking the file on the PM with the activated ID850QB Refer to 4 4 2 Auto load by starting debugger Caution This processing cannot be performed if it is selected that the standard editor idea L is used with the PM 4 4 1 Auto load by correcting source code Correct the source file for auto load as follows 1 Open the source file to be corrected in the Source Window Select File menu gt Open and specify the file to be corrected on the ID850QB if the file is already open in the Source Window that window is displayed in the forefront gt The specified file will be opened in the Source Window 2 Select Edit menu gt Edit Source on the ID850QB gt An editor will be opened and the specified source file will be read 3 Correct the source file on the editor 4 Terminate the editor Caution The CPU reset is not performed when the load module file is automatically downloaded The debug window that was opened when the editor was called and each event setting will be restored If the previously used line or symbol has been deleted as a result of correcting the source file the follow ing happens A variable that was displayed is dimmed The event mark of an event condition is di
105. value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1 Example1 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition Data 0x4000 Mask OxFF Example2 0x4000 0x4001 0x4100 and 0x4101 satisfy the condition Data 0x4000 Mask 0x101 5 Search condition setting area Scan Whole Region This should be selected to search the entire specified range Frame This area is used to specify a frame number to be searched The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal A symbol can be also specified by Frame Number Specification Format Direction This area is used to specify the direction of the search Up Forward search Searches data forward upward on screen from the current position of the cursor Down Backward search Searches data backward downward on screen from the current position of the cursor default 6 Function buttons Find Next Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition If the specified frame is found as a result of a search it is highlighted To continue searching click this button again Set Find Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box Close Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files 242 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Data Select Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to selec
106. with linking window IECUBE A selected window is linked Source Text Links the Source Window Assemble Memory Links the Assemble Window Links the Memory Window Context Menu Move Moves the display position Opens the Trace Move Dialog Box Trace Clear Clears the trace data Select Selects the contents to be displayed Opens the Trace Data Select Dialog Box Mix Switches whether to display the source file in mixed display mode Selected Mixed display Cleared Hidden default Window Synchronize Links the Trace View Window with the following windows Refer to 5 16 3 Trace result with linking window IECUBE Source Text Assemble Links the Source Window Links the Assemble Window Memory Links the Memory Window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 23 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Text Displays the corresponding source text and source line using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destination address Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function If no line information exists at the jump destination address however you cannot jump Opens the Source Window If the Source Window in active is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Assemble Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump f
107. 0 Trace Function IECUBE The trace event conditions for when performing conditional trace are specified in this dialog box Refer to Table 5 13 Types of Conditional Trace Registration and setting of trace event conditions is done by setting each item 256 items max in this dialog box and then clicking the lt OK gt button The registered trace event conditions are managed by the Event Manager The number of trace event conditions that can be simultaneously used validated is limited Refer to 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition Remark Trace event condition setting enable disable delete operations are possible even during user pro gram execution In this case the tracer operation is momentarily stopped during manipulation Figure 6 52 Trace Dialog Box A hew Set Restore Cancel Help Trace Mame 1 Tre00001 oe Add Evert Add Link 1 shrink lt 44 Delay Trigger nection Start Section End ualt Event Manager 2 Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening E oio the Tre button or select Event menu gt Trace User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 247 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Trace event condition setting area Trace Name This area is used to set a trace event name Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name To display the contents of an already created event condition select
108. 0000BC M1 br _sub2 0x2 _ 01686 4 0000009A BRM1 st w r6 Ox8 sp _ 01687 3 0000009E BRM1 st w rO OxO sp IDCON 4 xtrace clear IDCON 5 xtrace addup true Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM fulloreak delaystop delaybreak machine or event is selected 339 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Overview Sample Window Activation Explanation of Each Sample Window A 1 Overview With the ID850QB the user can create custom windows in addition to the existing windows The Tcl Tool Command Language interpreter and the commands for controlling the debugger are implemented in the ID850QB Users can create windows using this Tcl The ID850QB is supplied with samples of the following expansion windows A 2 Sample Window Table A 1 List of Expansion Window Sample flistwindow window Listwindow Displays a list of the source files and functions a Displays a list of the source files and functions of the source files and functions Memory Mapped I O window Writes to or reads from the specified address Sym Inspect window Searches through a list of properly described symbols Run Break Time window Displays two types of time Time at which the user program starts running Run and time at which the user program breaks Break OpenBreak window OpenBreak window This window is used to set the open break function A 3 Activation The expansion window can be activated by selecting List Grep RRM Hook Memory Sym
109. 04EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE inspect inspect Symbol inspect Input format inspect options progname pattern Functions Searches and displays the load module symbol specified with progname using the regular expression of pattern The following regular expressions can be used Match 1 character Match characters other than 0 chars Match chars character Range specification such as a z 0 9 also possible x Match character x specification also possible The following are options nocase The case Is distinguished address Displays in pair with symbol address Usage example IDCON 1 inspect test1 out a z Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 317 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE jump jump Jump to window Input format jump source line filename line jump options address Aliases Functions Displays the window specified by options source The Source Window is displayed from the address specified by address assemble The Assemble Window is displayed from the address specified by address memory The Memory Window is displayed from the address specified by address line The command is moved to the line specified by ine focus The Focus is moved to the window displayed Usage example IDCON 1 jump s main IDCON 2 jump s I mainfile c 10 IDCON 3 jump m array 318 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM
110. 103 Data transfer to ICE is timed out Please confirm the power of ICE connection of the interface cable or I O address of the PC interface board F0104 Data receive from ICE is timed out Please confirm the power of ICE connection of the interface cable or I O address of the PC interface board A0105 Failed in reading device file file name 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the device file A0106 Illegal data received 1 Check the power of the emulator cable connections and setting of the interface board and restart the debugger A0107 Can not communicate with ICE A0108 Failed in reading initialization file expc ini User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 367 APPENDIX E MESSAGES A0109 Can not communicate with ICE Please terminate the debugger and check the power of ICE or the connection of cable then restart the debugger 1 An error may have occurred during USB communication such as disconnection of power or cable or IECUBE is faulty IECUBE A010a Cannot run debugger and a utility at the same time 1 The QB Programmer MINICUBE2 self testing tool or OCD Checker is running so terminate it first 2 MINICUBE2 is being used by ID78K0 QB ID78KOS QB or ID78KOR QB so terminate it first 3 MINICUBE2 is being used by MULTI or C SPY so terminate it first A01a0 No response from the evachip Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT HLDRQ and so on No response
111. 214495 QUOOUU0 W 214505 OSFF i354 i 214505 OUOOOO0 W 214515 00000524 030 HI mow rll rb return subeli al 214515 0AFF7358 R 214525 QOOOU001 R User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 13 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 10 4 Mixed display mode Trace View Window Source file display combined with trace results can be done by selecting View gt Mix in the Trace View Window mixed display mode If a program code corresponds on the program fetch address to be displayed a source file line is displayed before the line indicating the result of tracing that program fetch address The source file line is displayed emphasized in green Mixed display mode OO0008B LOCATION OH maini void y SP 0FD2 0H 3 3 6 5 6 3 5 6 6 Caution The mixed display mode is valid only when the load module has been downloaded and symbol information is read and when a fetch address fetch data fetch status or result of disassembly is displayed 5 10 5 Tracer operation The trace operation differs as follows according to the user program execution format and the tracer control mode Tracer manipulations during program execution are performed by selecting Run gt Tracer Start Tracer Stop 1 Operation during execution The tracer operation differs as follows according to Run gt Cond Trace ON Uncond Trace ON selection Table 5 11 Type of Trace Modes Unconditional trace Trace is started when
112. 292 7 7 1 Samples calculator script 293 7 8 Callback Procedure 294 7 9 Hook Procedure 295 7 10 Related Files 296 7 11 Cautions 296 7 12 Explanation of Commands 297 address 298 assemble 299 batch 300 breakpoint 301 cache 303 dbgexit 304 dbgopt 305 download 306 efconfig 307 erase 309 extwin 310 finish 311 flop 312 go 313 help 314 hook 315 ie 316 inspect 317 jump 318 map 319 mdi 321 memory 322 module 323 next 324 refresh 325 register 326 reset 327 run 328 step 329 stop 330 tkcon 331 upload 332 version 333 watch 334 where 335 wish 336 xcoverage 337 xtime 338 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM xtrace 339 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW 340 A 1 Overview 340 A 2 Sample Window 340 A 3 Activation 340 A 4 Explanation of Each Sample Window 341 List window 341 Grep window 342 RRM window 343 Hook window 344 Memory Mapped I O window 346 Memory Mapped O dialog box 348 Sym Inspect window 349 Run Break Time window 350 OpenBreak window 351 APPENDIX B ADDITIONAL CAUTIONS 352 B 1 Cautions on using On Chip Debug Emulator MINICUBE MINICUBE2 352 B 1 1 When MINICUBE or N Wire CARD Is Connected MINICUBE 352 B 1 2 When MINICUBE2 Is Connected MINI
113. 4 6 13 Event Setting Status Event Mark 166 6 14 Watch Window Input Format 194 6 15 How Variable Is Handled When Scope Is Specified 194 6 16 Measurable Values 231 6 17 Settable Range of Address Condition Trace 241 6 18 Frame Number Specification Format 246 6 19 Number of Events Settable 248 6 20 Coverage Measurement Range Detail 255 6 21 Separator for Displaying Event Details 261 6 22 Settable Range of Address Condition Event 266 6 23 Number of Event Conditions in Event Link Dialog Box 270 6 24 Number of Events Settable in Condition Setting Area 273 7 1 Debugger Control Command List 289 16 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 1 2 7 3 1 4 7 5 7 6 7 1 7 8 A 1 B 1 C 1 C 2 C 3 C 4 C 5 C 6 D 1 E 1 List of Console Tcl Commands 290 Contents of File aliases tcl 291 List of Variables 291 List of Packages 292 Message ID 294 List of Related Files 296 Parameter Set Values example 308 List of Expansion Window Sample 340 Functional Differences Between V850 IECUBE and RTE 2000H TP PG2 lE 354 List of Character Set 357 List of Special Characters 357 Input Format of Numeric Values 359 List of Operators 360 Operator Priority 361 Range of Radixes 362 Key Function List 363 Types of Messages 367 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 17 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW The Integrated Debugger ID850QB for the V850 microcontrollers hereafter
114. 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 41 5 1 Setting Debugging Environment 42 5 1 1 Setting operating environment 42 5 1 2 Setting option 42 5 1 3 Setting mapping 43 5 1 4 To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory 5 2 Download Function Upload Function 44 5 2 1 Download 44 5 2 2 Downloading to External Flash Memory 45 5 2 3 Upload 46 5 3 Source Display Disassemble Display Function 47 5 3 1 Source display 47 5 3 2 Disassemble display 47 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 43 10 5 3 3 Mixed display mode Source Window 48 5 3 4 Convert symbol symbol to address 49 5 4 Break Function 50 5 4 1 Break types 50 5 4 2 Breakpoint setting 51 5 4 3 Setting breaks to variables 52 5 4 4 Hardware break and software break 52 5 4 5 Fail safe break function IECUBE 54 5 4 6 Cautions 54 5 5 Program Execution Function 56 5 5 1 Execution types 56 5 5 2 Cautions 58 5 6 Watch Function 60 5 6 1 Displaying and changing data values 60 5 6 2 Displaying and changing local variable values 61 5 6 3 Registering and deleting watch data 61 5 6 4 Changing watch data 62 5 6 5 Temporarily displaying and changing data values 62 5 6 6 Callout watch function 62 5 6 7 Stack trace display function 63 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function 64 5 7 1 Displaying and changing memory contents 64 5 7 2 Access monitor function IECUBE
115. BE Selected Cumulative display of memory contents changes Cleared Display of only memory contents changes from previous update User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 207 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Search Dialog Box This dialog box is used to search the memory contents of the part of the Memory Window at which the cursor is located Refer to 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function If the cursor is placed in memory display area in the Memory Window the specified data is treated as a binary data string and if the cursor is placed in the ascii display area the specified data is treated as an ASCII character string and the contents of these respective areas are searched By setting each item and then clicking the lt Find Next gt button searching can be started By clicking the lt Set Find gt button the direction buttons lt lt and gt gt in the Memory Window can be used for the search Caution Non mapped peripheral I O registers and I O protect areas are not searched Figure 6 35 Memory Search Dialog Box Memory Search Find What B1AF 1 Unit C Byte Half word 9 Word set Find 2 Direction klase Scan Whole Region C Up Down Help Address Ox3ff7000 er xotteu0 Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Memory Window is the current window select View menu gt Search or click the lt Search gt button in the same window 208 Users Manual U18604EJ1
116. CA m m o es TEF E IE oo OO ie fe 00 OO m a 00 OO ie ME 00 OO fe fe 00 OO m O 0 00 OO fe fe 00 OO fe fe 00 OO i oe 00 OO ie fe 00 OO fe fe D i O i Cc Cc Ci Cc Cc Cc oe Cc Cc Cc Cc Ci haw oe a 5 7 3 Filling copying and comparing memory contents Memory contents are Filled copied and compared in the Memory Fill Dialog Box Memory Copy Dialog Box and Memory Compare Dialog Box displayed by selecting Edit menu gt Memory gt Fill Copy Compare The comparison results are displayed in the Memory Compare Result Dialog Box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 65 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 7 4 Flash memory writing function MINICUBE MINICUBE2 With the ID850QB the internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded by the same access method as an ordinary memory operation The data on the internal flash memory can be changed from the Memory Window Assemble Window Watch Window Memory Fill Dialog Box and Memory Copy Dialog Box without having to be aware that the data is that of the internal flash memory The load module can also be downloaded to the internal flash memory by using the flash self programming function Refer to Flash Option Dialog Box and Data Flash Option Dialog Box Caution1 No data can be written to the internal flash memory during user program execution Caution2 Downloading data to the on chip flash
117. CE Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box This dialog box is used to read the setting files Refer to 5 15 3 Window setting information setting file When a setting file is loaded the target window opens and the setting information at saving is restored Figure 6 65 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box 4 Chapter3_1 O Chapter3_2 4 Chapter4 B Dev File name Files of type Watch Gk wch v Cancel Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening select File menu gt Environment gt Open Explanation of Each Area 1 Load file setting area Look in This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded A file name can be directly input from the keyboard or selected from the list Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified File name Files of type This area is used to specify the type extension of the file to be loaded Refer to Table 5 22 Type of Setting Files 2 Function buttons Open Loads the selected file After loading the file this dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 281 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Reset Debugger Dialog Box This dialog box is used to initialize the ID850QB CPU and symbol information Figure 6 66 Reset Debugger Dialog Box Reset Debugger Pee eee We D
118. CUBE2 353 B 2 Cautions on using Midas Lab emulator RTE 2000H TP 354 APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS 357 C 1 Usable Character Set 357 C 2 Symbols 358 C 3 Numeric Values 359 C 4 Expressions and Operators 360 C 5 File Names 362 APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST 363 APPENDIX E MESSAGES 366 E 1 Display Format 366 E 2 Types of Messages 367 E 3 Message Lists 367 APPENDIX F INDEX 391 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 13 LIST OF FIGURES Figure No Title Page re 1 1 ID850QB 18 1 2 Example of ID850QB System Configuration IECUBE 21 1 3 Example of ID850QB System Configuration N Wire CARD MINICUBE 22 1 4 Example of ID850QB System Configuration MINICUBE2 22 3 1 Check RTE2 28 3 2 Startup Option Example 29 3 3 Configuration Dialog Box 31 3 4 Exit Debugger Dialog Box 32 4 1 Downloading Multiple Files 37 5 1 Breakpoint Setting 51 5 2 Setting Break to Variable 52 5 3 Management of Software Breaks 53 5 4 Fail safe Break Setting 54 5 5 Execution Button 56 5 6 Run Menu 56 5 7 Watch Window 60 5 8 Specification of the Display Format Debugger Option Dialog Box 60 5 9 Local Variable Window 61 5 10 Change Watch Dialog Box 62 5 11 Quick Watch Dialog Box 62 5 12 Callout Watch Function 62 5 13 Stack Window 63 5 14 Access Monitor Function Memory Window 65 5 15 Absolute Name Function N
119. Device Connection MINICUBE2 This area is used to select the port to be connected for serial communication between MINICUBE2 and the device on the target system MINICUBE2 supports UART and CSI H S as a communication interface The type of selectable ports varies depending on the device used 10 Target IECUBE This area is used to select whether the target board is to be connected to the in circuit emulator or not Refer to Table 3 2 Error Message Output Pattern IECUBE Connect Be connected Not Connect Not be connected Remark Itis used to detect an illegal power supply status The default is determination by detecting the power TVDD of the target 11 Fail safe Break IECUBE This area is used to select the fail safe break function Clicking the lt Detail gt button opens the Fail safe Break Dialog Box so that the fail safe break function can be individually set 12 Mask This area is used to mask the signal sent from the target The signal of a masked pin is not input to the in circuit emulator Mask a pin only when the operation of the target system is not stable at the debugging stage 124 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Remark1 By selecting RESET the external reset or internal reset generated by the watchdog timer can be masked At this time whether internal reset can be masked or not depends on the device Remark2 If a device file supporting TM tag is
120. ECUBE 89 5 13 2 Pseudo real time monitor function Break When Readout 5 14 DMM Function 91 5 15 Load Save Function 92 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file 92 5 15 2 Window display information view file 93 5 15 3 Window setting information setting file 94 5 16 Functions Common to Each Window 95 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 90 5 16 1 Active status and static status 95 5 16 2 Jump function 96 5 16 3 Trace result with linking window IECUBE 98 5 16 4 Drag amp drop function 98 5 16 5 Cautions 101 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 102 6 1 Window List 102 6 2 Explanation of Windows 105 Main Window 106 Configuration Dialog Box 118 Extended Option Dialog Box 127 Fail safe Break Dialog Box 133 RRM Setting Dialog Box 135 Flash Option Dialog Box 137 Data Flash Option Dialog Box 147 Debugger Option Dialog Box 150 Project File Save Dialog Box 156 Project File Load Dialog Box 157 Download Dialog Box 158 Upload Dialog Box 161 Load Module List Dialog Box 163 Source Window 165 Source Search Dialog Box 170 Source Text Move Dialog Box 172 Assemble Window 174 Assemble Search Dialog Box 178 Address Move Dialog Box 180 Symbol To Address Dialog Box 181 List Window 183 Watch Window 186 Quick Watch Dialog Box 191 Add Watch Dialog Box 193 Change Watch Dialog Box 196 Local Var
121. EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Cautions 1 The Data Flash Option dialog box cannot be opened if the Use Data Flash checkbox is not selected in the Configuration Dialog Box 2 The Data Flash Option dialog box is made unavailable if the Use Data Flash checkbox is cleared after the Enable Data Flash Error Emulation checkbox is selected in the Configuration Dialog Box 3 If an RRM area is set to the data flash memory in the RRM Setting Dialog Box the written values are not reflected during user program execution because writing to the data flash memory is always performed via the library Due to the same reason the written values are not reflected to highlighting of addresses by the access monitor function Read Write Read and Write in the Memory Window 4 Writing to the data flash memory via the DMM Dialog Box is disabled during user program execution 5 An unexpected break may occur if a data flash area is accessed via a library when using IECUBE To prevent this clear the Non Map check box for Internal RAM and Non Map Read and Write check boxes for I O register in the Fail safe Break Dialog Box 6 If atarget memory is mapped to a 1 MB area that includes a data flash area and write access is performed for the data flash area no guard breaks occur 7 If no target memory is mapped to a 1 MB area that includes a data flash area and read access is performed for the 1 MB area other than the data flash area no guard bre
122. EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7 3 List of Aliases The commands can be specified with other names by defining their aliases in the file bin idtcl aliases tcl The aliases are described by default as shown below This file can be edited with an editor Table 7 3 Contents of File aliases tcl alias a assemble alias b breakpoint alias g go alias i step i alias jump alias download alias m memory alias n next alias r run alias s step alias w watch 7 4 List of Variables Table 7 4 List of Variables User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 291 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7 5 List of Packages Table 7 5 List of Packages Package Function 7 6 Key Bind tesh Emacs like Complement of command name Tab Complement of file name Tab HTML help F1 7 7 Expansion Window The expansion windows can be created using Tk In the expansion windows Widget is allocated with dcl as a root instead of When the following script files are allocated in bin idtcl tools an expansion window is added on selecting Browse menu gt Others The mdi command an exclusive command for expansion windows has been added Sample tcl wm protocol dcl WM_DELETE_ WINDOW exit mdi geometry 100 50 button dcl b text Push command exit pack dcl b Caution In the expansion windows Tk menu commands cannot be used because of the restrictions of MDI windows 292 Users Manual U18604EJ1V
123. ENCE Find Next Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition If the specified character string is found as a result of a search it is highlighted To continue searching click this button again Set Find Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box Stop during Stops searching searching Close Closes this dialog box During searching this button is replaced by the lt Stop gt button Help Displays this dialog box online help files Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 171 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Text Move Dialog Box This dialog box is used to specify a file to be displayed in the Source Window and the position from which displaying the file is to be started Refer to 5 3 1 Source display Figure 6 21 Source Text Move Dialog Box Source lext Option C Address Symbal 1 Line File File Browse To main c 27 2 Cancel Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Source path search order Opening When the Source Window is the current window select View menu gt Move Explanation of Each Area 1 Source file setting area Option Selects the input mode when the display start position is specified Address Symbol This should be selected to specify by an address or symbol Line File This should be selected to specify by a line number or file name To search the file name
124. ENCE 2 Save Address This area is used to specify the range of address to be saved All the ranges are saved this area cannot be set when coverage data cvb is selected An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal 3 Function buttons Save Saves the file according to the setting Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything Help Displays this dialog box online help files Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened 162 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Load Module List Dialog Box This dialog box displays the list of the files file paths and file format that have been downloaded from Download Dialog Box Refer to 5 2 Download Function Upload Function The listed files excluding the coverage data files are saved in the project file they are downloaded when the project file is opened next By using the lt Download gt button the Download Dialog Box can be opened and a file can be downloaded Figure 6 18 Load Module List Dialog Box Load module list Module list Format File name ELF AG A850 testi kx rom out HEX testhex Download Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select File menu gt Load Module User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 163 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
125. FF735 i 007419 914485 DOOODAFG 4 D02420 214485 OOOO053A ESED MI br _subl 0x N02421 214485 00000516 63370500 BRHI st w r6 Ox4 se p42 214495 03FF7358 i DOES 214495 qooo0001 4 Ne 4 714505 03FF54 y NOY Are 14505 nooo M D0429 214515 00000524 0E30 W mow rll rb return subf i a NO 4350 214515 0aFF7358 R Noe 431 214525 UOOUU001 F _ a ooo Frame lime Fetch access display area DisAsm Data access display area Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu Trace View Window dedicated items Context Menu Opening click the TrW button or select Browse menu gt Trace 234 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Point mark display area This area displays the Event Setting Status Event Mark If an execution event or access event is set at the corresponding trace address the mark corresponding to the type of the event is displayed The mark displayed is not that during trace but an event mark that is set when the trace result is displayed 2 Trace mode display area This area displays the type of tracer mode A A start or an end frame section trace or qualify trace Delay trigger frame M DMA point access frame DMA start point and end point Refer to 5 10 7 DMA point trace function N Frame for which not all the trace data was fetched 3 Trace result display area This area displays the trace resul
126. FFFH RESV 1FFFFH RESV OFFFFH FFFFH RESV 107FFH a 20FFFH RESV 3FFFFH a 7FFFFH RESV The lowest address in a block that includes reset vector address 8 Function buttons OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files 140 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Special Notes On Flash Self Programming Emuration 1 List of Supported Devices The following lists the devices that support flash self programming emulation function as of February 2007 Table 6 9 Flash Self Programming Emulation Supported Device Flash Memory Device Process Typet V850ES Sx2 V850ES Fx2 V850E RS1 V850E IA4 u PD70F3229Y V850ES Hx2 V850ES Jx2 Type3 V850ES Kx1 Only for microcontrollers with on chip single power supply flash memory V850ES Kx1 V850ES Kx2 Type4 V850ES Sx3 V850ES Fx3 V850ES Jx3 V850E Dx3 2 List of Availability of Emulation for Flash Function The following table lists whether or not each flash function can be emulated and restrictions when performing flash self programming emulation function with the ID850QB Emulated Can be emulated Restriction Can be emulated with some restrictions Not emulated Cannot be emulated Table 6 10 List of Availability of Emulation for Flash Function Type1 Ava
127. For FlashBlockErase and FlashBlockBlankCheck the timing at which the return value changes from FE_BUSY to FE_OK differs from that in the actual device FlashBootSwap Boot area block swapping function Not emulated FlashSetUserHandler User interrupt handler registration function Emulated FlashFLMDCheck FLMDO pin status check function Emulated FlashSetInfoEx Flash information setting function Restriction Restriction Note The boot area swapping setting is ignored Restriction FlashStatusCheck Restriction FlashNWordRead Function for reading n words Restriction Restriction Note If an address in the guard area is specified as the third argument a fail safe break occurs at an unexpected address Note This function has been added in flash self programming Ver 5 00 and later 142 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6 11 List of Availability of Emulation for Flash Function Types Availability Flash Function Functional Outline and Restriction of Emulation Type3 V850ES Kx1 Only for microcontrollers with on chip single power supply flash memory V850ES Kx1 V850ES Kx2 FlashEnv Flash environment initialization end function Emulated FlashBlockErase One block erasure function Emulated FlashWordWrite One word writing function Restriction If an address in the guard area is specified as the third argument a fail safe break occurs at an unexpected address FlashBloc
128. IE Status RUN User program execution in progress the color of the status bar changes COV Coverage operating IECUBE Time Displays the result of measuring the time from the start of user program execution to the occurrence of break Run Break time Note TIMER OVERFLOW Measurement result overflowed Note It is possible to measure for 20 ns or more until 195 2 hours 4K division IECUBE It is possible to measure for 200 ns or more until 7 minutes DCK 10MHz MINICUBE It is possible to measure for 100 us or more until 100 hours MINICUBE2 Caution If the target power supply is turned off during a break when using MINICUBE and N Wire CARD RUN state is displayed This state is released when the target power supply is turned on This is not an abnormal operation Do not turn off the target power supply during debugging using MINICUBE2 Table 6 4 Break Cause IRAM Write Protect xxx xxx During break performed verify check of IRAM guarded area and rewrote value IECUBE xxx xxx indicates the relevant address and data in case of multiple items only first item is displayed Illegal Opcode Trap Break due to illegal opcode trap IECUBE Event Break Event name or Stopped due to event cause of displayed event name or event link name Event link name Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 117 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Configuration Dialog Box This dialog box is used to display and set the ID850QB operation environme
129. IRST 256K 1 frame MIDDLE 256K 2 1 frame LAST 5 frames 250 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Restore Restores the previous settings Cancel Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 251 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Code Coverage Window IECUBE This dialog box displays the code coverage measurement result CO coverage Refer to 5 11 Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE The lines where the user program has been executed or not yet executed can be checked in the Source Window or Assemble Window Caution Remark Opening Explanation of Each Area The coverage measurement result is inaccurate if the on chip flash memory data is replaced via emulation of flash self programming Refer to Flash Option Dialog Box Coverage data is cleared when the ID850QB is started RESET INTTPOCCO INTWDT 2 TRAPOO TRAPO TRAPUZ TRAPOS TRAPO4 TRAPOS TRAPOE TRAPO TRAPOS TRAPOS TAAPOA TRAPOE TRAPOL TRAPOD TRAPOE TRAPOF TRAPIDO Context Menu Opening Figure 6 54 Code Coverage Window Gode Coverage nonmaskable maskable honmask able nonmaskable zottware zottware NOnNUZE zottware NOnUZE zottware nOnUZE zottware nonUZE zottware MOnUsE zottware NONUZE zottware nOnUZE zottware nOnUZE z
130. Inspect or RunBreak Time in Others on the Browse menu Remark Each tcl file is installed in NEC Electronics Tools ID850QB Vx xx bin idtcl tools 340 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW A 4 Explanation of Each Sample Window The ID850QB provides the sample window below List window The lists of the source files and functions are displayed in a tree format in this window When a function name in the list is clicked the corresponding source is displayed Figure A 1 List Window jal ai staile iei array 5 00 0210 0020 0 chrock zi int if i inkt iz Hetatic elruct si arlit pid ma iml ysl fi ari i y Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 341 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Grep window Search for a character string is performed in the files under the source path When the search result is clicked the corresponding source is displayed Figure A 2 Grep Window il j AT Simei bahe Seach Myrrh ase Fiter h sc jitt y fplali inl al zg hlalic int array t 09 kruckt at ini i ini fi d kaiiz zkruel st arii ini bi E Os ar 5 i i252 E funcla be Subli jz dbz i J Bibli Iz Beds isei c ji nan ON ROOF E S lt Jump gt button Put the cursor on a section in the search result and click this button to open the correspondin
131. Jump function Opens the Assemble Window If an active Assemble Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Memory Window If an active Memory Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Window This window is used to display and change the memory contents Refer to 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function Other operations using Context Menu Function buttons etc can be performed in this window Moreover there are two statuses Active status and static status for this window When the window is in the active status it has the Trace result with linking window IECUBE Jump function Refer to 5 16 Functions Common to Each Window Remark1 Remark2 The memory access status read write read amp write can be displayed using different colors Refer to 5 7 2 Access monitor function IECUBE IECUBE The display start position when the this window is opened is as follows First time Display starts from the first address of the RAM area Second and subsequent times Display starts from the address at which an active status window was closed if an active status window has never be
132. Manual Load Module fro mp out F Function Section Interrupt TMPO_Stop TMPO_Changelntervall main _s_erte0000 Systemlnit dbg_func_sub dbg_func _s SYSTEMOOO0 INT_Init TMPO_Init TMPO_Start int_timer Software Break i 48154 OQ0005AA 1E02 HI 481552 000005854 40063F00 BRM 491562 waa BOFF 7600 BRN ar main lp 481572 oqova F505 BRI 481582 000006D2 0002 BRM 481592 00000528 80072100 BRMI 481592 00000520 E0074401 M1 timer c timer c man c crte s systeminit c main c main c SYSTEM s int c timer c timer c TIMER_user c Ox8a8 AUTO U18604EJ1VOUM Total Coverage 923 callt Oxle lp lp main Ip call main fu br _maintOxe callt 0x0 prepare lp Ox ctret dispose Dx jar Refresh INS CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features The ID850QB has the following features New functions enhanced functions Other functions 1 1 1 New functions enhanced functions 1 Support of Midas Lab emulator Midas Lab emulator RIE 2000H TP is now supported refer to 3 2 Cautions on connecting Midas Lab emulator 2 Support of flash self programming for MF2 devices IECUBE Flash self programming for MF2 devices is now supported refer to Flash Option Dialog Box 3 Support of VSB ROM and VSB RAM of V850 Dx3 IECUBE MINICUBE VSB ROM and VSB RAM of the V850 Dx3 are now supported refer to Configuration Dialog Box and Download Dialog Box 4 Support
133. Memory Fill Dialog Box 210 Memory manipulation function 64 Memory Search Dialog Box 208 Memory Window 203 Menu bar 107 Messages 366 Midas Lab 28 MINICUBE 22 MINICUBE2 22 Mixed display mode Source Window 48 Trace View Window 74 N N Wire CARD 22 N Wire Checker 27 O OCD Checker 27 Operating Environment 23 Operators 360 Others Grep window 342 Hook window 344 Memory Mapped I O dialog box 348 Memory Mapped I O window 346 RRM window 343 Run Break Timer window 350 Sym Inspect window 349 p PM 24 36 Point mark area 166 175 program code 167 Program execution function 56 58 project file 92 283 Project File Load Dialog Box 157 Project File Save Dialog Box 156 Q Qualify trace 76 Quick Watch Dialog Box 191 R Range of Radixes 362 Register Manipulation Function 67 392 User s Manual Register Select Dialog Box 219 Register Window 216 Relationship between the time tag counter division ratio and maximum measurement time 128 Relationship between the timer count division ratio and maximum measurement time 130 reset 282 Reset Debugger Dialog Box 282 RRM Setting Dialog Box 135 RTE 2000H TP 28 rte4win32 28 Run Break event 70 S Section trace 76 Security ID 24 Setting debugging environment 42 setting file 94 Sett
134. N Wire Checker The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem MINICUBE 2 The device file selection may be incorrect Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration Dialog Box If this does not solve the problem the IE may be malfunctioning IECUBE 3 An attempt was made to start the debugger with a monitor file that is not supported by the device on the target system Check if a device is selected correctly in the debugger MINICUBE2 FOc75 Monitor has failed in shift in the debugging mode Please reset the CPU FOc76 Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual 1 Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual does not start and remains in the reset state Check the connection of the signal lines DCK DMS DDI DDO and DRSTZ Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N Wire Checker MINICUBE 2 The device file selection may be incorrect Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration Dialog Box If this does not solve the problem the IE may be malfunctioning IECUBE FOc77 DCU access is unusuall 1 DCU access is unusuall verify error Check the connection of the signal lines DCK DMS DDI DDO and DRSTZ Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N Wire Checker MINICUBE 2 IE may be malfunctioning IECUBE FOc78 Failed in reading of trace data FOca0 Can not communicate with
135. ND REFERENCE 7 10 Related Files Table 7 7 List of Related Files File Name Function Executes when the aliases tcl console is opened Sets the default alias etc Projectfilename tcl Executes when the project file name tcl project is opened The following hooks can be used BeforeDownload AfterDownload AfterCpuReset BeforeCpuRun AfterCpuStop Loadmodulefilename tcl Executes when the load module name tcl load module file is downloaded The following hooks can be used BeforeDownload AfterDownload AfterCpuReset BeforeCpuRun AfterCpuStop 7 11 Cautions The separator for file and path is a slash When a console is open error messages are output to the console To terminate the command forcibly close the console The execution of external commands DOS commands is OFF by default 296 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7 12 Explanation of Commands In this section each command is explained using the format shown below Command name Describes the command name Input format Describes the input format of the command In the following explanation italics indicate an Argument to be supplied by the user while the argument enclosed in 2 may be omitted When a command name and an option are entered to the point of identifiability they are recognized Aliases Describes the defined command name if the command is defined with another name For details refer to 7 3 List
136. NDIX E MESSAGES A0c03 During access of I O register CPU did time out 1 Check the HOLD signal WAIT signal clock signal etc The I O register value may not be correct FOc04 External flash memory database file was not found FOc1f Rewriting security ID code directly is prohibited FOc20 Guarded area can not be accessed FOc21 Memory was unready status WO0c22 Memory unready status was canceled FOc23 Bus hold under continuation 1 Check the setting of the target board or mask the HOLD pin FOc24 It cannot shift to debug mode 1 Check the clock signal This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock 2 This error occurs when the monitor program does not respond after reset release The following cause is assumed MINICUBE2 There is a problem in connection with the target system FLMDO FOc25 Flash macro service ROM was accessed or stepped in 1 Please perform Go execution or CPU reset FOc26 FLMD terminal is in a write protected state 1 FLMD is not in the write enabled status Check the status of the FLMDO and FLMD1 pins FOc27 Security flag is in a write protected state 1 The security flag of the flash memory has disabled writing block erasure or chip erasure Nothing can be written to the flash memory FOc28 Internal RAM is not enough the writing to flash memory is not made 1 The internal RAM size is less than 4 KB and flash self pro
137. NDOW REFERENCE 6 Event manager area Event manager This area is used to display the list of the events registered Refer to Table 5 18 Event Icon 4 Manipulation in event manager area lt Open gt Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event condition one Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event condition Same operation as double clicking the event icon or pressing the Enter key lt Remove gt Deletes the selected event When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted an error occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the event is used as a various event condition lt Info gt Opens the Event Info Dialog Box This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event names lt Sort by Name gt Sorts events into name order lt Sort by Kind gt Sorts events into type order lt Unsort gt 00008 Displays events in the order in which they have Sort by Kind been registered without sorting the events i lt Detail gt 00 Sets the detailed display mode Unsort R lt OVEIVIEW gt a n Sets the list display mode Detail lt Cancel gt ou Closes this dialog box same as ESC key Overy levy Cancel Event In Eg 7 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc
138. OO O3FFE1 00i OSFFBILOIO0 O3FFB12 opali O3FFB1 30 00 jOSF FRI 4 0f JOSFFBLSO 00 O3FFB16 00a JOSFFBR170 00 INnaree o nia a t rj i i D 8 I of Se fm of eS pms Jae eS ha C he om Se ha LeS Se he of Se fms be eS pm Se ha eS be Se ha D be SS ASE gi u Se ha Se he oo Thi CAN n Tea T CC l o L E hee Oe m oo 1 i E 0 f coe ci co f Cc Cc Cc Cc co 0 Te fe E m CAN mn T mm E 4 B m o o o o o o Ei Ci 3 Ei 3 m E Ci 3 Ei Ase 3 m E Wr os T 1 a ma he a on my ci D i coe Ls Cc O p he C fae Cc C fe cc Cc fl D i CAN i T mm F 4 B m o oo o a a aa o BSE Hen fu SASE Chao Se nS eS COR oO hyo Seto E Cum ASE maj im CC fo ASE rr o et I m it a aa 2 he sA o o ha COS Ces ia CC Dag ha Be i fo CC tol D ee ba Ese Hen om Ase 7 om Zz ia ER e D u Pe Soe gt Bl el ome el Slot et Cc co Cc co Cc Cc ci Cc ci Cc ASE maj io SEoSloe oS oSos oe oSceoes Cc Cc Cc Cc Cc co Cc co cc co fom it Ase T pmm ml z ia o oo oo a o o o co o Co he SA aa co o fm m m eee e EEA an aoa T T
139. OUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7 7 1 Samples calculator script The script of the expansion window in which the calculator script is described and its execution screen are shown below Script of expansion window Calculator tcl mdi geometry 100 100 set top dcl entry top e relief sunken textvariable v frame top f height 120 width 120 pack top e fill x pack top f fill both expand 1 set i 0 set v set r 0 25 foreach n 789 456 123 0 C if n n C button top f b n text n else button top f o n text n command top e insert end n place top f o n relx expr i 4 r rely expr i 4 r relw r relh r Incr bind top f oC lt 1 gt top e delete 0 end bind top f b lt 1 gt catch expr v v Figure 7 1 Execution Screen we Calculator Sele User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 293 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7 8 Callback Procedure Expansion windows can hold dcl_ asyncproc procedures called by asynchronous messages proc dcl_asyncproc mid if Smid 19 redraw The asynchronous message ID is passed for the argument of the dcl_asyncproc procedure The message IDs are shown below Table 7 6 Message ID a 46 After change from RRM function to trace function and change from trace function to RRM function IECUBE 294 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 7 9 Hook Procedure A hook can be set in
140. Port Dialog Box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 189 Context Menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE The menu items are effective for the selected line or item not the position where the mouse pointer was clicked Same operation as when selecting the main menu with the same name Beak when Access to this Variable Creates a break event that can be accessed for read write by using the selected item Break when Write to this Variable Creates a break event that can be accessed for write by using the selected item Break when Read from this Variable Creates a break event that can be accessed for read by using the selected item Clear Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected item RRM Setting Sets the sampling range of RRM function Opens the RRM Setting Dialog Box IECUBE Event Information Displays the event information of the variable selected If an event is set the Event Dialog Box is opened Change Watch Changes the selected watch data Opens the Change Watch Dialog Box Delete Watch Deletes the selected watch data from the window Bin Displays the selected line in binary numbers Oct Displays the selected line in octal numbers Dec Displays the selected line in decimal numbers Hex Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers String Displays the selected line as a character string Proper Displays the selected line as the default va
141. Remove Deletes the selected event Delete When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted an error occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the event is used as a various event condition Expand gt gt gt Turns on or off display of the event manager area Shrink lt lt lt The size of the dialog box is expanded or reduced 2 4 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Function buttons for registering deleting validating and invalidating event conditions These buttons are used to register delete validate and invalidate the events The event with the specified event condition is registered or set validated by clicking the lt OK gt or lt Set gt button This area is common to all event related dialog boxes OK Automatically registers the event condition or the various event condition being edited if any and closes this dialog box Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered New Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box An event condition name is automatically created and a new event condition is prepared Set Registers the event condition or the various event condition Because the dialog box is not closed even after an event has been registered new event conditions can be registered Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered
142. STEMO iia 481532 OOOO06AG E0876001 BRWI ei ej enable interrupt _asm ei Returns 481542 i 1E02 M1 callt Oxle 481552 00000584 40063F00 BRWI dispose 0x0 Ip lp 491562 00000064E SOFF 600 BRM jarl _main Ip E TMPO_Init call main fur A jarl _Mmain lp E TMPO Start f i pop main void 481572 OO0006C4 F505 BRM br _maintOxe en ee l 481582 00000802 0002 BRMI callt Ox0 E Sy TIMER 4 P ca x piss El inttme E DS ee 48159 00000528 80072100 BRM prepare Ip Oxd 4 M dbg_func 481592 0000052C E0074401 MI ctret gt gt Code Coverage DEOR Load Module romp out z Total Coverage 923 Refresh Function Section Interrupt Name File Address Size Fetch _ Coverage _ TMPO_Stop timer c fr DMM los s d TMPO_ChangelntervalC timer c Name ES 5 _s_crte0000 cite s O0x5c8 EF Systemlnit systeminit c Ox65c dbg_func_sub main c Ox6b0 dbg_func main c Ox6b8 _s_ SYSTEMOO00 SYSTEM s Ox6d8 F INT_Init int c Ox cc O3FFFO24 TMPO_Init timer c Oxfec O3FFFO24 TMPO_Start timer c 0x848 O3FFFO25 TIMER_user c Ox8a8 while 1 BPRERPRPHPHPHm main c 44 6e func POW OFF ms 644 44us Software Brea AUTO INS Window display area Status bar 106 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM Menu bar 1 File menu 2 Edit menu 3 View menu 4 Option menu 5 Run menu 7 Browse menu 8 Jump menu 6 Event menu 9 Window
143. This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 4 Function butions for registering deleting validating and invalidating event conditions in the Break Dialog Box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 249 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Delay Count Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to set or display delay count values Refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE By setting a delay count value a trace can be executed the number of times specified by the delay count value after the delay trigger event condition set in the Trace Dialog Box has been satisfied Refer to 5 10 6 Setting conditional trace Figure 6 53 Delay Count Dialog Box Delay Count Delay Count f FIRST C MIDDLE Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Event menu gt Delay Count Explanation of Each Area 1 Delay count setting area Delay Count The following items can be selected FIRST Places the trigger pointer at the first of the trace data traces all frames and then stops the tracer MIDDLE Places the trigger pointer at the center of the trace data traces a half of all frames and then stops the tracer LAST Places the trigger pointer at the end of the trace data and immediately stops the tracer Caution The delay count value differs according to the trace memory size specified in the Extended Option Dialog Box Example When the trace memory size is 256K frames F
144. To our customers Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents On April 1 2010 NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology Corporation and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both companies Therefore although the old company name remains in this document it is a valid Renesas Electronics document We appreciate your understanding Renesas Electronics website http www renesas com April 1 2010 Renesas Electronics Corporation Issued by Renesas Electronics Corporation http www renesas com Send any inquiries to http www renesas com inquiry sCENESAS 8 10 11 12 Notice All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued Such information however is subject to change without any prior notice Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office Also please pay regular and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document No license express implied or otherwise is grante
145. UM 361 APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS Table C 6 Range of Radixes Binary number OY lt value lt 1111111111111111111111111111111Y 82 digits Octal number 0O lt value lt 377777777770 Decimal number 2147483648 lt value lt 4294967295 A negative decimal number is internally converted into a 2 s complement Hexadecimal numbers OH lt value lt OFFFFFFFH C 5 File Names The following regulations apply to the source file names and load module file names 1 Source file names and load module file names File names are composed of a to z Ato Z 0 to9 _ and File names must start with a character other than File names cannot be prefixed or suffixed by a period or space File names are not case sensitive A file name consists of up to 259 characters including the path 2 Other file names Other file names comply with Windows file name regulations The following characters cannot be used in file names Vie eal File names cannot be prefixed or suffixed by a period or space File names are not case sensitive A file name consists of up to 259 characters including the path 362 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX D KEY FUNCTION LIST Table D 1 Key Function List BackSpace Deletes one character before the cursor and moves the cursor to the position of the deleted character At this time the character string following the cursor moves forward Delete Deletes one character after
146. VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Search condition specification area Find What This area is used to specify the data to be searched Up to 256 character In the default condition the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed As necessary the character string displayed can be changed Up to 16 input histories can be recorded When searching in memory display area Up to 16 data items can be specified Delimit each data with a blank character When searching in ascii display area Up to 256 characters can be specified A blank character in the data is treated as a blank character Unit This area is used to specify the number of bits of the data to be searched in mem ory display area Byte Searches the data as 8 bit data default Half Word Searches the data as 16 bit data Word Searches the data as 32 bit data Scan Whole Region This should be selected to search the entire specified range Direction Address This area is used to specify the direction of the search Up Forward search Searches data forward upward on screen from the current position of the cursor Down Backward search Searches data backward downward on screen from the current position of the cursor default This area is used to specify the address range to be searched The default radix for inputting a numeric val
147. ValueunuMNber or cienoRinacecone the value of the first term by the value number of bits of the second term to the left and returns the results As many Os as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the lower bits Byte separation operator HIGH Higher byte Of the lowest 16 bits of the term returns the higher 8 bits Lower byte Of the lowest 16 bits of the term returns the lower 8 bits Word separation operator HIGHW Higher word Of the 32 bits of the term returns the higher 16 bits LOWW Of the 32 bits of the term returns the lower 16 bits Left Performs the operation in before the operation outside parenthesis and are always used in pairs Right parenthesis 3 Rules of operation Operations are performed according to the priority of the operators Table C 5 Operator Priority i sign sign NOT HIGHT LOW HIGHW LOWW 2 MOD SHR gt gt SHL lt lt If the priorities of the operators are the same the operation is performed from the left toward the right Performs the operation in before the operation outside Each term in an operation is treated as unsigned 32 bit data All operation results are treated as unsigned 32 bit data If an overflow occurs during operation the lower 32 bits are valid and the overflow is not detected 4 Terms To describe a constant for a term the following numeric values can be described User s Manual U18604EJ1VO
148. W REFERENCE Event Dialog Box This dialog box is used to register and display event conditions Refer to 5 12 Event Function Setting of event conditions is done by setting each item in this dialog box and then pressing the lt OK gt button The registered event conditions are managed by the Event Manager One event condition can be set for multiple Various Event Conditions However the number of event conditions that can be simultaneously used is limited Refer to 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition Figure 6 59 Event Dialog Box A Eyy Set Restore Cancel Help Event Name EJ Evt0000 o Event Link Event Status E Wccess Size No Condition Address testc maintOxle 00 Break Trace Timer Manager shrink 444 Event Manager Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening In normal mode If the Event Dialog Box is opened as follows an event condition can be registered without its purpose being specified BB ic the Evn button or select Event menu gt Event In select mode If the lt OK gt button is pressed when the Event Dialog Box has been opened as follows an event condition can be registered in the setting dialog box from which this dialog box was opened the setting dialog box from which the this box was opened is displayed on the title bar In each various event setting dialog box click the lt Add Event gt button 264 Us
149. Window 252 Coverage Address Dialog Box 255 Coverage Color Dialog Box 257 Software Break Manager 258 Event Manager In Detailed Display Mode 260 Event Dialog Box 264 Event Link Dialog Box 269 Break Dialog Box 272 View File Save Dialog Box 276 View File Load Dialog Box 278 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box 280 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box 281 Reset Debugger Dialog Box 282 Exit Debugger Dialog Box 283 About Dialog Box 284 Console Window 285 Browse Dialog Box 286 Execution Screen 293 List Window 341 Grep Window 342 RRM Window 343 Hook Window 344 Memory Mapped I O Window 346 Memory Mapped I O Dialog Box 348 Sym Inspect Window 349 RunBreakTime Window 350 OpenBreak Window 351 Error Warning Dialog Box 366 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 15 LIST OF TABLES Table No Title Page 2 1 Install 26 3 1 Startup Options 30 3 2 Error Message Output Pattern IECUBE 33 5 1 Debug Function List Flow of Debugging Operations 41 5 2 Mapping Attribute 43 5 3 Type of File That Can Be Downloaded 44 5 4 Type of File That Can Be Uploaded 46 5 5 File Type Can Be Displayed 47 5 6 Specifying Symbols 49 5 7 Break Types 50 5 8 The Number of Valid Software Break 53 5 9 Type of Execution 57 5 10 Trace Memory Size 72 5 11 Type of Trace Modes 74 5 12 Types of Tr
150. a mutually exclusive basis with the Trace function and coverage function Refer to 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis When this is selected the following menu cannot be selected Trace start Trace end Uncond Trace ON Cond Trace ON Tracer Control Mode Trace function is selected Refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE This function is used on a mutually exclusive basis with the RRM function and coverage function Refer to 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis When this is selected the following menu cannot be selected RRM Setting User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 109 Coverage function IECUBE 5 Run menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage function is selected Refer to 5 11 Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE This function is used on a mutually exclusive basis with the RRM function and trace function Refer to 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis This function is disabled when no coverage boards are incorporated When this is selected the following menu cannot be selected Trace start Trace end Uncond Trace ON Cond Trace ON Tracer Control Mode RRM Setting Restart Resets the CPU and executes the program 1 Same operation as this button Stop Forcibly stops program execution Bl sam
151. able in the function jumped when jumping to the Source Window A number of other operations using Context Menu Function buttons etc can be performed in this window Figure 6 31 Local Variable Window i Local Variable fsample Retresh Close Local variable name display area Local variable value display setting area Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu Local Variable Window dedicated items Context Menu Opening BS click the Loc button or select Browse menu gt Local Variable Explanation of Each Area 1 Local variable display change area Local variable name display area This area displays local variable name Refer to Symbol name display area in the Watch Window Auto Internal Static and Register variables can be displayed Local variables within the current function are automatically displayed in this window This area cannot be edited 198 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Local variable value display setting area This area is used to display and change local variable values Refer to Data value display setting area in the Watch Window Values are changed through direct input The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed During user program execution however the change cannot be written if attempted an error occurs The
152. acer Control Mode 75 5 13 Types of Conditional Trace 76 5 14 Code Coverage Measurement Range 79 5 15 Format of View of Locations for which Coverage Measurement is Executed 80 5 16 Various Event Conditions 82 5 17 Number of Enabled Events for Each Event Condition 85 5 18 Event Icon 86 5 19 Areas for Which Sampling Can Be Performed with Real Time Monitor Function 89 5 20 Contents Saved to Project File 92 5 21 Type of View Files 93 5 22 Type of Setting Files 94 5 23 Details of Jump Source Address 96 5 24 Details of Drag amp Drop Function Line Address 99 5 25 Details of Drag amp Drop Function Character String 99 6 1 Window List 102 6 2 CPU Status 116 6 3 IE Status 117 6 4 Break Cause 117 6 5 Relationship Between Time Tag Counter Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time Time tag counter Trace 128 6 6 Relationship Between Meaning of Trace Data to Be Collected and Trace Collection Mode 129 6 7 Relationship Between Timer Count Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time Timer counter Timer 130 6 8 Relationship Between Boot Swap Cluster Set Value and Target Range Set Value 140 6 9 Flash Self Programming Emulation Supported Device 141 6 10 List of Availability of Emulation for Flash Function Type1 141 6 11 List of Availability of Emulation for Flash Function Type3 143 6 12 List of Availability of Emulation for Flash Function Type4 14
153. ack Oxf18 Detault 7 8 e Bytes Delete oo Bytes E Jump o Bytes o Hp o oo Bytes 00 Bytes 0000 Size Total 1792 20468 Bytes z 6 i g Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening The settings of this dialog box when it is opened differ depending on the opening method a When settings are performed from RRM Setting Dialog Box The dialog box is opened by selecting Option menu gt RRM Setting In this case the data in Address and Size are input manually b When settings are performed from the Memory Window This dialog box is opened by opening the Memory Window selecting an address in the window and then selecting RRM Setting from the context menu In this case the selected address is displayed in an empty row in Address 256 is displayed in an empty row in Size and the value obtained by converting the address to a symbol is displayed in an empty row in Symbol Remark If the total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations already exceeds 2048 bytes the dialog box opens but no value can be set User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 135 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE c When settings are performed from the Watch Window This dialog box is opened by opening the Watch Window selecting a variable in the window and then selecting RRM Setting from the context menu In this case the value obtained by converting the variable into an address is displa
154. address bit Mask cannot be set The value of bit which indicates the bit position must be 0 lt bit lt T Caution Specify a 28 bit address since physical address and image space are distinguished in setting event 5 Data condition setting area This area is used to specify an data condition data value mask value The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in Access Size Data This area is used to specify an data condition data value mask value The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in Access Size Byte 0 lt data value lt OxFF 0 lt mask value lt OxFF Half Word 0 lt data value lt OxFFFF 0 lt mask value lt OxFFFF Word 0 lt data value lt OxFFFFFFFF 0 lt mask value lt OxFFFFFFFF Bit Data value 0 or 1 Mask value Cannot be specified Mask Set a mask value for the data value may be omitted When a mask is set the data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1 Example1 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition Data 0x4000 Mask OxFF Example2 0x4000 0x4001 0x4100 and 0x4101 satisfy the condition Data 0x4000 Mask 0x101 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 267 CHAPTER 6 WI
155. ag counter Trace Division Ratio Resolution ns ee A Remark TMCLK 1 4 ec 87 minstes fg Time tag counter 32 bits TMCLK 1 8 11 4 minutes In case of 50 MHz external clock TMCLK 1 16 8200000 22 8 minutes TMCLK 1 32 45 6 minutes TMCLK 1 512 10240 12 2 hours TMCLK 1 1024 20480 24 4 hours TMCLK 1 2048 40960 48 8 hours TMCLK 1 4096 81920 97 6 hours b Memory Size Set the size of the trace memory buffer In other words specify a memory size by dragging the knob The sizes that can be specified are 8K min 32K 64K 128K and 256K max Caution The larger the value that is set the greater the number of trace data that are recorded However the response when reading trace data becomes correspondingly slower c Clear trace memory before run Select this checkbox to clear the trace memory prior to program execution 128 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE d Trace Data Select the trace data to be collected Remark When Options menu gt RRM Function is selected the setting is fixed to Branch PC When Option menu gt Coverage Function is selected the setting is fixed to All PC Table 6 6 Relationship Between Meaning of Trace Data to Be Collected and Trace Collection Mode Traced Range Branch PC Access PC Access Data values of Collects Collects PC values of branch origin access values of all instructions and branch l address and S
156. ak Protect Internal ROM fiw Write Internal RAM LO Register W Non Map fw Read External Memory We Non Map iw Write Verity Internal RAM i Non Map Weite Opening Explanation of Each Area Cautions Opening Click the lt Detail gt button in the Configuration Dialog Box Explanation of Each Area 1 Protect The fail safe break protect settings are performed in this area I Write The fail safe breaks corresponding to the selected checkboxes are protected Under the default setting all checkboxes are selected User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 133 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Internal ROM This area is used to perform the protect settings for the internal ROM area Non Map Access to access prohibited area Write Write to write prohibited area Internal RAM This area is used to perform the protect settings for the internal RAM area Non Map Access to access prohibited area I O Register This area is used to perform the protect settings for the peripheral I O registers area Non Map Access to access prohibited area Read Read to read prohibited area Write Write to write prohibited area External Memory This area is used to perform the protect settings for the external memory area Non Map Access to access prohibited area Write Write to write prohibited area 2 Verify This area is used to perform the verify settings for fail safe breaks Verif
157. aks occur 8 No software breaks can be set to the data flash area User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 149 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Debugger Option Dialog Box This dialog box is used to display and set the various options of the ID850QB Opening Figure 6 11 Debugger Option Dialog Box Debugger Option Source Path Base D tp fxJ3 Browse Default Extension EE Load Module i out Source F ile pen File History Max Number 0 10 1 Font Coverage Color Project File Auto Saye f On C Off f Query Source Option Bring up source window when break r Tool Bar Pictures _ Kanji f Pictures and Text f Sls f Pictures only Bit Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Option menu gt Debugger Option 150 Watch Default Tab Size Extension Tab Size Tab List Xz Delete Startup Routine Begin label _start End label _startend main label main Dis ssemble Show Offset Label M Mnemonic Register Name of Function Name f Absolute Name Size Byte Show Variable Type On fe Off e p Cancel Restore Help Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM Radix Hex gt 13 14 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Source Path This area is used to specify the directory in which a source file or text file is searched Base The directory is the basis of a relative path is displayed The ba
158. al variable list of the selected function Expand gt gt gt Displays the local variable list of the selected function when the Close Closes this window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 201 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View Menu Stack Window dedicated items When this window is the current window The following items are added on View menu Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays octal numbers String Displays character strings Proper Displays the default value of each variable default Context Menu Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays octal numbers String Displays character strings Proper Displays the default value of each variable default Source Text Displays the corresponding source text and source line from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function If no line information exists at the jump destination address however you cannot jump Opens the Source Window If an active Source Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Assemble Memory 202 Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2
159. alog Box IECUBE Ep gt Same operation as this button Delay Count Sets the delay count IECUBE Opens the Delay Count Dialog Box 7 Browse menu List Source Text Lists functions variables symbols sections and interrupt requests Opens the List Window Displays a source text Opens the Source Window If there is this window already open in the active status it is opened in the static status Elloame operation as this button Assemble Displays the disassemble results Opens the Assemble Window If there is this window already open in the active status it is opened in the static status FElsame operation as this button Memory Displays the contents of the memory Opens the Memory Window If there is this window already open in the active status it is opened in the static status El same operation as this button Watch Displays the watch contents Opens the Watch Window Asame operation as this button Register I O Register Displays the register contents Opens the Register Window Alsame operation as this button Displays the contents of the Peripheral I O registers Opens the IOR Window El same operation as this button Local Variable Displays the local variable Opens the Local Variable Window Blsame operation as this button Stack Trace Displays the stack trace results Opens the Stack Window Blsame operation as this button Trace
160. aly Tel 02 667541 Branch The Netherlands Steijgerweg 6 5616 HS Eindhoven The Netherlands Tel 040 265 40 10 Asia amp Oceania NEC Electronics China Co Ltd 7th Floor Quantum Plaza No 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian District Beijing 100083 P R China Tel 010 8235 1155 http www cn necel com NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd Room 2511 2512 Bank of China Tower 200 Yincheng Road Central Pudong New Area Shanghai P R China P C 200120 Tel 021 5888 5400 http www cn necel com NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd Unit 1601 1613 16 F Tower 2 Grand Century Place 193 Prince Edward Road West Mongkok Kowloon Hong Kong Tel 2886 9318 http www hk necel com NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd 7F No 363 Fu Shing North Road Taipei Taiwan R O C Tel 02 8175 9600 http www tw necel com NEC Electronics Singapore Pte Ltd 238A Thomson Road 12 08 Novena Square Singapore 307684 Tel 6253 8311 http www sg necel com NEC Electronics Korea Ltd 11F Samik Lavied or Bldg 720 2 Yeoksam Dong Kangnam ku Seoul 135 080 Korea Tel 02 558 3737 http www kr necel com G07 1A
161. ame Switching 67 5 16 Display IOR contents 68 5 17 Register I O Port 68 5 18 Sets and Displays Timer Event Timer Dialog Box 70 5 19 Setting Trace Data 73 5 20 Checking Trace Data 73 5 21 Coverage Mesurement Result Display 79 5 22 View of Locations for which Coverage Measurement is Executed 80 5 23 Setting of Various Event Conditions 83 5 24 Managing Events the Event Manager 86 5 25 RRM Setting Dialog Box 89 5 26 Specification of Interval for Sampling with Real Time Monitor Function 89 5 27 Specification of Pseudo Real Time Monitor Function 90 5 28 Modifying Memory Contents DMM Dialog Box 91 6 1 Main Window 106 6 2 Tool Bar Picture Only 115 6 3 Tool Bar Picture and Text 115 6 4 Status Bar 116 6 5 Configuration Dialog Box 118 6 6 Extended Option Dialog Box Extended Option Dialog Box 127 6 7 Fail safe Break Dialog Box 133 6 8 RRM Setting Dialog Box 135 6 9 Flash Option Dialog Box 137 6 10 Data Flash Option Dialog Box 147 6 11 Debugger Option Dialog Box 150 6 12 Add Source path Dialog Box 151 6 13 Font Dialog Box 152 6 14 Project File Save Dialog Box 156 6 15 Project File Load Dialog Box 157 6 16 Download Dialog Box 158 6 17 Upload Dialog Box 161 6 18 Load Module List Dialog Box 163 14 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 6 19 6 20 6 21 6 22 6 23 6 24 6 25 6 26 6 27 6 28 6 29
162. and static status for this window When the window is in the active Status it has the Trace result with linking window IECUBE Moreover the items selected in the window with the Drag amp drop function can be used in another window Refer to 5 16 Functions Common to Each Window Caution1 Peripheral I O registers with the same address but different names cannot be distinguished in the disassemble display Caution2 Illegal mnemonics may be displayed if the Assemble window is scrolled up toward the direction in which the addresses are decremented Caution3 The maximum length of the character string that can be searched for in the Assemble window is 150 ANK Caution4 Line assemble in the Assemble window does not optimize instructions as is performed in the CA850 assembler Figure 6 22 Assemble Window Assemble M Ef search KE gt Watch Cluick Retresh Close 1 eQe6f200 moves Uxte r ri 409 700fa st b ri UDAOCTLO 2 O152 mow Osl ri 405707fa et b ri 0 UAOTE cOffddta tasti 0x7 UAOSTR 3 c20 bz _maintUs4c cOffddta tasti Ox UAOSTR 4 0a8e0100 addi 0x1 ri ri 1150 mow rl ri oa00 zEb ri SA a55 br _nmaint z3a OOO0O002C leu callt Uxle 000002CE 0002 callt 0x0 Opening 174 Explanation of Each Area View Menu Assemble Window dedicated items Context Menu Related Operations User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening F Click the Asm butt
163. anual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 9 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box This dialog box is used to save the setting contents of the current window to a setting file Refer to 5 15 3 Window setting information setting file Figure 6 64 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box Save in Chapters 1 O Chapter3_2 1 gt Chapter4 Dev File name Save as type Watch wch Si Cancel Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the window to be saved is the current window select File menu gt Environment gt Save As Explanation of Each Area 1 Save file setting area Save in This area is used to specify a file name A file name can be directly input or selected from the list at the upper part of this area File name Up to 257 characters string with a extension can be specified Save as type This area is used to specify the type extension of the file to be saved Refer to Table 5 22 Type of Seiting Files The extension of the file corresponding to the current window is displayed 2 Function buttons Save Saves the setting information of the current window to the selected file After sav ing this dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything Help Displays this dialog box online help files 280 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFEREN
164. arch it is highlighted To continue searching click this button again Set Find Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box Stop searching Stops searching Close Closes this dialog box During searching this button is replaced by the lt Stop gt button Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 179 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Address Move Dialog Box This dialog box is used to specify the start address from which displaying as follows Memory Window Assemble Window IOR Window Figure 6 24 Address Move Dialog Box Example When Memory Window Is Open Memory Address of 2 le Cancel Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the target window is the current window select View menu gt Move Explanation of Each Area 1 Address specification area Address This area is used to specify the start address from which displaying To In the default condition the string selected in the window that called this dialog box or the current PC value etc is displayed As necessary the character string displayed can be changed The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols Up to 16 input histories can be recorded 2 Function buttons
165. ares the memory contents in accordance with a given condition If no difference is found as a result of comparison Wf200 No difference encountered is displayed If a difference is found the Memory Compare Result Dialog Box is opened Stop comparison Stops memory comparison Cancel Closes this dialog box During comparison this button is replaced by the lt Stop gt button Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files 212 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Compare Result Dialog Box This dialog box is displayed if any difference is found in the memory contents when the memory has been compared in the Memory Compare Dialog Box Refer to 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function Figure 6 39 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box Memory Compare Men Addr Memory Addr O00 0FFFF OOOOOU00 Oo0010000 oOo0go0og001 Oo010001 oOo000002 1 OOOL0002 OOOOO003 OOOLOO0 OOOOOO0S OOO10008 OOOOO009 OOO100049 OOOO000A O001000A4 OO00000B OOOLO00B OOOO000C anndaane on nannan i me Explanation of Each Area Explanation of Each Area 1 Comparison result display area This area displays the results of comparing the memory Only differences that have been found as a result of comparison are displayed Mem1 Addr Displays a comparison source address in which a difference has been found Memory Displa
166. ariable is displayed is prefixed to the data By double clicking this all the elements of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data is prefixed to the expanded data If this is double clicked the expanded display is canceled If the number of data to be displayed is fixed such as when a variable in C language or register is to be displayed the specified number of data is invalid 3 Function buttons Closes this dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 195 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Change Watch Dialog Box This window is used to change the data on a line selected in the Watch Window Refer to 5 6 Watch Function A line with an open hierarchy such as the elements of an array and members of structures and unions cannot be changed When watch data is changed the contents of the selected line are replaced with the new data The symbol name can be changed even if it results in duplication of a name already in use with existing data Figure 6 30 Change Watch Dialog Box Change Watch Name Radix Proper C Hex f Dec f Oct C Bin C String Size fe Adaptive C Byte Half Word Word Number Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Watch Window is the current w
167. ation During access of register CPU did time out 34 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING A0c02 During access of memory CPU did time out FOc04 External flash memory database file was not found A01a0 No response from the evachip Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT HLDRQ and so on No response from the CPU Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT HLDRQ and so on 3 6 3 When the MINICUBE2 Is connected FO100 Can not communicate with ICE Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board F0c43 Connection of emulator cannot be performed A01b2 A0105 The firmware of the emulator is old version Please update it with utility to the latest firmware Failed in reading device file file name FO3a0 Target is not turned on FOca2 FOca3 This device file does not include the on chip debug information Unsupported information is included in the on chip debug information in the device file FOca1 Monitor file not found FOcOO F0c71 Monitor file read error Reset cannot be performed F02a3 Reset under continuation FOc72 FOc24 Monitor memory cannot be accessed It cannot shift to debug mode FOc74 CPU register cannot be accessed FOG 3 F0OC33 Monitor execution cannot be performed Disabling the on
168. aution This area is available only when the flash memory process is Type1 new specification or Type4 7 Block Protection This area is used to change the target area of boot swap clusters default 0 The value set in this field is reflected to the target area in a boot block cluster refer to lable 6 8 Relationship Between Boot Swap Cluster Set Value and Target Range Set Value Prohibition of boot area rewriting can be set to the target area of boot swap clusters by using the device s security function Caution1 Since the ID850QB does not support the boot swap function settings related to the boot swap function are invalid Caution2 This area is available only when the flash memory process is Type4 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 139 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6 8 Relationship Between Boot Swap Cluster Set Value and Target Range Set Value In Products with 256 KB or Smaller Flash In Products with 384 KB or Larger Flash Setting ee CC Value oenen I aaa block clusters Boot Wa a clusters I Batea Ben ee block clusters Boot SEa clusters o 00000H 007FFH 00000H 007FFH 00000H 01FFFH 00000H 0O7FFH 007FFH RESV 03FFFH RESV 00FFFH Perilia BE 01FFFH RESV 017FFH RESV 027FFH 027FFH RESV 01FFFH aa 03FFFH RESV 027FFH 00000H 03FFFH Sa 04FFFH RESV 07FFFH RESV 03FFFH ain 07FFFH Bo RESV 047FFH 00000H 07FFFH cone 08FFFH RESV OFFFFH RESV 07FFFH a OFFFFH RESV 087FFH 00000H OFFFFH kon 10
169. batch batch Executing batch with echo Input format batch scriptname Functions Executes in batch with displaying files specified by scriptname on the screen Nesting is possible Usage example IDCON 1 clear IDCON 2 batch bat_file tcl IDCON 3 tkcon save a log txt 300 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE breakpoint breakpoint Setting deletion of breakpoint Input format breakpoint options address1 address2 breakpoint delete brkno breakpoint enable brkno breakpoint disable brkno breakpoint information Aliases b Functions Operates the breakpoint specified by options and address If a breakpoint can be set correctly the breakpoint number is returned The following are options software A software break is specified hardware A hardware break is specified default execute The address execution break is set default beforeexecute The break before address execution is set read An address data read break is set write An address data write break is set access An address data access break is set size size The access size is set 8 16 or 32 Unit bit IECUBE data value The data condition is set datamask value The data mask is set information The list of breakpoints is displayed delete The breakpoint whose number is specified is deleted disable The breakpoint whose number is spec
170. be directly input or selected from the list at the upper part of this area File name Up to 257 characters string with a extension can be specified Save as type This area is used to specify the type extension of the file to be saved Refer to Table 5 21 Type of View Files The extension of the file corresponding to the current window is displayed 2 6 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Save range setting area If a range of 100 lines 100 frames 256 bytes or more is specified a message dialog box is displayed to indicate the progress of saving To stop saving midway click the lt Stop gt button in the message dialog box Save range Specify the range of data to be saved This area is displayed if the current window to be saved is the following Source Window Assemble Window Memory Window Trace View Window All This should be selected to save the entire range from the first line to the last line Screen shot This should be selected to save the area visible on the screen from the top line on the screen to the bottom line If the Source Window is in the mixed display mode however the window contents are saved from the source line that includes the area visible on the screen Specify Line This should be selected to specify the start line and end line of the Specify Frame area to be saved Specify Address If the start line and end line are omitted the first line a
171. be performed in the Time Out Break area Figure 5 18 Sets and Displays Timer Event Timer Dialog Box a Timer Hame Ti TmrO000 Add Event Start Event End Event Pace 1 timete Add Link Evtooo0 E Extonoo2 Tota 11200 nsec Average 11200 nsec Max 11200 nsec Time rount Rate Min 11200 nsec nsec T hiitialize Copy wiew Alimays Time Out Break f OFF o Osertlow Ohour O min Osec 0 msec Ousec nsec Shrink 444 Event Manager Continuous display in the Timer Result Dialog Box can be selected by clicking the lt View Always gt button Timer manipulations during program execution are performed by selecting Run gt Timer Start Timer Stop 5 9 2 Run Break event Run Break event is a timer event name given to a timer event condition that measures the execution time from execution to break Run break events are registered in advance and the run break time can be displayed through specification in the Timer Dialog Box The Run break time is also displayed in the status bar in the Main Window Since Run Break events are included in the number of timer events that can be simultaneously enabled refer to 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition they can be used added to the number of valid timer event conditions 70 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 9 3 Cautions For IECUBE the same timer count rate value is applied to all timer eve
172. below has two statuses The Active status and Static status Source Window that is displaying the source file to which symbol information is read Assemble Window Memory Window Only one window can be opened in the active status However because two or more windows in the static status can be opened the current status of the windows can be temporarily held Select this status by the Window menu 1 Active status The display position and contents of the window in the active status are automatically updated in association with the current PC value This window is also the jump destination of the Jump function If this window is linked with the Trace View Win dow the contents displayed in the active window are updated in association with the Trace View Window Only one window can be opened in the active status 2 Static status The display position of the window in the static status does not move in association with the current PC value but the displayed contents are updated The static window is not used as the jump destination of the Jump function In addition it is not linked with the Trace View Window If an active window is already open the next window is opened in the static status Two or more static windows can be opened at the same time User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 95 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 16 2 Jump function This is a function that jumps to any of the Windows below from a line or address a jump po
173. ber of delay count frames and stops the tracer when a delay trigger event has occurred Timer Start Timer Stop Starts timer measurement when it is stopped or stops it when it is in progress IECUBE This item is invalid if the program is not being executed and if a timer event is not used lmmediately after program execution has been started timer measurement is in progress Tracer Start Tracer Stop IECUBE 6 Event menu Event Manager Starts the tracer when it is stopped or stops it when it is in progress This item is invalid if the program is not being executed Immediately after program execution has been started the tracer is executed Manages various event conditions Opens the Event Manager I Same operation as this button Software Break Manager Manages software break event conditions Opens the Software Break Manager Event Registers an event condition Opens the Event Dialog Box Hian operation as this button Event Link Registers an event link condition Opens the Event Link Dialog Box Break Registers and sets a break event condition Opens the Break Dialog Box Wisame operation as this button Trace Registers and sets a trace event condition Opens the Trace Dialog Box IECUBE same operation as this button User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 111 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Timer Registers and sets a timer event condition Opens the Timer Di
174. bol is expressed in pairs with a file name 358 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS C 3 Numeric Values The following four types of numeric values can be used The input format of each type is as shown below The suffix bold and the alphabetic characters of hexadecimal numbers may be uppercase or lowercase characters If the first character is A to F O must be prefixed to it In the input field of ID850QB decimal numbers or hexadecimal numbers are alternately selected depending on the default radix Table C 3 Input Format of Numeric Values Cc ne number n lan n 0 1 Octal number eG n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 nQ n nQ n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Decimal number Hexadecimal numbers n NH oxn Oxn n n 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 359 APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS C 4 Expressions and Operators 1 Expressions An expression consists of constants register names peripheral I O registers name and symbols coupled by operators If peripheral I O registers name label name function name or variable name is described as a symbol an address is calculated as the value of the symbol The elements making up an expression except operators are called terms constants and labels Terms are called the first term the second term and so on starting from the left 2 Operators The following operators of the C language can be used Table C 4 List of Operators
175. button while holding down the Shift or Ctrl key Up to 20 load module files can be downloaded 2 Load Sets a load condition This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified Symbol Specifies whether symbol information is read or not Note Object Specifies whether object information is read when selected default or not The object information is read even if this button is not selected when a HEX file is loaded Erase Cannot be selected IECUBE Specifies whether the contents of the internal flash memory are erased all before download or not MINICUBE Note The memory capacity can be saved by not reading symbol information when a program consisting of two or more load module files is to be debugged and if the symbol information of some modules does not have to be read 3 Reset Sets a reset condition This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified CPU reset is enabled for files other than coverage result files however Symbol Specifies whether to reset symbol information while loading a file Note CPU Specifies whether to reset the CPU while loading a file Not selected default Note When downloading two or more load module files take care that location addresses do not over lap User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 159 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 to external FlashROM If the addresses of the internal instruction RAM an
176. c Memory Modification is a function that rewrites the contents of the memory RAM in real time during user program execution The DMM Dialog Box is opened by clicking the lt DMM gt button on the Memory Window Register Window or IOR Window Specify the DMM target address and data Caution1 Since this function is implemented by software simulation user program execution stops momen tarily when rewriting to the memory pseudo DMM function Caution2 The DMM function and software break function are exclusive of each other When a valid software break point has been set writing DMM during user program execution is disabled if attempted an error results Figure 5 28 Modifying Memory Contents DMM Dialog Box Address En Cancel eae Restore Data Size Byte C Half Word C Word Help Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 91 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 15 Load Save Function ID850QB allows saving and loading the following types of information as files As a result recovery of these various types of information is possible Debugging environment project file Window display information view file Window setting information setting file Remark The simple window status can be maintained by selecting Window menu gt Static Refer to 5 16 1 Active status and static status 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file A project file prj is a file that records the debugging environm
177. c37 The voltage is too low to operate flash programming FOc38 Extended monitor area is not blank FOc39 Real time RAM monitoring failed FOc3a Writing the data flash area is not supported FOc3b Can not write the data flash memory because of it is not in the data flash environment FOc3c External flash memory information is not set FOc3d Can not erase external flash memory FOc3e Can not write external flash memory FOc40 Status of effective event conditions cannot be changed F0c41 Coverage test is being executed FO0c42 Monitor has failed in shift in the debugging mode Please reset the CPU FO0c43 Connection of emulator cannot be performed 1 The switch setting may be wrong if a desktop computer is used and two or more PC cards are inserted Check the setting Or it may have malfunctioned MINICUBE 2 Check the power to the emulator and cable connections The switch setting may be wrong if a desktop computer is used and two or more PC cards are inserted Check the setting have malfunctioned IECUBE Or it may 3 Check the power to the emulator and cable connections MINICUBE2 F0c44 Coverage test is being executed FOc45 Inside of Power off reset emulation cannot carry out program execution FOc46 Change of Internal ROM size or Internal RAM size or RAM monitor or DMM is not valid during Flash Self Emulation
178. can be started By clicking the lt Set Find gt button the direction buttons lt lt and gt gt in the Source Window can be used for the search Remark The maximum length of the character string that can be searched for in the Source Window is 150 ANK characters Figure 6 20 Source Search Dialog Box Source Search Find What 1 wey Sele Direction Set Find i Up fe Donn Close 2 Hep Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Source Window is the current window select View menu gt Search or click the lt Search gt button in the same window Explanation of Each Area 1 Search conditon specification area Find What This area is used to specify the data to be searched Up to 256 characters In the default condition the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed As necessary the character string displayed can be changed Up to 16 input histories can be recorded Match Case This should be selected to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase Direction This area is used to specify the direction of the search Up Forward search Searches data forward upward on screen from the current position of the cursor Down Backward search Searches data backward downward on screen from the current position of the cursor default 170 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFER
179. cannot be accessed F0c73 Monitor execution cannot be performed F0c74 CPU register cannot be accessed FOc23 Bus hold under continuation A0c01 During access of register CPU did time out A0c02 During access of memory CPU did time out FOc04 External flash memory database file was not found A01a0 No response from the evachip Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT HLDRQ and so on No response from the CPU Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT HLDRQ and so on 3 6 2 When the N Wire CARD or MINICUBE is connected FO100 Can not communicate with ICE Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board F0c43 Connection of emulator cannot be performed FO3a0 Target is not turned on FOc70 DCU cannot be accessed FOc76 Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual FOc77 DCU access is unusuall A0105 Failed in reading device file file name FOca2 FOca3 This device file does not include the on chip debug information Unsupported information is included in the on chip debug information in the device file FOc24 FOc72 FOc73 It cannot shift to debug mode Monitor memory cannot be accessed Monitor execution cannot be performed FOc74 CPU register cannot be accessed FOc23 AOc01 Bus hold under continu
180. cation format and options 28 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3 3 Startup Option and Argument Specification The procedure for specifying the startup options and arguments for the ID850QB is described below By specifying the startup options and arguments it is possible to specify the script file at startup and the project file Remark When starting up the ID850QB from PM the startup option and argument settings are performed in Debugger Settings in the Tool menu of PM Refer to CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM The debugger startup option can be set to the option column 3 3 1 Specification method 1 Create the ID850QB shortcut on the desktop The ID850QB execution file is located in the bin folder in the folder to which the installation was performed 2 Open the properties of the created shortcut and after the execution file name displayed in Target specify the option and argument Refer to 3 3 2 Specification format and options Figure 3 2 Startup Option Example IDG500B VX XX Properties less General shortcut Compatibility IDS50QE WASK Target type Application Target location bin Start in Shortcut key None Aur Normal window Comment User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 29 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3 3 2 Specification format and opt
181. ce Error Emulation Generate FlashBlock Erase Error Generate FlashBlocklVerity Error Generate FlashWord rite Error Generate FlashBlock BlankGheck Error Generate FlashSetInto Error Generate FlashFLMOGheck Error PI4a FP4 Security Flag Settings Emulation Disable Chip Erase Disable Block Erase Disable Program Disable Read Disable Boot Block Cluster Reprogrammine Reset Vector lo Block Protection Boot Block End E Cancel __ Restore Hee f Opening Explanation of Each Area Special Notes On Flash Self Programming Emuration Opening Select Option menu gt Flash Option User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 137 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Enable Flash Self Programming If this item is selected flash self programing emulation function is enabled This enables setting of 3 Advanced This item is not selected by default 2 Flash Macro Service Spec Select the flash macro service specification type in this area when flash self programing emulation function is enabled This area is valid only when the flash memory process is Type If New Spec is selected Disable Read and Reset Vector become selectable in 5 PG FP4 Security Flag Settings Emulation Input an address within the address range of the internal flash in the Reset Vector field for the reset vector address Old Spec Flash self programming Ver 2 00 or earlier defaul
182. cified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics willingness to support a given application Note 1 NEC Electronics as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries 2 NEC Electronics products means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics as defined above M8E 02 11 1 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM MEMO User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM MEMO 6 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM Target Readers Purpose Organization How to Use This Manual Conventions PREFACE This manual is intended for user engineers who design and develop application systems of the V850 microcontrollers This manual is intended for users to understand the functions of the ID850QB in the organization below This manual consists of the following chapters e OVERVIEW e INSTALLATION e STARTING AND TERMINATING e ASSOCIATION WITH PM e DEBUG FUNCTION e WINDOW REFERENCE e COMMAND REFERENCE It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical engineering logic circuits microcontrollers C language and assemblers To understand the functions of the V850 microcontrollers Refer to Hardware User s Manual for eac
183. condition IECUBE Timer measurement start condition S E Timer measurement end condition U Timer measurement unit Timeout break condition NO oO _ h Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 Function button CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE OK Automatically registers the event condition being edited if any and closes this dialog box Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered New Opens the New Event Dialog Box Opens the dialog box to create new event condition Hew Event x te f By clicking each button the corresponding event setting dialog box 3 Sol can be opened with the new event name set After the event setting Event Link dialog box has been opened this dialog box is closed Break Returns to Event Manager by clicking the lt Cancel gt button Trace Timer Cancel Set Registers the various event conditions Because the dialog box is not closed even after an event has been registered new event conditions can be registered Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered Open Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event condition one Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event condition Same operation as double clicking the event icon or pressing the Enter key Enable Validates enables or invalidates disables the selected event condition Disab
184. condition setting area in setting areas which the line number or address has been dropped Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001 Evt00002 and so on A data condition and path count are not specified The address condition is set by the dropped text The relationship between the event condition to be created and the symbol is as follows sme Saw Condition setting area in The dropped text is set in the area each various event setting dialog box address and data setting areas Watch Window If the dropped text is recognizable as a symbol the contents of the symbol are displayed Remark Each various event setting dialog box are as follows Event Dialog Box Event Link Dialog Box Break Dialog Box Trace Dialog Box Timer Dialog Box 100 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 16 5 Cautions 1 If the width of the display area is narrow the display may become corrupted In this case increase the width of the window Y Redrawing may not successfully be performed in a window with a lt Refresh gt button when the cursor position is changed while the window is active Click the lt Refresh gt button to perform redrawing The help that is opened using the F1 key is the help corresponding to the window on which the cursor is placed Consequently because the cursor cannot be placed on the Trace View Window in which no trace results are displayed such as immed
185. connected it to the ID850QB via a USB cable Figure 1 2 Example of ID850QB System Configuration IECUBE Host machine USB 1 1 2 0 IECUBE Target system User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 21 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 2 N Wire CARD MINICUBE The N Wire CARD MINICUBE can provide debugging functions by connecting it to a target system on which the V850ES incorporating an RCU Run Control Unit and the V850E1 are mounted The N Wire CARD a PC card emulator can be manipulated from the ID850QB by directly inserting it to the host machine The MINICUBE can be manipulated from the ID850QB by connected it to the ID850QB via a USB cable Figure 1 3 Example of ID850QB System Configuration N Wire CARD MINICUBE Host machine N Wire cable Target system USB1 1 2 0 MINICUBE OCD cable Host machine Target system 3 MINICUBE2 MINICUBE2 Is operated via the ID850QB when it is connected to the host machine with the USB cable MINICUBE2 can provide the debug function when it is connected to a microcontroller with the on chip debug function Figure 1 4 Example of ID850QB System Configuration MINICUBE2 USB1 1 2 0 ee Host machine Target cable Target system 22 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 3 Operating Environment This section explains the following items regarding the operating environment Hardware environment Software environment 1 3 1 Hardware environment 1 Host mach
186. cted in the real time RAM monitor area In addition output of the access monitor function is not dis played in color IECUBE The RRM function reads data bit wise as hardware illegal values may be displayed for variables of two or more bytes in the Watch Window IECUBE 5 13 2 Pseudo real time monitor function Break When Readout To read areas that cannot be read using the real time monitor function the pseudo real time monitor function can be used instead The memory area is read by software simulation while the pseudo real time monitor function is executed so execution of the user program momentarily breaks upon a read The variables and data allocated to this area can be displayed in close to real time in the Watch Window and Memory Window Specify turning on off of the pseudo real time monitor function and the sampling range in the Extended Option Dialog Box Caution 90 Figure 5 27 Specification of Pseudo Real Time Monitor Function RAM Monito Break When Readout C Whole f TRAM OR fe Ott Redraw Interval E00 MEC The pseudo real time monitor function and software break function are exclusive of each other When the pseudo real time monitor function is enabled item other than Off is selected no soft ware break points can be set All the valid software break points that have been set are also made invalid Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 14 DMM Function DMM Dynami
187. current window Quick Watch Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data Opens the Quick Watch Dialog Box Add Watch Registers the specified data to the Watch window Opens the Add Watch Dialog Box View Watch Adds the selected data to the Watch window If the data is a symbol it is added in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option Dialog Box Change Watch Changes the data on the line selected by the Watch window Opens the Change Watch Dialog Box This menu is valid only when a variable is selected in Watch Window Delete Watch Deletes the selected watch point from the Watch Window This menu is valid only when a variable is selected in Watch Window Symbol Displays the address of the specified variable or function or the value of the 108 specified symbol Opens the Symbol To Address Dialog Box Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 4 Option menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Tool Bar Switches whether to display the tool bar Status Bar Switch whether to display the tool bar Button Switch whether to display the buttons on each window Source Mode Executes step execution at the source level in line units Instruction Mode Executes step execution at the instruction level in instruction units Auto Mode Configuration Extended Option Automatically selects step execution at the source level or step execution at the instruction level default Step execution is p
188. d w Wr ite Help W Non Map M Write External Memory Verity Internal RAM W Non Map Weite 5 4 6 Cautions 54 Note the following points regarding the break functions o_o SB The PC indicates the address after halt if a break occurs in the HALT status The access event break is delayed the specified address is passed before execution stops When a download or project file load is performed the hardware breakpoints or events may shift in the middle of an instruction Delete the hardware breakpoints or events and re set them When a software breakpoint has been set in a module file with no debug information and a download or project file load is performed the software breakpoint will be deleted Re set the breakpoint A reset signal from the target system is masked during a break and the CPU or peripheral I O cannot be reset In addition the CPU or peripheral I O is not reset normally if a reset signal from the target system or internal reset occurs when the memory contents are overwritten with the DMM function or read with the pseudo RRM function during user program execution When setting changing or deleting a breakpoint trace conditions or timer conditions during program execution the execution is stopped Therefore the break does not take effect if an event break or software break occurs when a breakpoint trace conditions or timer conditions are set during user program execution A break also does not
189. d Protect attribute was specified F2006 Hidden IOR was specified F2007 IOR of ban read or write was specified F2008 IOR not existing was specified A2009 Device file is damaged or error is in file F200a Illegal value specified for IOR A200b Can not copy A200c Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files W200d No initialize data for IOR F200e IOR area can not be accessed A20ff Can not communicate with ICE A2222 Illegal condition 4 From X3000 F3000 No mapped address was accessed 1 The allocation addresses of the program and the addresses of the debugger may not match Set the mapping to the external memory in the Configuration Dialog Box according to the allocation addresses specified in the link directive file on compilation When mapping to external memory has been executed change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR Window or Hook Procedure before download F3001 Memory has different value F3002 Illegal start address F3003 Illegal end address F3004 Illegal start address and end address F3005 Illegal condition F3006 User program is running F3007 Verification error F3008 No condition specified F3009 Parameter size does not align with access size alignment F300a Specified address does not align with access size alignment F300b Source address doe
190. d Restriction of Emulation EEPROM_Read EEPROM read function for EEPROM Not emulated EEPROM_Copy EEPROM copy function for EEPROM Not emulated EEPROM_VChK EEPROM valid area check function for EEPROM Not emulated EEPROM_Erase EEPROM erase function for EEPROM Not emulated Table 6 12 List of Availability of Emulation for Flash Function Type4 Availability Flash Function Functional Outline and Restriction of Emulation Type4 V850ES Sx3 V850ES Fx3 V850ES Jx3 V850E Dx3 Hs easatonar cess nus un FlashGetInfo Flash information acquisition function Flash information acquistion function Device information total number of blocks and device number Option 6 Last address of block number n Emulated block num ber n FlashSetlnfo Flash information setting function Restriction Restriction Nothing but information setting is performed The boot area swap ping setting is ignored FlashStatusCheck Checking of flash function operation that was performed last Restriction Restriction SELFLIB_BUSY is not returned FlashBootSwap Boot area block swapping function Not Restriction emulated Functions can be called but boot swapping is not executed 144 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Availability Flash Function Functional Outline and Restriction of Emulation FlashFLMDCheck FLMDO pin status check function Emulated 3 Cautions The cautions on performing flash self programming ar
191. d hereby under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of Renesas Electronics or others You should not alter modify copy or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product whether in whole or in part Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of semiconductor products and application examples You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of your equipment Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software or information When exporting the products or technology described in this document you should comply with the applicable export control laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations You should not use Renesas Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by the military including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction Renesas Electronics products and technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture use or sale is prohibited under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document but R
192. d those of the flash memory in the external space overlap this applies to the V850E2 core specify which takes precedence for downloading If this area is checked the flash memory in the external space takes precedence This area is not checked by default and therefore the internal instruction RAM takes precedence Note that before downloading data to the flash memory in the external space flash information must be set by using the efconfig command on the console window refer to 5 2 2 Downloading to External Flash Memory CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 5 at High Speed This check box is used to select whether to perform high speed downloading If this check box is selected the clock is switched to the highest one during downloading CPU reset occurs when switching the clock It is not selected by default normal clock is used for downloading The target areas are the internal ROM and internal RAM including VSB ROM and VSB RAM An error message will be displayed if the object file includes the code regarding the external memory area emulation memory area or data flash area Remark Downloading of the coverage result is not subject to high speed downloading 6 Offset Address This area is used to specify the offset address that is used when a file is loaded for binary data specify the start address An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to lable 5 6 Specifying Symbols The default ra
193. data that can be loaded using the real time monitor function The variables and data allocated to this area can be displayed always in real time in the Watch Window and Memory Window The sampling interval can be specified in the Extended Option Dialog Box Table 5 19 Areas for Which Sampling Can Be Performed with Real Time Monitor Function Connected IE Sampling Range IECUBE Areas specified in the RRM Seiting Dialog Box Figure 5 25 RRM Setting Dialog Box RRM Setting Address Sze symbol Cat joat 256 l Bytes _entry data tai Glose lOx3 8000 52 Bytes _entry data tai Restore Dato 1024 Bytes _stack 0xt18 Default a Bytes 0 Delete Po l Bytes m Jump Se S eee Po Bytes E ee G ee Size Total 1792 2048 Bytes Figure 5 26 Specification of Interval for Sampling with Real Time Monitor Function RAM Monitor Break When Readout f Whole f TRAM OR fe Ott Redraw Interval 500 Sec User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 89 Caution1 Caution2 Caution3 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION RRM Function Trace Function IECUBE and Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE are functions that are used on a mutually exclusive basis Refer to 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis To switch between the three functions go to the Option menu IECUBE Data that is overwritten with the DMM function during RUN and overwritten via DMA is not refle
194. ding Before downloading is performed the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value AfterCpuReset tab Hook after CPU reset during break after resetting CPU the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value BeforeCpuRun tab Hook before starting execution before starting execution the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value AfterCpuStop tab Hook after breaking After breaking the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value lt Test gt button All the commands described on the tabs are tested lt Save gt button Saves all the tab contents to a file If the ID850QB was activated from a project file the file is saved as project file name tcl lt Clear gt button Clears all the descriptions on the tabs Remark Specify the program register and the peripheral I O registers for the register name User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 345 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Memory Mapped I O window Data is explicitly read or written at a specified address in this window When a write is performed in the Memory Window the data is internally read and verified by the ID850QB In addition the memory can also be read simply by scrolling in the Memory Window On the Memory Mapped I O window however the above operations are not performed Therefore this window i
195. display area This area displays the icons event icons of the registered Various Event Conditions By selecting the context menu gt Detail the details can be displayed In list displayed Displays event icon Refer to Table 5 18 Event Icon The event icon is the jump pointer Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function 260 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE In detailed display SJEX Atest c 23 0x1 252 MJOx00000000 SIEX Altest c t1 5 0x1 a36 M JOx00000000 BE 0002 EvtQUO03 5 Es A jest cH1 01 ase M JOx00000000 BrkOOO0S BJEvtQ0003 LrkQO001 PIE s0000 P2 E vtO0002 FAE vtQ0005 Details of event contents are displayed by using the following key information as a separator Refer to Table 6 21 Separator for Displaying Event Details Table 6 21 Separator for Displaying Event Details Key Information Contents Event condition S Status condition z Access size condition A Address condition Symbol or expression actual address Data condition Symbol or expression actual address M Mask condition Event link condition P1 P4 Event link condition on n th line Disable condition Pass count condition Break condition Break condition Trace condition IECUBE M Tracer control mode T Delay trigger condition Delay Count S Trace start condition E Trace end condition Qualify trace condition Timer
196. displayed in red Whether the toolbar is displayed or not can be specified by selecting Option menu gt Status Bar Remark Ifthe screen resolution is low 800 600 etc all the statuses may not be displayed on the status bar Figure 6 4 Status Bar a 2 3 a 5 i 7 i main c 16 main OO0002 76 STOP BREAK Manual Break AUTO INS 1 Program name Displays the program file name indicated by the PC value Source name Displays the source file name indicated by the PC value Line number Displays the line number indicated by the PC value 2 Function name Displays the function name indicated by the PC value 3 PC value Displays the current PC value 4 CPU status Refer to Table 6 2 CPU Status 5 IE status Refer to Table 6 3 IE Status If there are two or more the statuses they delimited with and displayed 6 Break Cause Refer to Table 6 4 Break Cause 7 STEP mode Displays the step execution mode Displays that the following modes are selected from the Option menu SRO hissaveesveess Source mode I Tee Instruction mode AUTO Automatic mode 8 Key input mode Displays the key input mode INS oo eee Insertion mode OVR aseessa Overwrite mode The Memory Window is fixed to OVR mode Table 6 2 CPU Status HALT Halt mode STOP IDLE Software stop mode hardware stop mode Idle mode 116 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6 3
197. dix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal 7 Function buttons Open Loads the selected file After loading the file this dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without loading the file Help Displays this dialog box online help files Restore Restores the input data to the original status 160 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Upload Dialog Box This dialog box is used to set the name and format of the file to be saved and save the set memory contents etc to that file Refer to 5 2 Download Function Upload Function Figure 6 17 Upload Dialog Box Save jni Save as type Intel Hex Ot hex bd Cancel Help 2 Save Address 0 7 0 Restore Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select File menu gt Upload Explanation of Each Area 1 Upload file setting area Save in This area is used to specify a file name A file name can be directly input or selected m from the list at the upper part of this area File name Up to 257 characters string with a extension can be specified Save as type This area is used to specify the extension of the file to be saved The format of the data to be saved is determined by the extension Refer to Table 5 4 Type of File That Can Be Uploaded Remark Extensions other than those listed can also be used User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 161 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFER
198. dress at the bit position 96 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Target Window Details of Jump Pointer From the Stack Window A function at the cursor position that stack flame number indicates is used as the jump pointer With current function If the jump destination is the Source Jumps to the current PC line Window Other than above Jumps to the current PC address With function other than current function If the jump destination is the Source Jump to the line that calls a nested Window function Other than above Jump to the address next to the instruc tion that calls a nested function From the Trace View Jump to the Memory Window Window If the cursor position is at an access Access address address access data or access status Other than above Fetch address Jump to the Source Fetch address Window or Assemble Window Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 97 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 16 3 Trace result with linking window IECUBE By linking the Trace View Window with each window Source Window Assemble Window or Memory Window the corresponding part can be displayed on the linked window by using the address at the cursor position on the Trace View Window as a pointer If the cursor is moved on the Trace View Window the corresponding part on the linked window is highlighted or indicated by the cursor position 1 Linking method The linking method is as follows 1 Setthe Trace View Window
199. dress of immediate value Register name bit IOR name bit Label name bit address of immediate value bit Specification of scope How a variable is handled when a scope Is specified is as follows Table 6 15 How Variable Is Handled When Scope Is Specified 194 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Display form change area Radix This area is used to select the display radix Proper Variable Displays the default value of each variable Symbol Displays data with the radix set in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Hex Displays in hexadecimal numbers Dec Displays in decimal numbers Oct Displays in octal numbers Bin Displays in binary numbers String Displays in strings size This area is used to select the display size If the display size is fixed such as when a variable in C language or register is to be displayed it cannot be changed Adaptive Variable Displays the default value of each variable Symbol Displays data with the size set in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Byte Displays in 8 bit units Half Word Displays in 16 bit units Word Displays in 32 bit units Number This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed blank or a number of 1 to 256 If this area is blank data is displayed as a simple variable If a number of 1 or more is specified data is displayed as an array variable in the Watch Window If an array v
200. e Memory Mapped I O window is displayed by default Input the value to be written Data Size Select the size of the data to be written The size specified in the Memory Mapped O window is selected by default lt Write In gt button Data is written to the specified address with the specified size lt Close gt button Closes this dialog box 348 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Sym Inspect window This window displays the list of the symbols and addresses of loaded module files and is used for searching the list for the properly described symbol Figure A 7 Sym Inspect Window Syminspect Amla Load Module testisgemot Fiter a z 7 Match Case smb tess A sabi dz000005i4 sub e OxO000053e sub3 Ox00000570 subd Ox00000Sd4 InitTiner Ox00000Se8 OnTiner OxD0000620 igq_string OxO3fE71I0c gshittjis 0x03fE7114 z 3tE712 OxO3t iF1lac me O O3f 7190 g_pd OxO3fEF1I4 lge 0x03f 7138 q_ p Ox03ft71l3c ig_struct OxO3fe7140 ig_pstruct O OSfi 71S q_i OzxO3FE7ISe T Sl Ox03SfEF 7160 KE Load Module Selects a load module file Filter Specifies a properly described symbol so that the symbol is retrieved Match Case In Filter specify to differentiate or not differentiate case sensitivity Select this box to differentiate case sensitivity Symbol Displays the symbols Clicking this icon has the symbols sorted in alphabetical order Address Displays the addresses C
201. e Run menu Figure 5 5 Execution Button i gt le E Fa HH Re o Go Cac Ret Step Over Res Figure 5 6 Run Menu File Edit View Option Pi Event Browse Jump Simulator Window Help Restart Fa Go F5 Enore break points and Go Ctrl F5 Return Out Fy Step h Fa Next Over FIO Go amp Go Slow motion 56 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Table 5 9 Type of Execution Restart The CPU is reset and the user program is executed starting from address 0 m This is the same operation as resetting the CPU before execution of the user program and executing Go Go The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current gt PC register and execution continues until a break condition is established Ignore break points and The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current Go PC register Execution of the user program continues ignoring set breakpoints Return Out The user program is executed until execution returns to the calling function z described in C language Step In In the source mode Step execution of one line of the source text is performed starting from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated In the instruction mode One instruction is executed from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated i Next Over wl jarl instruction Next st
202. e used Use the software trace method instead Since there is no identification information in single chip mode 0 or single chip mode 1 in the TEG chip the internal ROM start address is fixed to Oh The target device that is used for debugging cannot be mounted in the mass production product The N Wire CARD rewrites the flash memory target device during debugging so the guaranteed number of rewrites of the flash memory may not be satisfied When MINICUBE or N Wire CARD Is Connected MINICUBE Note the following points 1 to 5 when debugging the self programming function using MINICUBE and N Wire CARD 1 352 A break may not occur even if a hardware breakpoint is set in the interrupt servicing in the user application The interrupts registered by the handler registration function in the user application can be acknowledged in a flash environment However no break occurs in an interrupt servicing acknowledged during flash macro servicing even if a hardware breakpoint has been set in the interrupt servicing That is no break occurs in an interrupt service routine acknowledged during self programming even if an event breakpoint has been set Debug cannot be performed if a break is forcibly generated during flash macro servicing When a break is forcibly generated during flash macro servicing the message Flash Macro Service is displayed on the status bar If an attempt is made to continue the debug operation the error message
203. e Dialog Box Timer Dialog Box List Window Display position of window Watch Window Display information of window t watch registration information aioli Er a SE Note The display status of members of a structure pointer array pointer and so on and radix for display ing individual member are not saved 5 15 2 Window display information view file A view file is a file that records window display information View files can be loaded and saved for each window When a view file is loaded a reference window Source Window in the static status is displayed and the display information at the time of saving is displayed View files are loaded and saved in the View File Load Dialog Box and View File Save Dialog Box respectively Table 5 21 Type of View Files File Type Current Window Name File Name Assemble dis Assemble WindowNetet Memory mem mem Memory Window Memory Window Watch wch Watch Window Register rgw Register Window I O Register ior IOR Window Local Variable loc Local Variable Window Stack Trace stk Stack Window Trace ww tvw Trace View Window View Window a Coverage csv a Coverage Window Data is saved separately for the tab selected List csv List Window Data is saved separately for the tab selected User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 93 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION File Type Current Window Name File Name Console log Console Window Window
204. e described below 1 Flash self emulation function in the following case a The internal ROM size is not set to the default size Workaround Set the default size to the internal ROM size in the Configuration Dialog Box 3 4 b When two breaks before execution are used Workaround Disable or delete one of the breaks before execution When flash self programming emulation function is enabled the following restrictions are applied to the debug function a The internal ROM and internal RAM sizes cannot be changed b The DMM and pseudo RRM functions are disabled c An illegal break occurs in the program if the SP register value is O not pointing to the internal RAM If a break such as an event occurs before the SP register value is initialized to point to a relevant location such as internal RAM then it causes an illegal break for the stack area If there is a possibility that such a break will occur during this period set a relevant value to SP before executing the program d If Clear register when reset is selected in the Extended Option Dialog Box the values of the R3 register that have been changed by a flash macro service are cleared during reset emulation e An illegal break may occur if the restriction shown below applies to the IECUBE used Clear the Non Map checkbox for the Internal RAM in the Fail safe Break Dialog Box An illegal break occurs during program execution in internal RAM reserved a 4 byte inst
205. e file through selection in Chip and displayed value with This area is not available when using MINICUBE2 or MINICUBE The value is fixed to the one defined in the device file Sets the Internal ROM size 0 8 32 64 128 256 512 1024 KB Sets the Internal RAM size 4096 12288 28672 61440 Bytes Data Flash Displays the data flash memory when using a device incorporating the data flash memory To use the data flash memory area select the Use Data Flash checkbox When using the V850ES microcontrollers specify Chip Select that is used for mapping of the data flash memory in the Chip Select area Use Data Flash Chip Select area Remark When using a device with VSB Flash or VSB RAM each area is added to the default internal ROM size and internal RAM size When using the V850E Dx3 for example the maximum internal ROM size is shown as 2 MB and the maximum internal RAM size is shown as 84 KB If the internal RAM area and the peripheral I O register area become contiguous as a result of changing the internal RAM size fix the end address and then change the start address of the internal RAM size see the table below IECUBE 64M device Internal RAM size bytes Internal RAM start address 4096 Ox3ffe000 12288 Ox3ffcO000 28672 Ox3ff8000 61440 Ox3ff0000 256M device Internal RAM size bytes Internal RAM start address 4096 Oxfffe000 12288 Oxfffco00 28672 Oxfff8000 61440 O
206. e guard area then an illegal memory address is accessed and a fail safe break occurs at an unexpected address Correct the address to a relevant one for FlashWordWrite FlashWordRead or FlashNWordRead To enable the settings made in the Flash Option Dialog Box be sure to reset the CPU and reexecute the program otherwise the setting may not take effect Secure a stack area of at least 84 54H bytes for the debugger s workspace The debugger consumes a stack area of at least 84 54H bytes when a break occurs or during emulation processing of flash memory writing When interrupts are enabled a stack area of another 84 54H bytes is required as the debugger s workspace If multiple interrupts are enabled a stack area of 84 54H bytes must be secured per stage If a flash function is not used in accordance with the specifications or an unsupported flash function is called 1 is returned 1 The following restrictions apply to emulation of Type4 1 An area of 48 bytes from the internal RAM end address is reserved for use by the debugger 2 When using a device with a 1 MB internal flash memory the internal flash area starting from address OxFF300 or higher will be used by the debugger 3 If a flash function is executed stepwise in assemble mode the debugger code for emulation will be executed which is different from the code actually executed by the device During debugging therefore perform stepwise execution in source mode
207. e in this area is displayed in red refer to 5 9 3 Cautions 2 Execution time display area This area displays the result of measuring the execution time of the program Only Total is displayed for Run Break Measurement results that cannot be trusted due to counter overflow are displayed in red Pass Number of passes Total Total execution time in the measurement zone specified by start event and end event conditions Min Minimum execution time lt View Always gt Opens the Timer Result Dialog Box 230 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Table 6 16 Measurable Values Measurable Connected IE Measurable Execution Time Execution Count IECUBE Total Max Min 33bit External clock 50 MHz 16 bit Approx 2 8 minutes max 1 division resolution 20 nsec 65 535 times max Approx 195 2 hours max 4K division resolution 81920 nsec 3 Time Out Break This area is used to set the timeout break for the section measurement time specified in Start Event End Event time from the establishment of timer start event to the establishment of timer end event ON A timeout break occurs execution is terminated if the section measurement time exceeds the specified timeout time Specify the time out time in the text boxes The values up to the maximum measurable time can be specified OFF No timeout break occurs default Overflow A time
208. e operation as this button Go Executes the program from the current PC BAsame operation as this button Ignore break points and Go Return Out Ignores break points being set and executes the program Both hard and soft at Same operation as this button The user program is executed until execution returns same operation as this button Note This command is used for a function described in C language Step In Executes the instructions in the program one by one step execution If a function or subroutine is called its instructions are executed one by one I Same operation as this button Next Over Start From Here Executes the instructions in the program one by one Next step execution If a function or subroutine is called its instructions are not executed on a step by step basis same operation as this button Executes the program from the cursor position on Source Window or Assemble Window Come Here Go amp Go Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position in the Source Window or the Assemble Window Continues executing the program If a break occurs because a break condition is satisfied the window is updated and the program is executed again Efsane operation as clicking this button each time a break has occurred Slowmotion CPU Reset Continues step execution Each time step execution has been performed the window is updated and then
209. e simultaneously set enabled Refer to 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition Figure 6 61 Break Dialog Box Break Mame E E E Add Event Break Event Add Link oe ime 1 Shrink 444 Event Manager 2 Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Y Click the Brk button or select Event menu gt Break 2 2 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Break event condition setting area Break Name This area is used to set a break event name Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name To display the contents of an already created event condition select from the drop down list The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events Refer to Table 5 18 Event lcon The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet By clicking the left mark an event condition can be validated or invalidated Break Event This area is used to set an event condition for break Refer to Table 6 24 Number of Events Settable in Condition Setting Area for the number of event conditions and event link conditions that can be set in this area Event conditions are easily set by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area For details refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions
210. e specification b 3 when address range is specified because 2 events are used for range specification c 2 when address range is specified because 2 events are used for range specification d Use from Phase 1 to Phase 4 e Address range specification is not possible f Can be set only for Phase 1 and Phase 2 g Can not be set the event condition that range address is specified for Start Event or End Event area Can be set the event link condition that range address is specified User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 85 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 12 5 Managing events Managing events is done with the Event Manager The Event Manager allows display enabling disabling and deletion of the Various Event Conditions Figure 5 24 Managing Events the Event Manager a Event Manager a mE Open Enable Delte Delete All Close Close EvtQ0001 SJE Alest c 23 0x1 a52 M Os00000000 EvtQ0002 SJE Altest c 15 0x7 456 M Os00000000 BIE vt00002 EvtQ0003 SJE Altest c 16 0x1 ase M Os00000000 B Evt00003 LnkQO001 P1 E t0000 P2 E 0000 PAE 1 Event icon Event icons consist of a mark and an event name indicating the type of event The color of each event icon indicates the setting status of that event Enable disable is switched by clicking the mark part Table 5 18 Event Icon Charac ter Meaning Color Indicates that the event condition or event link condition which is used for various event co
211. eads the peripheral I O registers that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed or the data of the I O ports and I O protect area added in the Add I O Port Dialog Box Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 223 Context Menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Move Opens the Address Move Dialog Box Add Watch Opens the Add Watch Dialog Box Add I O Port Opens the Add I O Port Dialog Box Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays octal numbers default Sort By Name Displays in alphabetical order Sort By Address Displays in address order default Unsort Does not sort Attribute Switches on off display of Attribute Pick Up Displays only the registers selected in the IOR Select Dialog Box Select Opens the IOR Select Dialog Box Compulsion Read Forcibly reads the peripheral I O registers that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed or the data of the I O ports and I O protect area added in the Add I O Port Dialog Box Cautions When the V850E2 ME3 is used the USB related registers cannot be accessed without UCLK connected Ifa USB related register is to be displayed on the IOR Window or Watch Window therefore the debugger may hang up To avoid this save the following Tcl command as a text file and perform batch processing by executing sourcefile on the console wind
212. ebugger oa aa a a Symbol Target GPL Do vou want to reset 7 2 E Cancel Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select File menu gt Debugger Reset Explanation of Each Area 1 Reset subject selection area This area is used to specify what is to be Initialized Initializes the selected item Debugger Initializes the ID850QB default Symbol Initializes the symbol information Target CPU Initializes the CPU 2 Function buttons OK Initializes according to the setting Cancel Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files 282 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Exit Debugger Dialog Box This dialog box is used to select whether the current debug environment is saved to a project file or not before terminating the ID850QB Refer to 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file It can be specified in the Debugger Option Dialog Box that the ID850QB is terminated without this confirmation dialog box being opened Figure 6 67 Exit Debugger Dialog Box IDS500B8 Do vou want bo save the settings in the project file I This will end vour Debugger session Opening Function buttons Opening Select File menu gt Exit If forcible termination such as to terminate the application has been executed on the task list that terminates Windows Function
213. ed from the drop down list On the drop down list only the chip names registered to the registry from the device file installer are displayed This area can be specified only when the debugger is started up Caution1 The device selected at the ID850QB activation cannot be changed after activation The device specified by the project file is not used even if the project file of a device different from the target device is downloaded Caution2 The error message FOc2e There is no response from flash macro service may be displayed in the following cases If the ID850QB is started up after selecting a device file that does not correspond to the actual device If the ID850QB is started up after selecting a device file that does not correspond to the actual device and a load module is downloaded to the flash memory There is a possibility that the device connected to the N Wire CARD and the device selected by the ID850QB do not match Check the device specified in the Configuration dialog box MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Remark By default the type selected at the previous startup is displayed but if that type is not registered the first type registered is displayed 120 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Internal Memory This area is used to set the each size of the internal memory of the CPU It is selected from the drop down list or input from the key board The default size is obtained from the devic
214. efer to the N Wire CARD MINICUBE or MINICUBE2 User s Manual Incorrect connection may damage the emulator and the target system User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 217 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3 2 Cautions on connecting Midas Lab emulator When Midas Lab emulator RTE 2000H TP is connected be sure to perform the following settings before starting the ID850QB Set the type of the CPU that is controlled by Midas Lab rte4win32 using Check RTE2 For details refer to documents related to rte4win32 and KIT Remark URL of Midas Lab Inc download site http www midas co jp download english program htm 1 Select an in circuit emulator such as PG2 IE in the Products List field select the CPU name in the case of OCD 2 Select a USB port or LAN from I F 1 in the Setup RTE field 3 Click the lt License gt button to input the license code In the case of OCD also click the lt Option gt button to input the ID code Figure 3 1 Check RTE2 Setup RTE Products setup RTE Produtcs List l YE5S0E GR2 RTE Y650E PG2 1E BSOE GP8 Ya50E PG2 Fl USB UF 850E PG2 IE eres 850 SAT F 2 00 60 71 F0 05 C3 i VB50 SBx n ft B5O0 AB2 l E50 GW a5l a52 Reset RTE License Option pie Products Info 850E PG2 IE License Info License is not required Cance Remark When using a Midas Lab emulator the dedicated startup option must be specified refer to 3 3 2 Specifi
215. egardless of the trace condition Refer to 5 10 7 DMA point trace function This section explains the following items Trace memory Setting trace data Checking trace data Mixed display mode Trace View Window Tracer operation Setting conditional trace DMA point trace function Cautions Caution RRM Function Trace Function IECUBE and Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE are functions that are used on a mutually exclusive basis Refer to 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis To switch between the three functions go to the Option menu 5 10 1 Trace memory ID850QB has trace memory with a ring structure Size specification is done in the Extended Option Dialog Box The maximum trace memory capacity is as follows Table 5 10 Trace Memory Size IECUBE 256 KB 172 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 10 2 Setting trace data The detailed settings for the collected traced data are done in the Extended Option Dialog Box Complement display of instructions between branch instructions that cannot be traced by hardware is possible in the complement mode enabled by selecting the Complement Data area checkbox When the complement mode is enabled assemble display of the internal ROM area is possible during user program execution while the tracer is stopped Figure 5 19 Setting Trace Data Trace Timetag Count Rate
216. el 4 Access Restore fe Byte C Half Word C Word Help Read Write Read Only Write Only Read Protect Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Option menu gt Add I O Port Explanation of Each Area 1 I O Port List This area lists the I O ports currently registered If a new I O port is registered it is added to this list An I O port already registered can be selected and changed or deleted by 3 Buttons User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 221 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 I O port specification area Name This area is used to specify an I O port name to be added up to 15 characters long Address This area is used to specify the address of the I O port to be added The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols The address that can be set in this area is either a Target area address or peripheral O registers area address Access This area is used to select the access size of the I O port to be added Byte 8 bit unit default Half Word 16 bit unit Word 32 bit unit Read Write This area is used to specify the access attribute of the I O port to be added In the default condition all the attributes are not selected i e the I O port can be both read and written Read Only Read Only Write Only Write only Read Protect Read protected
217. el serial Functions This command sets the flash memory in the external space Be sure to set the flash memory before downloading data to it The following are options Specifies information file of the flash memory by a full path Specifies the start address of the flash memory Specifies the data width access size of the flash memory 8 16 or 32Nete parallel Specifies the number of flash memories in parallel 1 or moreN Specifies the number of flash memories in series 1 or moreN Note For the set value refer to refer to Table 7 8 Parameter Set Values example If all the parameters are omitted the current setting and the total size KB of the flash memory are displayed The following options are also available Displays the ID information manufacturer code and device code of the flash memory in the external space This information will not be correctly displayed if the setting is not correctly made clear Deletes the set information Usage example IDCON 1 efconfig c MBM29LV800BA fdb 0x100000 16 2 1 IDCON 2 efconfig IDCON 3 efconfig id User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 307 308 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Table 7 8 Parameter Set Values example Connection of flash memory as parallel Microcontroller Microcontroller Microcontroller Microcontroller Microcontroller Microcontroller User s Manual Flash Memory 16 bit mode Flash Memory 8 bit mode
218. en closed display starts from the first display start position Figure 6 33 Memory Window Memory Search lt lt gt gt Refresh DMM Close 9 1123456789ABCDEF OOOOOOOO 80 OOOOO01TOeO OOO000SO BC MIOOO0BOIBA Memory Search KE gt gt Refresh DMM Close Addr 0 1 4 eee F FF FF OOFFSOLOIFF FF FF OOFFSOZO0 FF FF FF OOFFSOSOIFF FF FF OOFFSO40 FF FF FF OOFFSOSOIFF FF FF OOFFSO60 FF FF FF OOFFSO 7OIFF FF FF OOFFSOSOIFF FF FF OOFFSOS0IFF FF FF OOFFSOAOIFF FF FF OOFFSOBOIFF FF FF OOFFSOCOIFF FF FF OOFFSODOIFF FF FF OOFFSOEOIFF FF FF OOFFSOFOIFF FF FF OOFFS1LOOIFF FF FF OOFFS1LOIFF FF FF OOFFSOLZO0 FF FF FF OOFFS130 FF FF FF OOFFS140 FF FF FF OOFFS1S0 FF FF FF OOFFS160 FF FF FF QOFFS1 0 FF FF FF Innere ole FE EE User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 203 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Figure 6 34 Memory Window When RRM Function Is Selected ui Memory Add 0 1 2 O3FFBOOO 0 O3FFBO10 00 03FFBO2 0 O3FFEO3 0100 03FFE0 4 0il JO3FFBOSOO0 JO3FFBO6 ofm JO3FFBEO OOO 03FFBOS 00 O3FFEO9q100 03FFE0A 00 lO3FFBOBOIOO O3FFBOCOME 03FFBODO OO O3FFBOE ORR 0 3FFB0F 00D 03FFE10 00l 03FFE110f00 03FFE1 200E JO3FFB130 00 O3FFB140 m 03FFB1So 00 03FFE16 0i O3FFB17 0 00 INARA Oa 4 45 6 mga oo i oO fe omy i i i m Cif Dre omy Ch omy mj o L cif omy fe C pe ce D
219. en the Assemble Window is the current window select View menu gt Search or click the lt Search gt button in the same window Explanation of Each Area 1 Search condition specification area Find What This area is used to specify the data to be searched Up to 256 characters In the default condition the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed As necessary the character string displayed can be changed Up to 16 input histories can be recorded Match Case This should be selected to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase Scan Whole Region This should be selected to search the entire specified range Direction This area is used to specify the direction of the search Up Forward search Searches data forward upward on screen from the current position of the cursor Down Backward search Searches data backward downward on screen from the current position of the cursor default 178 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Address This area is used to specify the address to be searched The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols 2 Function buttons Find Next Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition If the specified character string is found as a result of a se
220. enesas Electronics does not warrant that such information is error free Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades Standard High Quality and Specific The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product s quality grade as indicated below You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular application You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as Specific without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Further you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an application categorized as Specific or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is Standard unless otherwise expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books etc Standard Computers office e
221. ent A project file is created when the debugging environment at a particular point in time is saved and that debugging environment can be restored by loading this file at a subsequent time Project files are loaded and saved in the Project File Save Dialog Box and Project File Load Dialog Box respectively To load a project file at startup press the lt Project gt button in the Configuration Dialog Box The following contents are saved to the project file Table 5 20 Contents Saved to Project File Window Name Name Saved Contents Configuration Dialog Box All items target device clock setting pin mask setting mapping information Main Window Display position tool bar status bar button display information execution mode information Download Dialog Box File information to be downloaded Extended Option Dialog Box Set information Debugger Option Dialog Box Fail safe Break Dialog Box Flash Option Dialog Box Data Flash Option Dialog Box RRM Setting Dialog Box Assemble Window Display information of window display start address Memory Window Source Window Display information of window Stack Window IOR Window Local Variable Window Trace View Window Code Coverage Window Event Manager Console Window Expansion Window Register Window 92 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Event Dialog Box Display information of window event information Event Link Dialog Box Break Dialog Box Trac
222. ep execution is performed assuming the function or subroutine called by the jarl instruction as one step step execution continues until the nesting level becomes the same as when the jarl instruction was executed Instruction other than jarl The same processing as Step In is performed Start From Here This command executes the user program starting from the specified address Execution of the user program is stopped when a set break event condition is satisfied Come Here The user program is executed from the address indicated by the current PC register to the address selected in the line address display area of the Source Window or Assemble Window and then a break occurs While the user program is being executed the break event currently set does not occur Go amp Go The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register and stopped if a set break event condition is satisfied The contents of each window are updated and execution of the user program is resumed from the address at which the program was stopped This operation is repeated until the user executes Stop Slowmotion Step execution of one line is performed from the address indicated by the current PC register value in the source mode In the instruction mode step execution of one instruction is performed The contents of each window are updated each time step execution is performed This operation is repeated until the use
223. er Same function as Event menu gt Event Manager Registers and sets events Opens the Event Dialog Box Same function as Event menu gt Event Registers and sets break events Opens the Break Dialog Box Brk Same function as Event menu gt Break y Registers and sets trace events Opens the Trace Dialog Box Trc Same function as Event menu gt Trace IECUBE as Registers and sets timer events Opens the Timer Dialog Box Tim Same function as Event menu gt Timer IECUBE 2 Operation of tool bar Whether the toolbar is displayed or not can be specified by selecting Option menu gt Tool Bar This toolbar can be displayed in the following two modes The modes are selected in the Debugger Option Dialog Box ReGo Go lalriol2 6 B 8 Res 4 m e Go Ret Step Over Res Open Load Proj Sro Asm Mem Weh Reg IOR Loc Figure 6 2 Tool Bar Picture Only T ALIE i gt gt a BEE awg QA rfa EB eh Eal Figure 6 3 Tool Bar Picture and Text Window display area This area displays various debug windows The displayed window can be changed in size or an icon can be created in this area User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 115 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Status bar The status bar displays the status of the ID850QB and in circuit emulator While the user program is being executed the status bar is
224. er of the following characters Ato Z a to z _ underbar and 0 to 9 2 A symbol must start with a character other than numerals 0 to 9 3 Uppercase characters A to Z and lowercase characters a to z are distinguished 4 A symbol must be no more than 2048 characters long if a symbol of more than 2048 characters is defined only the first 2048 characters are valid 5 A symbol is defined by loading a load module file 6 Symbols are classified into the following types by the valid range Global symbol assembly language C language Static symbol C language In file static symbol In function static symbol Local symbol C language In file local symbol In function local symbol In block local symbo 7 The following symbols are available for each language used Assembly language structured assembly language label name bit symbol name C language Variable name including pointer variable name enumeration type variable name array name structure name and union name Function name label name Array element structure element union element bit field if the symbol is an array structure or union 8 A symbol can be described instead of an address or numeric value 9 The valid range of a symbol is determined based on the source debug information when the source file is assembled or compiled 10 Describe only the symbol name of a global symbol 11 A local sym
225. er to 5 6 7 Stack trace display function The window corresponding to the stack contents can be jumped to using the Jump function A number of other operations using Context Menu Function buttons etc can be performed in this window Caution The stack trace display function may not operate correctly if there is a function that does not create a stack frame Remark ERROR may be displayed during prologue or epilogue processing of a function Figure 6 32 Stack Window Stack Seles E me slot Iz num idx slot out slot chmain 1073 Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu Stack Window dedicated items Context Menu Opening Click the Stk button or select Browse menu gt Stack Trace 200 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Stack frame number display area This area assigns numbers to and displays the stack contents A stack frame number is a natural number starting from 1 The shallower the nesting of the stack the higher the number This means that a function having stack number one higher than that of a certain function is the function that calls the certain function 2 Stack frame contents display area This area displays the stack frame contents lt displays function names or local variable names Note however that this area cannot be edited If the stack contents consist of a function They are displayed as follows
226. erformed at the source level in a mode other than mixed display mode if Source Window is active It is performed at the instruction level if Assemble Window is active If neither window is active step execution is performed at the source level Sets the environment Opens the Configuration Dialog Box Sets extended options Opens the Extended Option Dialog Box RRM Setting Sets the sampling range for RRM function IECUBE Opens the RRM Setting Dialog Box Flash Option This dialog box is used to make the flash self programming emulation settings IECUBE Opens the Flash Option Dialog Box Data Flash Option This dialog box is used to make the data flash error emulation settings IECUBE Opens the Data Flash Option Dialog Box Debugger Option Sets ID850QB options Opens the Debugger Option Dialog Box Add I O Port Adds user defined I O ports Opens the Add O Port Dialog Box Trace Clear Clears the trace data IECUBE This item is displayed only when Trace View Window is active Coverage Opens the following dialog boxes related to coverage measurement IECUBE Clear Clears the coverage measurement results IECUBE Select Selects the coverage measurement range as a space of 1 MB or more IECUBE Opens the Coverage Address Dialog Box RRM Function lIECUBE Trace Function IECUBE Select the RRM function Refer to 5 13 RRM Function default This function is used on
227. ers Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Event Name This area is used to set an event name Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name To display the contents of an already created event condition select from the drop down list In the select mode the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the setting dialog box that called the Event Dialog Box The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events Refer to Table 5 18 Event Icon The gray E mark indicates that the event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet 2 Event Status The status conditions that can be specified are listed below This area is used to select a status condition By specifying a status condition the type of the execution event and an access event is determined if an execution event is specified nothing can be input to the Access Size and Data Mask Execution event Execution EX Program execution Before Execution EX B Program execution break before execution Note Access event R W RW Data read write Read R Data read Write W Data write R W Data not Equal RWND Data read write An event occurs only if a data condition is not satisfied Note2 Read Data not Equal RND Data read An event occurs only if a data condition is not satisfied Note
228. event conditions Because the dialog box is not closed even after an event has been registered new event conditions can be registered In the select mode An event condition is selected If there is an event being edited it is automatically registered and selected Enable Disable Validates enables or invalidates disables the selected event condition However event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or disabled Same operation as the clicking the mark of event icon Clear Clears the contents of the event condition Restore Restores the contents of an edited event condition If an event condition not registered is displayed all the fields other than the event name field are blank or the default values are set Cancel Closes this dialog box Even if an event condition is being edited it is not registered and Close the dialog box is closed Help Displays the help window of this window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 271 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Break Dialog Box This dialog box is used to register set and display break event conditions Refer to 5 12 Event Function 5 4 Break Function Registration and setting of break event conditions is done by setting each item 256 items max in this dialog box and then clicking the lt OK gt button The registered break event conditions are managed by the Event Manager There are restrictions on the number of break event conditions that can b
229. execution of user program and ends when a break occurs At this time the set trace event conditions are ignored Conditional trace Trace is started or stopped by the condition set in the Trace Dialog Box Refer to 5 10 6 Setting conditional trace If a break occurs while a trace is being executed however trace is stopped immediately 2 Operation during Step In execution The tracer operates every step execution and trace data of one step is successively added to the trace memory 14 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 3 Operation during Next Over execution The operation of the tracer differs depending on the instruction to which Next Over is to be executed a jarl disp22 lp instruction The jarl instruction and the subroutine that was called are traced b Other instructions The same operation as that during Step In execution is performed 4 Tracer Control Mode There are the following types of trace control mode These trace mode settings are performed from the Run menu Table 5 12 Types of Tracer Control Mode Non Stop Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest frame default Fulop Fulop Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer around the trace memory and then Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer the tracer Full Break Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program execution Delay Trigger Stop
230. f the expression specified in Symbol is displayed The address value of an I O port name or peripheral I O registers name the register contents of a register name or flag value of a PSW flag name is displayed Radix This area is used to select the radix of the converted data to be displayed Hex Hexadecimal number default Dec Decimal number Oct Octal number Bin Binary number User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 181 2 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE OK If the contents of Symbol have been changed converts the symbol After conversion closes the dialog box if the contents of Symbol have not been changed Close Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the input data to the original status If the lt OK gt button has already been clicked the data is restored to the status immediately after the lt OK gt button was clicked Help Displays this dialog box online help files 182 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE List Window This window lists functions variables symbols sections and interrupt requests Display data can be saved in the CSV format independently for a selected tab Refer to 5 15 2 Window display information view file Figure 6 26 List Window List Load Module aout Close 3 Function Variable Symbol Section Interrupt s cte mair _intwdi _intpi _intpl _intp _intp3 _in
231. fer to 5 4 4 Hardware break and software break Software breakpoints cannot be set in this window they can be set in the Source Window or Assemble Window Refer to 5 4 2 Breakpoint setting Caution1 Software break points can be set or deleted while the user program is being executed While the user program is being executed software breaks can be set deleted enable or disable The warning of a purport which makes a user program once take a break is displayed Caution2 When the Pseudo real time monitor function Break When Readout is enabled no software break points can be set In addition if a valid software break point has been set writing during user program execution DMM Function is disabled Remark The displayed items are sorted by clicking the title on the label in each column ascending descending order is switched each time the title is clicked Figure 6 57 Software Break Manager Software Break Manager test c ha omy bOOO04 test c i4 1 su bOOO02 test c 16 SM bOOOOS testi c ol sw bOOO06 tests c eg Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Event menu gt Software Break Manager 258 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Break information display area Name This area displays the names of registered events and the checkboxes that indicate whether each event is enabled or disabled An event name
232. fied by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols fill code gt Specify the data fill code used when filling the range specified in From Up to 16 binary data strings byte data strings can be specified Delimit each data with a blank character 2 Function buttons OK Fills the specified data in accordance with a given condition Stop filling Stops filling Cancel Closes this dialog box During filling this button is replaced by the lt Stop gt button Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files 210 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Copy Dialog Box This dialog box is used to copy the memory contents in the Memory Window Refer to 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function Figure 6 37 Memory Copy Dialog Box Memory Copy Address 1 From To F 2 Cancel Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Edit menu gt Memory gt Copy Explanation of Each Area 1 Copy range specification area Address This area is used to specify the copy source and copy destination addresses The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols From Specify
233. functions 20 1 2 System Configuration 21 1 3 Operating Environment 23 1 3 1 Hardware environment 23 1 3 2 Software environment 23 1 4 Cautions During Debugging 24 1 4 1 When performing source level debugging 24 1 4 2 Security ID MINICUBE MINICUBE2 24 1 5 Notes on Using GHS Compiler 25 1 5 1 Supported version 25 1 5 2 Option added for debugging debug option 25 1 5 3 Cautions on Using DWARF2 Load Module 25 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION 26 2 1 Installing 26 2 2 Uninstalling 26 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 27 3 1 Cautions Before Starting MINICUBE MINICUBE2 27 3 2 Cautions on connecting Midas Lab emulator 28 3 3 Startup Option and Argument Specification 29 3 3 1 Specification method 29 3 3 2 Specification format and options 30 3 4 Starting 31 3 5 Terminating 32 3 6 Error Messages at Start Up 33 3 6 1 When the IECUBE is connected 33 3 6 2 When the N Wire CARD or MINICUBE is connected 34 3 6 3 When the MINICUBE2 is connected 35 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM 36 4 1 Setting Build Mode 36 4 2 Registering Debugger to PM Project 36 4 2 1 Selecting debugger 36 4 2 2 Downloading multiple load module files 37 4 3 To Start ID850QB from PM 38 4 3 1 Restoring debugging environment 38 4 4 Auto Load 39 4 4 1 Auto load by correcting source code 39 4 4 2 Auto load by starting debugger 40 CHAPTER
234. g Time Emulation These items specify the time for writing to and erasing the data flash memory Select the write time Writing Time and erase time Erasing Time from the following Min No retry Typ Typical number of times that is assumed by flash macro specifications default Typ worst Maximum number of times that is assumed by flash macro specifications Max Retries for the maximum times specified 3 EEPROM Library Error Emulation These items set the operation of the EEPROM library function When this checkbox is selected the error value that are not returned in normal emulation can forcibly be returned An address in the data flash memory at which a certain error is to be generated can be specified by selecting the corresponding checkboxes The settable items are as follows All items are not selected by default Generate WordWrite Error Returns error values in WordWrite functions Generate BlockErase Error Returns error values in BlockErase functions Generate BlockIVerify Error Returns error values in BlocklVerify functions Generate BlockBlankCheck Error Returns error values in BlockBlankCheck functions 4 Function buttons OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files 148 User s Manual U18604
235. g address conditions and data conditions as follows Input example Setting of emulator Address 3FF7000 1 gt Address 3FF7000 Data 1 Data 00000010B Mask 11111101B If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits of the same address are accessed therefore an event is detected in accordance with the specified status if the address and bit match the specified value of address bit 4 Address condition setting area This area is used to specify an address condition may be omitted The following can be set Table 6 22 Settable Range of Address Condition Event Connected IE Settable Range IECUBE 0 lt address value lt OxFFFFFFFF MINICUBE 266 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Address Set an address condition lower address higher address may be omitted The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal A symbol can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols The following can be set Setting as a point Set a value to only the lower address or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address Setting as a range Set a value to only the lower address or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address Setting as a bit Set a value to only the lower address or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address Specify a value in the form of
236. g file Match Case Select whether or not to distinguish uppercase and lowercase Specify the type of the file to be searched 342 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW RRM window This is a dedicated window for RAM monitoring The address area in which a value was changed in the RAM area during program execution Is highlighted with a color The display range is 1 KB With reading RAM execution of the user program momentarily breaks On this window the start address of the RAM area can be changed while the user program is being executed Caution All data are not read at the same time because data of 1 KB is divided and read in word units Remark1 This RRM window is opened even when the RAM monitor function is set to OFF in the Extended Option Dialog Box Remark2 The sampling interval is about 0 3 0 7 seconds 20MHz but it depend on the frequency of the CPU operation MINICUBE Figure A 3 RRM Window Address Ox3f 7000 pea eri m Eo Address OSFF OOO OSFFPO10 OSFF O2O OSFFPOSO OSFF O4O OSFFPOSO OSFF O6O OSFFPO O OSFF OSO OSFFPO9O OSFF OAO OSFF ORO OSFF OCN OSFF ODO OSFF OEO OSFFPOFO OSFF 100 OSFF 110 OSFF 120 03FF7130 OSFF 140 03FF7150 03FF7160 03FF7170 Keep Color Specify whether or not to hold the color highlighting Selected Once a value is changed the color highlighting is held until a break occurs Unselected The color is cleared
237. ger 1 This message is displayed if the target system connection cable is disconnected when using the debugger in power off emulation mode when the debugger is activated after the target system power is turned off or when the flash memory contents are erased MINICUBE Af60c During break Target was not turned on Wf60d Because the Source Path had exceeded 8191 characters it rounded it down Wf700 Do you want to download Load Module File Wf701 Do you load symbol information only Wf800 Configuration of Memory Bank is not set Wf801 BANK address must be in target memory Ff802 All events are deleted because the use of external probe was changed Ff803 This event address is invalid on current configuration Ff804 Invalid PC value User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 389 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Ff805 Cannot set temporary break on this address Ff806 External data is being used by Debugger Ff900 Illegal I O port name Ff901 Memory mapping error 1 The specification of the address is illegal Check the addresses that can be specified in the Add O Port Dialog Box Ff902 Illegal access size Ff903 Illegal access type Ff904 There is the same name Wf905 XXX is already exist Do you replace it Wf906 Would you like to register the change made in XXX Ffa00 The XXX function of current program on PC position not found 1 The symbol specified in main label i
238. ger WAAS XX Ke 200X WOO Debugger VRAH KK HK 200X Yo50 Asm Disasm WORX KK WEK 2008 Yapi G2 Executor WAR Tel TK 8 4 88 a GCopyrighttG NEG Electronics Corporation 1993 200 All rights reserved by NEO Electronics Corporation Opening Opening Select Help menu gt About Remark This dialog also be opened by clicking the lt About gt button in the Configuration Dialog Box 284 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Console Window This window is used to input commands that control the ID850QB Because the key bind is Emacs like the accelerator key is not acknowledged if the Console Window is active However the F1 key displays the online help files of the Console Window While the Console Window is open an error message window with only an lt OK gt button is displayed in the Console Window The command history is saved when the Console window is closed Refer to CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE for details on the command specifications Figure 6 69 Console Window loading history file 48 events added Main console display active Tcl18 4 9 Tk 4 9 Debug 495 3 Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Browse menu gt Console Explanation of Each Area Refer to CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE for details on the command specifications User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 285 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Browse Dialog Box This dialog box is u
239. gging Environment Figure 6 6 Extended Option Dialog Box Extended Option Dialog Box Extended Option Trace Timetae Count Rate Memory Size Min re Man W Glear trace memory before run Trace Data Branch PG Access Data ad Mode f Speed Priority C Trace Priority if Complement Data if Add OMA Point Timer Count Rate 1 RAM Monitor Break When Readout Whole C IRAM IOR Off Redraw Interval 500 Sec On Mouse Click f Soft break 0 Hard break We Break Sound W verity Check tear register when reset jf Check monitor overwriting when downloading Cancel Restore Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Option menu gt Extended Option Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 127 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Trace IECUBE This area is used to set about trace refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE when the IECUBE is connected a Timetag Count Rate This area is used to set the division ratio of the counter used for time tag display in the Trace View Window This division ratio is selected from a drop down list If the division ratio is set the number of clocks necessary for counting up the counter displayed for time tag is changed The relationship between the time tag counter division ratio and maximum measurement time Is as follows Table 6 5 Relationship Between Time Tag Counter Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time Time t
240. gher address Setting as arange Seta value to only the lower address or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address Setting as a bit Set a value to only the lower address or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address Specify a value in the form of address bit Mask cannot be set The value of bit which indicates the bit position must be 0 lt bit lt rA Mask Set a mask value for an address value only when Setting as a point may be omitted The address value of a bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1 Example1 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition Address 0x4000 to 0x4000 Mask OxFF Example2 0x4000 0x4001 0x4100 and 0x4101 satisfy the condition Address 0x4000 to 0x4000 Mask 0x101 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 241 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 4 Data condition setting area This area is used to set data conditions may be omitted The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in 2 Access Size Refer to 5 Data condition setting area in the Event Dialog Box Data Set a data value as data conditions The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal A data can be also specified by a symbol Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols Mask Set a mask value for the data value may be omitted When a mask is set the data
241. gramming cannot be executed FOc29 The blank check of flash memory failed FOc2a The erasing of flash memory failed FOc2b The writing of flash memory failed FOc2c The internal verification of flash memory failed FOc2d Failed in writing flash memory FOc2e There is no response from flash macro service FOc2f Response from flash macro service is not right FOc30 Flash I O register operation prohibition setup needs to be canceled FO0c31 STOP mode under continuation Can not compulsory break Please release STOP mode or reset the CPU FOc32 Please write in flash memory in the single chip mode 0 FOc33 Disabling the on chip debug function is prohibited 1 An attempt was made to write 0 to the MSB of the ID code Do not write 0 to the MSB otherwise on chip debugging cannot be performed MINICUBE2 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 371 APPENDIX E MESSAGES FO0c34 Writing to the on chip debug reserved area is prohibited 1 An attempt was made to write an illegal value to the area reserved for on chip debugging Do not write to reserved areas MINICUBE2 2 The program failed to overwrite to a code that branches to the monitor program onto the reset entry code Change the reset entry code to the specified code MINICUBE2 FOc35 Abnormal Internal ROM size The size is different from the default of the device FOc36 Abnormal Internal ROM size The size is different from the default of the device FO
242. h product To understand the instruction functions of the V850 microcontrollers Refer to V850ES Architecture Users Manual U15943E or V850E1 Architecture User s Manual U14559E Data significance Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Note Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Caution Information requiring particular attention Remark Supplementary information Numerical representation Binary XXXX or XXXXB Decimal XXXX Hexadecimal OXXXXX Prefix indicating the power of 2 address space memory capacity K Kilo 2 1024 M Mega 2 1024 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM T7 Related Documents Refer to the documents listed below when using this manual The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions However preliminary versions are not marked as such Documents related to development tools User s Manuals IE V850E1 CD NW PCMCIA Card Type On Chip Debug Emulator U16647E CA850 Ver 2 70 C Compiler Package Operation U16932E Link Directives U16933E CA850 Ver 3 00 C Compiler Package User Open Interface U17663E ENE tOr SM850 Ver 2 00 or Later System Simulator External Part User Open Interface U14873E Specifications RES Ver 20 Real Time OS AXBED Pro Vor 820 Real Time OS 8 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CONTENTS CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 18 1 1 Features 19 1 1 1 New functions enhanced functions 19 1 1 2 Other
243. hat Can Be Uploaded Intel Hex Intel Hex formate Hex Format Hex Format hex Note2 Motorola Hex format re type SO S3 S7 32 bit address Extended Tektronix Hex format Coverage results IECUBE Coverage cvb Note1 Standard 16 bit addresses extension 20 bit addresses and extension linear 32 bit addresses Addresses of 1 MB or more can be uploaded Intel Hex Format Note2 One of the formats can be specified when saving a hex file 46 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 3 Source Display Disassemble Display Function Source file display is performed in the Source Window Disassemble display and line assembly are performed in the Assemble Window This section explains the following items Source display Disassemble display Mixed display mode Source Window Convert symbol symbol to address Remark The locations for which coverage measurement is executed in the user program are displayed in the Source Window and Assemble Window Refer to 5 11 3 Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed 5 3 1 Source display The corresponding text file is displayed in the Source Window by downloading a load module file having debug information The display start position can be changed in the Source Text Move Dialog Box displayed by selecting View menu gt Move Specifications related to the tab size display font etc and specification of the so
244. he peripheral I O has that function 7 Monitor Clock IECUBE This area is used to specify whether the operation clock of the monitor program is switched from the sub clock to the main clock during a break This area does not have to be set with a product without a sub clock System The operation clock is switched to the main clock and the monitor program is executed default Note In the ID850QB the clock is changed by manipulating PCC but not while the main clock is stopped If the operation clock is switched to the main clock during a break the clock is returned to the previous setting when execution returns to the user program User The monitor program is executed with the clock selected by the user program User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 123 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 8 N Wire I F MINICUBE This area is used to select a clock supplied form N Wire CARD or MINICUBE to the on chip debug unit DCU In default a 10 MHz clock is supplied Caution Usually 10 MHz clocks must be selected When a 20 MHz clock is selected the ID850QB may not start operating DCK 10MHz The DCK clock is 10 MHz in default Remark During selection the maximum value of the measurement time of the execution time measurement function is doubled and that of the resolution of the execution time measurement function is reduced by half DCK 20MHz In this case the DCK clock is 20 MHz 9 Target
245. he IECUBE specified range of the coverage data is saved in the file specification of start end addresses not required intel The data is saved in Intel HEX format default motorola The data is saved in Motorola HEX format tektronix The data is saved in Tektronix HEX format force The file is overwritten Usage example IDCON 1 upload b foo hex O Oxffff 332 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE version version Display of the version information Input format version Functions Displays the version of the ID850QB Usage example IDCON 1 version GUI Vx XX XX XXXX 200X Devicefile V850 Device File uPD703201 Vx xx Debugger V850 Debugger Vx xx XX XXXX 200X Executer V850 Executer Vx xx XXX XXXX 200X Monitor V850 Peripheral Vx xx XX XXXX 200X Assembler V850 Asm Disasm Vx xx XX XXXX 200X Tcl Tk 8 4 XX User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 333 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE watch watch Display setting of variables Input format watch options variable value Aliases Ww Functions Displays and sets the variables The following are options binary The value is displayed in binary digits octal The value is displayed in octal digits decimal The value is displayed in decimal digits hexdecimal The value is displayed in hexdecimal digits string The value is displayed in character strings sizeof The si
246. he example events with the event link function do not occur because the second execution event cannot be detected Example when events are set to program in target system OOFFFFE nop 0100000 nop lt 1st execution event 0100002 nop lt 2nd execution event 0100004 nop Access events If the address of an access event satisfies the conditions shown below the second event cannot be detected normally This condition does not apply when the event at the second address is executed again using a branch etc The interval between the first and second instruction is within 4 bytes accessing the internal ROM or internal RAM The interval between the first and second instruction is within 28 bytes target A detailed example for a program and the event setting is shown below If events are set as shown in the example events with the event link function do not occur because the second access event cannot be detected Example when events are set to program in internal ROM 0100 mov 0x1000 gp 0106 Id b Ox10 gp r6 lt 1st access event 010a nop 010c lId b 0x12 gp r7 lt 2nd access event 0110 nop Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 13 RRM Function This section explains the following items related to the RRM function Real time monitor function IECUBE Pseudo real time monitor function Break When Readout 5 13 1 Real time monitor function IECUBE Table 5 19 shows the range of
247. he Project File Load Dialog Box Proj Same function as File menu gt Project gt Open Displays the source text Opens the Source Window Same function as Browse menu gt Source Text Displays the disassemble results Opens the Assemble Window Asm Same function as Browse menu gt Assemble Displays the contents of the memory Opens the Memory Window Mem Same function as Browse menu gt Memory Displays the watch contents Opens the Watch Window a S f B Watch Weh ame function as Browse menu gt Watch 4 Reg Displays the register contents Opens the Register Window Same function as Browse menu gt Register 114 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Hlor Displays the contents of the peripheral I O registers Opens the IOR Window Same function as Browse menu gt I O Register Bl Loc Displays the local variable contents Opens the Local Variable Window Same function as Browse menu gt Local Variable leik Displays the stack trace results Opens the Stack Window Same function as Browse menu gt Stack Trace Trw Displays the trace results Opens the Trace View Window Same function as Browse menu gt Trace IECUBE Displays code coverage measurement results Opens the Code Coverage Window Cov Same function as Browse menu gt Code Coverage IECUBE Opens the Event Manag
248. he mapping unit is 1MB Target Selects the target memory The mapping unit is 1byte Target ROM Selects the target ROM IECUBE I O Protect Selects the I O protect area The I O protect area can be set in the area that is specified in the Target field Since the area set as the I O protect area is displayed with symbol in the Memory Window like unmapped areas read write to this area cannot be performed freely in the Memory Window which protects this area from being erroneously read or writte The mapping unit is 1 byte User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 125 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Mapping Address amp Specify the address to be mapped Chip SelectNote Input the higher and lower addresses from the keyboard IECUBE Since the areas that are specified in the emulation memory are composed of 16 MB 16 banks of 1 MB memory those areas can be allocated to any location in CSO through CS7 with the chip select function Select one from the drop down list Allocation addresses can be allocated to any 1 MB boundary Multiple banks can be assigned to one single CS lt Add gt These buttons are used to set and delete mapping By clicking the lt Add gt button map lt Delete gt ping is set as specified in each area and the result is listed in the area at the bottom of the window To delete a mapped item select the item from the list and click the lt Delete gt button Note In the case of the V850ES
249. he maximum size of RRM was exceeded Wfe01 There is a duplicate RRM address WfeOb It shift to the flash mode Is it completely cleared but is the present event Doesn t it care FfeOc RAM monitor is enabled The present software break points are completely disabled Doesn t it care Fffff Interrupted 390 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX F INDEX A About Dialog Box 284 access monitor 205 Access monitor function 65 Active status and static status 95 Add I O Port Dialog Box 227 Add Watch Dialog Box 193 Address Move Dialog Box 180 Assemble Search Dialog Box 178 Assemble Window 174 AZ850 24 B break breakpoint setting 51 setting break to variable 52 Break Dialog Box 272 break function 50 Browse Dialog Box 286 C CO coverage 78 CA850 24 callback procedure 294 Cautions before starting 27 Change Watch Dialog Box 196 character set 357 clock 123 Code Coverage 78 Code Coverage Window 252 Come Here 57 command 285 Command reference 288 Complement mode 73 Conditional trace 74 Configuration Dialog Box 118 Console Window 285 Contents saved to project file 92 Context menu 105 Coverage Address Dialog Box 255 Coverage Color Dialog Box 257 D Data Flafh Memory 121 Data Flash Option Dialog Box 147 Debug function list 41 Debugger Option Dialog B
250. he new CPU Do you exit the Debugger Wf107 CPU in the Project File was Changed Do you start the Debugger with this CPU Wf108 Selected project file different YYY from chip XXX was opened Does it open although the chip cannot be changed W109 Project Manager cannot be used with the debugger of this version Please use PM W200 No difference encountered Ff201 Memory mapping error 386 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES Ff202 Verify error 1 External memory could not be accessed as it is not set Change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR Window or Hook Procedure before download W203 When a program is running while rewriting a memory program execution stops for a moment Do you wish to rewrite a memory Wf204 There is an enabled software break point Failed in DMM Wf300 Would you like to save the changes made in XXX Ff301 The symbol being used on the event condition can t be evaluated W302 Delete XXX Wf303 XXX is edited Delete YYY Wi304 XXX is edited Save YYY Wf805 XXX is already exist Do you replace it Ff306 This name is too long Ff807 There is the same name in other kinds Ff308 An address can t be omitted Ff309 Illegal address mask Ff30a Illegal data mask Ff30b Illegal ext probe mask Ff30c Illegal ext probe data Ff30d
251. hen data is likely to be missed the real time characteristic of operation in relation to the user program is lost Trace Priority cannot be selected when Branch PC or All PC is selected in d Trace Data f Complement Data Select this checkbox to perform complementary display of trace data default selected g Add DMA Point Select this checkbox to perform the DMA point trace function The checkbox is selected in default When the checkbox is selected the DMA start and end frames are marked 2 Timer IECUBE Set the rate value for the timer counter Count RateThe values set in this area are displayed in Count Rate of the Timer Dialog Box The rate value is selected from a drop down list The relationship between the timer counter division ratio and maximum measurement time is as follows Table 6 7 Relationship Between Timer Count Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time Timer counter Timer Division Ratio Resolution ns ices Si Nii Remark maxo o eme Timer counter 33 bits 130 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 RAM Monitor a Break When Readout Select this item to specify the target range of RAM sampling by instantaneously generating a break in the user program execution Refer to 5 13 2 Pseudo real time monitor function Break When Readout Whole Whole memory space Note Remark The user program execution is stopped for a long time when a large nu
252. iable Window 198 Stack Window 200 Memory Window 203 Memory Search Dialog Box 208 Memory Fill Dialog Box 210 Memory Copy Dialog Box 211 Memory Compare Dialog Box 212 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box 213 DMM Dialog Box 214 Register Window 216 Register Select Dialog Box 219 IOR Window 221 IOR Select Dialog Box 225 Add I O Port Dialog Box 227 Timer Dialog Box 229 Timer Result Dialog Box 232 Trace View Window 234 Trace Search Dialog Box 239 Trace Data Select Dialog Box 243 Trace Move Dialog Box 245 Trace Dialog Box 247 Delay Count Dialog Box 250 Code Coverage Window 252 Coverage Address Dialog Box 255 Coverage Color Dialog Box 257 Software Break Manager 258 Event Manager 260 Event Dialog Box 264 Event Link Dialog Box 269 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 11 Break Dialog Box 272 View File Save Dialog Box 276 View File Load Dialog Box 278 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box 280 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box 281 Reset Debugger Dialog Box 282 Exit Debugger Dialog Box 283 About Dialog Box 284 Console Window 285 Browse Dialog Box 286 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE 288 12 7 1 Command Line Rules 288 7 2 Command List 289 7 3 List of Aliases 291 7 4 List of Variables 291 7 5 List of Packages 292 7 6 Key Bind 292 7 7 Expansion Window
253. iately after startup the help may not open even if the F1 key is pressed In this case open the help by selecting Current Window Help from the Help menu S Do not select Slowmotion from the Run menu during Go amp Go execution Slowmotion on the Run menu is usually dimmed during Go amp Go execution but there is a moment when it can be selected so if Slowmotion is selected at this time the program will not be able to be stopped even if Stop is selected from the Run menu or the STOP button is clicked 5 If for some reason or other the application switches while event icons are in the process of being dragged the icons will no longer be able to be dropped Use the ESC key to escape from drag then reattempt the drag 6 The 400th character and those that follow cannot be displayed if one line in a window contains more than 400 characters ANK characters S Arrays with five dimensions or more are not supported The Search menu of each window is dimmed during program execution Big endian is not supported User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 101 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This chapter explains in detail the functions of the windows and dialog boxes of ID850QB Window List Explanation of Windows 6 1 Window List The list is the windows of the ID850QB Table 6 1 Window List Main Window This window is displayed first when the ID850QB is started It controls execution of the u
254. icking the lt Remove Delete gt button or pressing the Delete key Changing display mode and sorting The display mode of and sorting in the event manager area can be selected by clicking the lt Info gt button Area non display An area can be hidden by clicking the lt Shrink lt lt lt gt button 84 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition Up to 256 conditions can be registered as event conditions or various event conditions One event condition or link event condition can be set for multiple types of events such as break and trace However the number of event conditions that can be simultaneously set enabled is limited as follows Therefore if the valid number is exceeded or if the used event conditions or event link conditions exceed the maximum number that can be used simultaneously it is necessary to disable the set various event conditions once and then register them again Refer to 5 12 5 Managing evenis Table 5 17 Number of Enabled Events for Each Event Condition 7 Connected IE a Break Trace Timer WECUBE 10 a 1 1 7 g MINICUBE a 10 4 c vd 1044 RCU0 TEU TRCU Nx85E901 RCUO RCU1 MINICUBE2 With With debug function function e debug function a 2 before executions usable only for breaks address range not specifiable 8 post execution events 4 when address range is specified because 2 events are used for rang
255. icons in the order of event types Unsort Does not sort icons default Detail Displays the details Overview List display default Context Menu Sort By Name Displays icons in the order of event names Sort By Kind Displays icons in the order of event types Unsort Does not sort icons default Detail Displays the details Overview List display default Source Text Assemble Displays the corresponding source text and source line using the position of the selected event as the jump destination address Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function If no line information exists at the jump destination address however you cannot jump Opens the Source Window If an active Source Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Displays the Assemble window from the position of the selected event which is used as the jump destination address Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Assemble Window If an active Assemble Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Memory Displays the memory contents from the position of the selected event which is used as the jump destination address Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Memory Window If an active Memory Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 263 CHAPTER 6 WINDO
256. ics products or if you have any other inquiries Note 1 Renesas Electronics as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority owned subsidiaries Note 2 Renesas Electronics product s means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics CENESAS User s Manual ID850QB Ver 3 40 Integrated Debugger Operation Target Device V850 Microcontrollers Document No U18604EJ1VOUMOO 1st edition Date Published March 2007 CP K NEC Electronics Corporation 2007 Printed in Japan MEMO 2 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM IECUBE is a registered trademark of NEC Electronics Corporation in Japan and Germany MINICUBE is a registered trademark of NEC Electronics Corporation in Japan and Germany or a trademark in the United States of America Windows is a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation MULTI is a trademark of Green Hills Software Inc Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 3 e The information in this document is current as of March 2007 The information is subject to change without notice For actual design in refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books etc for the most up to date specifications of NEC Electronics products Not all products and or types are available in every country Please check wi
257. ified is disabled enable The breakpoint whose number is specified is enabled User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 301 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Usage example IDCON 1 breakpoint main ma OOO IDCON 2 breakpoint i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon c 17 IDCON 3 breakpoint software sub 2 IDCON 4 breakpoint i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon c 17 2 Brk00001 enable rammon c 8 IDCON 5 breakpoint disable 2 IDCON 6 breakpoint i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon c 17 2 Brk00001 disable rammon c 8 IDCON 7 breakpoint delete 1 2 Brk00001 disable rammon c 8 302 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE cache MINICUBE cache Setting of cache Input format cache cache config icache itype dcache dtype cache clear icache bool dcache bool Functions When config is specified for the subcommanad the cache type is set When clear is specified for the subcommand whether cache clear is to be done by EXEC or not is set default is clear When subcommand or below is omitted the current status is displayed itype is selected from the following NB85E212 NB85E212 is used NB85E213 NB85E213 is used nouse Not used default dtype is selected from the following NB85E252 NB85E252 is used NB85E263 NB85E263 is used nouse Not used default bool is selected from the following 0 false or off Off 1 true or on On
258. ilability Flash Function Functional Outline and Restriction of Emulation Type1 V850ES Sx2 V850ES Fx2 V850E RS1 V850E IA4 u PD70F3229Y V850ES Hx2 V850ES Jx2 FlashEnv Flash environment initialization end function Emulated FlashBlockErase One block erasure function Emulated FlashWordWrite One word writing function Restriction Restriction If an address in the guard area is specified as the third argument a fail safe break occurs at an unexpected address FlashBlockl Verify One block internal verify processing function Emulated FlashBlockBlankCheck One block blank check function Emulated Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 141 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Availability Flash Function Functional Outline and Restriction of Emulation FlashGetInfo Flash information acquisition function Option 2 CPU number and total number of blocks held by CPU Restriction The device name four digit number set in the Con figuration dialog box is returned as the CPU number Option 3 Security information Emulated Option 4 Acquisition of boot area swapping information Restriction Restriction Boot area swapping information is not reflected Option 5 Acquisition of last address of block Emulated Block number FlashSetInfo Flash information setting function Restriction Restriction The boot area swapping setting is ignored Function for checking operation status of flash function that was exe cuted most recently Restriction
259. imal numbers Oct Displays in octal numbers Bin Displays in binary numbers String Displays as a character string Show Variable Type Select the display non display of variable type is specified On Displays the type of a variable Off Does not display the type of a variable default Language Select the display non display of type of variable is specified C Displays a C like base number default ASM Cannot be selected 14 Function buttons OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the changings and closes this dialog box Restore Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 155 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Project File Save Dialog Box This dialog box is used to save the current debugging environment to a project file Refer to 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file Project files can be newly saved or saved under an existing file name in this dialog box Opening Figure 6 14 Project File Save Dialog Box Save in E signal_editor c Ea E signal_editor prj 2 Save as type Project prj ba Cancel Help Explanation of Each Area Opening Select File menu gt Project gt Save As To save a file of same name as a project file previously loaded or saved select File menu gt Project gt Save Explanation of Each Area
260. ime of the RRM Function even during user program execution Remark2 Timer event condition setting enable disable delete operations are possible even during user pro gram execution Figure 6 46 Timer Dialog Box Se J Reste cese ee Timer Mame Ti Tmro0001 Add Event Start Event End Event Pass 1 timets Add Link Total 11200 nsec ASE 1 Average 11200 nsec Mane 11200 nsec Time Gount Rate Mlin 11200 nsec nsec ell Initialize Copy view Always Time Out Break 3 C OFF Overflow 0 hour 0 min O sec 0 msec O usec O nsec Event Manager 4 Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Click the Tim button or select Event gt Timer on the menu User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 229 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Timer event condition setting area Timer Name This area is used to set a timer event name Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name To display the contents of an already created event condition select from the drop down list To display from user program execution until break specify Run Break Refer to 5 9 2 Run Break event The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events Refer to Table 5 18 Event lcon The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet By clicking
261. imize risks of damage to property or injury including death to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design such as redundancy fire containment and anti failure features e NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades Standard Special and Specific The Specific quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer designated quality assurance program for a specific application The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade as indicated below Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application Standard Computers office equipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots Special Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems life support systems and medical equipment for life support etc The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is Standard unless otherwise expressly spe
262. in is high gt Make the FLMDO pin low The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code bit 7 of address 0x79 is O gt Erase the internal flash memory once Ff605 Please check connection with the target board 1 Check the connection of the target connector TC If a target system is not connected review the Target setting in the Configuration Dialog Box Ff606 Please check connection with the target board and power on it 1 Check the target system power supply If a target system is not connected review the Target setting in the Configuration Dialog Box W607 Please check connection of the exchange adapter 1 Check the connection of the exchange adapter EA Recommend wearing of the exchange adapter if the target system is not connected Ff608 Please disconnect the target board 1 A current may flow from the internal power supply to the target system Disconnect the target system connector TC from the conversion adapter EA Review the setting in the Configuration Dialog Box if the target system is not connected Ff609 Please power off the target board and disconnect it Af60a Incorrect ID Code Flash memory was erased Abort the debugger 1 This message is displayed if ID authentication address 0x84 results in failure when the mode to erase the flash memory contents has been set and the flash memory contents are erased MINICUBE Af60b Disabled ID Code Flash memory was erased Abort the debug
263. indow select View menu gt Change Watch Explanation of Each Area 1 Watch data change area Name This area is used to change a symbol name on a line selected in the Watch Window Refer to Table 6 14 Watch Window Input Format The symbol name can be changed even if it results in duplication of a name already in use with existing data In the default condition the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed Up to 16 input histories can be recorded lt Add gt Cannot be selected 196 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Display form change area Radix This area is used to change the display radix on a line selected in the Watch Window Proper Variable Displays the default value of each variable Symbol Displays data with the radix set in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Hex Displays in hexadecimal numbers Dec Displays in decimal numbers Oct Displays in octal numbers Bin Displays in binary numbers size This area is used to change the display size on a line selected in the Watch Window If the display size is fixed such as when a variable in C language or register is to be displayed it cannot be changed Adaptive Variable Displays the default value of each variable Symbol Displays data with the size set in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Byte Displays in 8 bit units Half Word Display
264. ine The machine by which the target OS operates Caution When N Wire CARD is connected because it is assumed that the IECUBE is used with a notebook PC the host machine must have a PC card slot TYPEII 2 In circuit emulator IECUBE QB V850Exxxx N Wire CARD IE V850E1 CD NW MINICUBE QB V850MINI MINICUBE2 QB MINI2 RTE 2000H TP PG2 IE 1 3 2 Software environment 1 OS any of the following Windows 2000 Windows XP Home Edition Professional Caution Regardless of which of the OS above is used we recommend that the latest Service Pack is installed 2 Device file Individual acquisition The device file of the target device to be used Remark _ This file is available from the following Web site of NEC Electronics Version up Service http www necel com micro ods eng User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 23 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 3 Supported tools manufactured by NEC Electronics C compiler package CA850 Version 3 10 or later Project manager PM Version 6 10 or later System performance analyzer AZ850 Version 3 30 or later Performance tuning tool TW850 Version 2 10 or later 1 4 Cautions During Debugging The cautions to be observed during debugging are described below When performing source level debugging Security ID MINICUBE MINICUBE2 1 4 1 When performing source level debugging The object file for which source level debugging is performed must include
265. ing mapping 43 Software Break Manager 258 Source Search Dialog Box 170 Source Text Move Dialog Box 172 Source Window 165 Stack trace display function 63 Stack Window 200 Start From Here 57 Startup option 29 Startup Routine 154 Status bar 116 Symbol To Address Dialog Box 181 T Target 43 Target ROM 43 Tel assemble 299 batch 300 breakpoint 301 cache 303 dbgexit 304 dbgopt 305 download 306 efconfig 307 erase 309 extwin 310 finish 311 flop 312 go 313 help 314 hook 315 le 316 inspect 317 jump 318 map 319 mdi 321 memory 322 module 323 next 324 refresh 325 register 326 reset 327 U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX F INDEX run 328 step 329 stop 330 tkcon 331 upload 332 version 333 watch 334 where 335 wish 336 xcoverage 337 xtime 338 xtrace 339 Tcl command list 289 Timer Dialog Box 229 Timer function 69 Timer Result Dialog Box 232 Trace complement 73 Trace Data Select Dialog Box 243 Trace Dialog Box 247 Trace function 72 trace memory 72 Trace Move Dialog Box 245 Trace Result with Linking Window 98 Trace Search Dialog Box 239 Tracer control mode 75 TW850 24 Types of Messages 367 U Unconditional trace 74 Uninstalling 26 upload
266. inter on which the cursor is put The Window to which the jump is made is displayed on the jump pointer Source Window Assemble Window Memory Window You can jump among the above windows or from the Trace View Window Stack Window Event Manager and Register Window to the above windows 1 Jump method The jump method is as follows 1 Move the cursor to the line or address that is to be used as the jump pointer on the window from which jumping is possible select an event icon on the Event Manager 2 Select the following menu item to which execution is to jump from the Jump menu Caution If a program code does not exist on the line at the cursor position the first address of the line with a program code above or below that line is used as the jump pointer 2 Details of jump source address The details of jump source address is as follows Table 5 23 Details of Jump Source Address Target Window Window Details of petals of ump Pointer Pointer From the Register Registers selected Window From the Memory Address at the cursor position Window From the Event Manager Ifthe selected event icon is that of an event condition an address condition is used as the jump pointer If the address condition is set in point Jump to specified address If the address condition is set in range Jump to lower address point address before the mask if a mask Is specified If the address condition is set in bit Jump to ad
267. ion Access monitor Pseudo RM DMM Emulation memory option Hardware break Software break Event Event link Timer event Trace event Run Break timer O1 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 35 APPENDIX B ADDITIONAL CAUTIONS Sionaasieowiews OO fianwetcomws OR speyereveson E Measurement of trace time tag resolution and 20 ns 1 4 min 100ns maximum time 97 6 hr 4K division Time tag of the oldest Displays the total Clears the time tag to 0 frame is cleared to 0 Not when execution starts the accumulated time from execution start Run Break timer 20ns 2 8 min 20ns 6 1h Measurement of resolution and maximum time 195 2 hr 4K division 356 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS Usable Character Set Symbols Numeric Values Expressions and Operators File Names C 1 Usable Character Set Table C 1 List of Character Set Glassification pC haracter Alphabetic characters Uppercase ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Lowercase abcdefghijklmnopgqrstuvwxyz acc Character equivalent to alphabetic _ character Table C 2 List of Special Characters O fme seen ooeaororeoesn aaea Ooo eame forame E irena orpoa ooeaor oraeson OO O oea ieernaneroprrbtesionsposin o oom pomeriam O User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 357 APPENDIX C INPUT CONVENTIONS ed Left bracket Array subscript operator or base register specification symbol C 2 Symbols 1 A symbol is composed of eith
268. ion of script file and project file XXXxx exe Script c work script tcl c work project pr Example3 Specification when there are spaces in the path XXxxx exe Script c work folder script tc c work folder project prj 30 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3 4 Starting 1 Start ID850QB from the Start menu of PM or by clicking the shortcut created on the desktop Refer to 4 3 To Start ID850QB from PM when starting from PM Start the ID850QB the Configuration Dialog Box will be opened Caution In this case the Configuration Dialog Box should not be displayed but an error message should be displayed please cope with it with reference to 3 6 Error Messages at Start Up Figure 3 3 Configuration Dialog Box Configuration Clock 70F3380 Main OSC MHe Internal Memory Multiply rate er ROM 51 as gt KBytes z Project Sub OSC KH2 32768 3 About RAM Edi 32768 Data Flash 32 v KBytes Gods Hp M Use Data Flash cso x Programmable I O Area Start Address Peripheral Break Monitor Clock Target Fail safe Break C Break System C Connect Non Break C User f Not Connect Mask M NMO M NMN M NME RESET STOP war Fi T z Memory Mapping Access Sie 8Bit C 16Bit C 32Bit d Memory Attribute Mapping Address amp Chip Select Delete Target x _ 2 Set the items related to the operating envir
269. ion setting area in each The text of the dropped line number or address Is set in the area in various event setting dialog box which the line number or address has been dropped address and data setting areas The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name offset value Table 5 25 Details of Drag amp Drop Function Character String Window Area to Drop to Operation After Drop The Event Manager or If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an address value an event the event manager area condition in the R W status or Execute status is automatically created using the in each various event converted address value as an address condition setting dialog box Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001 Evt00002 and so on A data condition and path count are not specified The address condition is set by the dropped text The relationship between the event condition to be created and the symbol is as follows embod User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 99 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Window Area to Drop to Operation After Drop Condition setting area in If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an address value an event each various event condition in the R W status or Execute status is automatically created using the setting dialog box other converted address value as an address condition than address and data The automatically created event condition is set in each
270. ions 1 Specification format XXXXX exe options XXXXx exe 7options project Each option and argument is separated by a space The case is distinguished in the character string Arguments enclosed between can be omitted When a project file is specified that project file is read at startup However during PM startup the project file specification is ignored When there are spaces in the file names and paths specify the project file names and script file names enclosed in double quotation marks Refer to Example3 Specification when there are spaces in the path Remark The emulator currently being connected is automatically detected by the automatic emulator detect function when a debugger execution program is started The user therefore does not need to select the debugger execution program according to the emulator to be connected When using a Midas Lab emulator specify it using the startup option Table 3 1 Startup Options 2 Specification options The following options can be specified Table 3 1 Startup Options isc Change background color of window to system color Change background color of window to system color script script file name Specify the script file to be executed at startup ICE RTE EXEC EX850G32RTE Specify N EXEC for Midas Lab 3 Specification example Example1 Specification of script file only XXxxx exe SCript c work script tcl Example2 Specificat
271. ished The read only SFRs cannot be specified IORThis area is used to specify the data to be written to the register specified in IOR Name 3 Function buttons Set Writes the data in accordance with a given condition Close Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 215 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Register Window This window is used to display and change registers program register system register Refer to 5 8 Register Manipulation Function Other operations using Context Menu Function buttons etc can be performed in this window Each area in this window are the jump pointer of the Jump function Caution The ECR register value cannot be changed and the DBPC and DBPSW registers cannot be used in the Register window Figure 6 41 Register Window Fi Register OOOO00SC8 Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu Register Window dedicated items Context Menu Opening A Click the Reg button or select Browse menu gt Register 216 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Register value display change area The left area displays register names and the right area displays register values Register values are changed through direct input The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the
272. isplay change area Name This area displays the names of peripheral I O registers and I O ports If the value of an I O port address is not defined the I O port name displayed in light color Attribute This area displays the attributes of peripheral I O registers and I O ports This area displays the read write attributes access types and displays and absolute addresses from the left side When the bit peripheral I O registers is displayed bit offset value is also displayed It can be specified whether this area is displayed or not by selecting View menu gt Attribute Read Write Attribute R Read only W Write only R W Read write j Register that is read via an emulation register to prevent the device from operating when this register is read To read this attribute directly from a peripheral I O registers execute View menu gt Compulsion Read Even a write only peripheral I O registers can also be read via an emulation register However some devices do not support this function Access Type 1 Can be accessed in Bit units 8 Can be accessed in Byte units 16 Can be accessed in Half Word units 32 Can be accessed in Word units 222 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Value This area is used to display and change the contents of a peripheral I O registers and I O port Values are changed through direct input The location to be changed
273. k Does not sort File Line Symbol Offset Address Sorts the character strings in alphabetic order ascending descending order Sorts the addresses based on higher lower ascending descending order 3 Function buttons Enable Enables the selected event Disable Disables the selected event Delete Deletes the selected event Delete All Deletes all the set software break events Close Closes this window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 259 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Event Manager This window is used to manage event conditions This window allows display enabling disabling and deletion of the Various Event Conditions Refer to 5 12 Event Function Other operations using Context Menu Function button etc can be performed in this window The event icon is the jump pointer of the Jump function Figure 6 58 Event Manager In Detailed Display Mode a Event Manager Me Mew Open Enable Delete Delete All Info Close EvtQ0001 SJE Alest c 23 0x1 a52 M Os00000000 EvtQ0002 SJE Altest c 15 0x1 456 M Os00000000 1 EE vtoo002 SJEK Altest c f1 6 0x1 a36 MJOx00000000 EJE vt00003 PIE vt00001 P2 E 100002 PIE 100003 Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu Event manager dedicated items Context Menu Opening 5 Click the Mgr button or select Event menu gt Event Manager Explanation of Each Area 1 Event
274. kl Verify One block internal verify processing function Emulated FlashBlock One block blank check function Emulated BlankCheck FlashGetInfo Flash information acquisition function Option 2 CPU number and total number of blocks held by CPU Restriction Restriction The device file name four digit number is returned as the CPU number Option 3 Security information Emulated Option 4 Acquisition of boot area swapping information Restriction Restriction Boot area swapping information is not reflected Option 5 Acquisition of last address of block Emulated Block number FlashSetinfo Flash information setting function Restriction The boot area swapping setting is ignored FlashBootSwap Boot area block swapping function Not emulated Emulated Restriction Restriction FlashFLMDCheck FLMDO pin status check function FlashWordRead Data reading function Restriction Restriction If an address in the guard area is specified as the third argument a fail safe break occurs at an unexpected address FlashlVerify Internal verify function for EEPROM Not emulated FlashBlankCheck Blank check function for EEPROM Not emulated izati ion ot EEPROM_lInit EEPROM area initialization function for EEPROM N emulated EEPROM_Write EEPROM write function for EEPROM Not emulated User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 143 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Availability Flash Function Functional Outline an
275. l Help F 4 Link Name m LnkOOOW Add Evert Phase i p Phase n Phase 3 Phase 4 One 3 1 Disable Pass Gount shrink lt lt lt Event Manager EEan 2 Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening In normal mode If the Event Link Dialog Box is opened as follows an event link condition can be registered without its purpose being specified Select Event menu gt Event Link In select mode If the lt OK gt button is pressed when the Event Link Dialog Box has been opened as follows an event link condition can be registered in the setting dialog box from which this dialog box was opened In each various event setting dialog box click the lt Add Link gt button the setting dialog box from which the Event Link Dialog Box was opened is displayed on the title bar User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 269 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Event link condition setting area Link Name Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name To display the contents of an already created event link condition select from the drop down list In the select mode the selected event condition can be set in the event link condition setting area of the setting dialog box that called the Event Link Dialog Box The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of event link conditions Table 5 18 Event Icon The mark L
276. l numbers Dec Displays in decimal numbers Oct Displays in octal numbers Bin Displays in binary numbers String Displays as a character string User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 191 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Display size selection area jadantive This area is used to select the display size If the display size is fixed such as when a variable in C language or register is to be displayed it cannot be changed Adaptive Variable Displays the default value of each variable Symbol Displays data with the size set in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Byte Displays in 8 bit units Half Word Displays in 16 bit units Word Displays in 32 bit units 2 Watch data specification area Name This area is used to specify the watch data to be displayed In the default condition the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed As necessary the character string displayed can be changed Up to 16 input histories can be recorded If the contents of this area have been changed the data specified can be displayed in the field below by clicking the lt View gt button Number This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed blank or a number of 1 to 256 If this area is blank data is displayed as a simple variable If a number of 1 or more is specified data is displayed as an array variable in the Watch Window If an array variable is displayed
277. lash memory writing function MINICUBE MINICUBE2 The internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded by the same access method as an ordinary memory operation Refer to 5 7 4 Flash memory writing function MINICUBE MINICUBE2 4 Security function MINICUBE MINICUBE2 The ID code stored in the internal ROM or internal flash memory of a product with a security unit can be authenticated Refer to 5 ID Code MINICUBE MINICUBE2 in the Configuration Dialog Box 5 Function expansion through Tcl The batch processing and hook processing and the creation of original user custom windows are possible using the command line with Tcl Tk Tool Command Language Refer to CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW The latest Tcl Tk core 8 4 12 and new console are supported 6 Function expansion through TIP or ToolLink By associating with a task debugger RD and system performance analyzer AZ supporting TIP Tool Interface Protocol or ToolLink the debugging efficiency of the user program using a real time OS RX can be dramatically improved 20 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 2 System Configuration The ID850QB can be connected to the following three types of emulators User programs developed for the V850 microcontrollers and a pleasant debugging environment for target systems are provided 1 IECUBE IECUBE can be manipulated from the ID850QB by
278. le However event conditions and event link conditions cannot be enabled or disabled Same operation as the clicking the mark of event icon Remove Deletes the selected event When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted an error occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the event is used as a various event condition Delete All Deletes all event conditions Info Opens the Event Info Dialog Box This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event names Event In X lt Sort by Name gt Sorts events into name order oe lt Sort by Kind gt Sorts events into type order SIS ONS nsn Displays events in the order in which they have Sort by Kind been registered without sorting the events T lt Detail gt 00 Sets the detailed display mode Unsort lt OVEIVIEWS gt 664 Sets the list display mode tell lt Cancel gt 0 Closes this dialog box same as ESC key Overview Cancel Close Closes this dialog box 262 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View Menu Event manager dedicated items The following items are added in the View menu when the Event Manager is active Select All Event Selects all the registered events Delete Event Sort By Name Deletes a selected event Displays icons in the order of event names Sort By Kind Displays
279. lected from the Display list to No Display lt lt Show All Moves all registers to Display Hide All gt gt Moves all registers to No Display Arrange The following buttons are used to change the display sequence in Display If the display arrangement is changed multiple lines cannot be selected Select one line at a time Top Moves the selected register to the top of the list Up Moves the selected register one line up Down Moves the selected register one line down Bottom Moves the selected register to the bottom of the list No Display Registers not displayed in the IOR Window 2 Display order change buttons Sort by The following buttons are used to change the display sequence in No Display Name Displays in alphabetical order Address Displays in address order 3 Function buttons OK Reflects the selection in this dialog box in the IOR Window and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files 226 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Add I O Port Dialog Box This dialog box is used to register an I O port to be added to the IOR Window Refer to 5 8 Register Manipulation Function Figure 6 45 Add I O Port Dialog Box Add O Port LO Port List PE Hame Po Address 2 Canc
280. led Execution exits from function 3 func01 l t 4 func01 5 func01 6 func01 If return execution that generates the stack is performed when functions are called in the order of 2 3 4 5 and 6 the address moves the position at which processing 6 is completed If return execution which deletes the stack is performed when execution exits from functions 6 5 4 3 and 2 in that order execution correctly returns to the main function from 5 to 4 from 3 to 2 and so on 4 Assembler instructions enclosed by pragma asm and pragma endasm can be executed step wise 5 6 in the source mode The instructions written ina _asm statement cannot be executed If step wise execution is performed in the source mode it is judged whether an interrupt is serviced based on the NP EP and ID flags of the PSW register If the above flags or registers have been changed because nesting is used return execution and stack display may not be correctly executed The static functions described in the header file cannot be stepped into by step wise execution An include statement cannot be stepped into nor can breakpoints be set 7 An NMI and other interrupts are not acknowledged during step wise execution 8 Inthe conditional statement of an if else statement a line that should not be executed may be passed When such a case occurs select the mixed display mode in the Source window and confirm that
281. licking this icon has the addresses sorted in ascending numerical order Copy Copies the selected address to the clipboard Jump to Source Jumps from the address in the selected line to the identical address displayed in the Source Window Jump to Assemble Jumps from the address in the selected line to the identical address displayed in the Assemble Window Jump to Memory Jumps from the address in the selected line to the identical address displayed in the Memory Window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 349 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW Run Break Time window This window displays two types of time Time at which the user program starts running Run and time at which the user program breaks Break The window is helpful when measuring takes a long time The Windows timer function is utilized for this window the time is displayed in hours minutes and seconds Figure A 8 RunBreakTime Window RunBreakTime DBR E 004 04 20 l 42 54 Break 2004 04 20 16 42 58 lt Clear gt button _ Clears the time display the time _ Clears the time display 350 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW OpenBreak window The open break function is used to set the pins which control a motor to Hi Z so as to stop the motor safely if the motor control signal is not fed back due to CPU stoppage and it may have an adverse effect on the motor For whether the open break function is supported by the emulator used refer to the user
282. lidates the coverage measurement range selected Cancel Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files 256 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage Color Dialog Box lIECUBE This dialog box is used to select the color to distinguish the coverage of executed code displayed in the Source Window and Assemble Window refer to 5 11 3 Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed Figure 6 56 Coverage Color Dialog Box Coverage Color 1 17 99 Change 100 2 i OK Default Cancel Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Click the lt Color gt button in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Explanation of Each Area 1 0 1 99 100 The current settings colors for coverage 0 1 to 99 and 100 are displayed The color for coverage 0 1 to 99 and 100 can be selected by clicking the lt Change gt button A Windows standard color setting dialog box is used for color specification 2 Function buttons OK Applies the settings to the Source Window or Assemble Window and closes this dialog box Default Restores the default color for coverage Cancel Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 25 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Software Break Manager This window is used to display enable or disable and delete software breaks Re
283. lts of search is highlighted in the Memory Window The display start position can be changed in the Address Move Dialog Box displayed by selecting View menu gt Move The variables and data allocated to the sampling range can be displayed in real time even during program execution Refer to 5 13 RRM Function 64 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 7 2 Access monitor function IECUBE The access monitor function displays the access status read write read amp write for the sampling range of the The RRM Function using different colors in the Memory Window The access monitor view is available only when Byte is selected for the display units Colors are not displayed in the ASCII display area Cumulative display setting and access status display can be cleared by selecting View menu gt Access Monitoring Caution1 The value of memory rewritten via DMA during program execution and the value of memory rewrit ten from the debugger cannot be displayed on the access monitor Caution2 This function is enabled only when Option menu gt RRM Function is selected Figure 5 14 Access Monitor Function Memory Window Memory Eek Search af 3 Addr 0 1 2 3 O3FFBO00 00 Of USPPBOLO OO JOSFFRO 2 ORI ID3FFE030i00 03FFE0 40i JO3FFBoOSo Oo OSFFR06 Of JOSFFBO7O 00 OSFFBRO8 OMe OSFFRBOSOWOO O3FFBOAO0I OSFFBROBROIOO JO3PEBOC ORM JOSFRPBODO OO jJO3FFBOEORE OSFFRBOFOI
284. lue of each variable Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option Dialog Box default Byte Displays the selected line in 8 bit units Half Word Displays the selected line in 16 bit units Word Displays the selected line in 32 bit units Adaptive Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable default Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language Symbols in assembly language are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option Dialog Box Up Moves the selected line one line up Down Moves the selected line one line down 190 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Quick Watch Dialog Box This dialog box is used to temporarily display or change specified watch data Refer to 5 6 Watch Function Figure 6 28 Quick Watch Dialog Box Quick Watch Symbol name display area Data value display setting area Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Source Window or Assemble Window ts the current window select View menu gt Quick Watch or click the lt Quick gt button in same window Explanation of Each Area 1 Display form specification area Display radix selection This area is used to select the display radix are Proper Variable Displays the default value of each variable Symbol Displays data with the radix set in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Hex Displays in hexadecima
285. m the PM 1 Create a new workspace project file e g sample prj on the PM Noete 2 Start the ID850QB from the PM Because a new project file is created set items other than the device type chip name in the Configuration Dialog Box in the same manner as when only the ID850QB is started 3 Download the load module file to be debugged with the Download Dialog Box of the ID850QB 4 Debug the load module file on the ID850QB 5 Click the lt Yes gt button on the Exit Debugger Dialog Box when the ID850QB is terminated gt The debugging environment will be saved to the project file sample prj for the PM when the ID850QB is terminated the debug environment can also be saved to the sample prj file by overwriting the project file at times other than the completion of ID850QB debugging 6 When the ID850QB is next started up after the sample prj file is read by PM the debug environment at the point when the project file was saved is automatically restored Note In the ID850QB and PM the environment information is saved to a project file and referenced The extension of the project file that can be used by the ID850QB and PM is prj For the infor mation that is saved or restored by the project file refer to the User s manual of each product 38 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM 4 4 Auto Load If a bug is found while the load module file is being debugged by the ID850QB correct the source file
286. mber of windows are opened because the range from which memory is read out is wid IRAM IOR Internal RAM area and IOR area Off Disables the Pseudo real time monitor function Break When Readout default Note The range specified in the RRM Setting Dialog Box is excluded b Redraw Interval Specify the sampling time ms of the RAM sampling It can be specified in 100 ms units from 0 to 65500 If O is specified or if this area is blank the data is not displayed in real time 4 On Mouse Click This area is used to select whether a software breakpoint or hardware breakpoint is set as the default breakpoint if a breakpoint is set in the point mark area by clicking the mouse button in the Source Window or Assemble Window refer to 5 4 2 Breakpoint setting Soft break Sets a software breakpoint Hard break Sets a hardware breakpoint 5 Break Sound If the checkbox is selected a beep sound is issued when a break occurs 6 Verify Check This area is used to specify whether a verify check is performed when data has been written to memory A verify check is performed when download memory fill or memory copy is executed A verify check is also performed when a variable or data is changed in the Watch Window or Memory Window and is written to memory Caution During write to the internal flash memory including download verify check is not performed whether or not the checkbox
287. memory cannot be cancelled when it is in progress Caution3 If the Execute Symbol Reset after Download check box is selected in the Debugger Settings dia log box of PM when downloading data from PM to the on chip flash memory the data in the flash memory will be erased before downloading data Remark With the ID850QB the remaining area contents after the load module was downloaded to the inter nal flash memory are erased 66 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 8 Register Manipulation Function This section explains the following items related to the register manipulation function Displaying and changing register contents Displaying and changing peripheral I O registers contents Displaying and changing I O port contents 5 8 1 Displaying and changing register contents Register contents can be displayed and changed in the Register Window Register name display switching absolute name function name can be done in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Remark The display register is selected in the Register Select Dialog Box Figure 5 15 Absolute Name Function Name Switching Dis Assemble show Offset Label w Mnemonic Register Name of Function Name C Absolute Name Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 67 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 8 2 Displaying and changing peripheral I O registers contents The peripheral I O registers contents can be displayed and changed in the IOR Window The display s
288. menu 0 10 Help menu 1 File menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Open Loads a view file source file or text file Opens the View File Load Dialog Box The operation differs depending on the extension of the file selected in the dialog box Save As Saves the contents displayed on the current window to the file whose name is specified Opens the View File Save Dialog Box Close Closes the current window Download Downloads a file Opens the Download Dialog Box Load Module Lists the names of the files that have been downloaded Opens the Load Module List Dialog Box Upload Uploads a program Opens the Upload Dialog Box Project Manipulates a project file Open Opens a project file Opens the Project File Load Dialog Box Save Overwrites the current status to the project file currently being read to the ID850QB Save As Saves the current status to a specified project file Opens the Project File Save Dialog Box Environment Manipulates a setting file Debugger Reset Exit Open file Open Opens a setting file Opens the Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box Save As Saves the setting in the current window to the setting file Opens the Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box Initializes the CPU symbols and ID850QB Opens the Reset Debugger Dialog Box Terminate the ID850QB Refer to 3 5 Terminating Ope
289. microcontrollers the allocation of chip selection is fixed or no chip selection functions are provided no selection can be made No selections can be made if the option board is not installed when the IECUBE is connected Caution1 The area set as I O Protect is not read unless it is registered to the IOR Window or Watch Window as an I O port To read this area forcibly read it on these windows Caution2 Ifthe external memory is mapped change the value of a register required for access of an external memory Refer to 5 1 4 To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory 14 Function buttons OK Validates the current environment Sets the environment and closes this dialog box If an error occurs after clicking the lt OK gt button the ID850QB can no longer continue and is terminated Cancel Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box Restore Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened Project Opens the Project File Load Dialog Box If an error occurs while a project file is being opened or read the ID850QB can no longer continue and is terminated About Opens the About Dialog Box Help Displays the help window of this window 126 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Extended Option Dialog Box This dialog box is used to display and set the extended options of the ID850QB Refer to 5 1 Setting Debu
290. mm mm om eS om a Se mmn mmr mmm m mm Se am Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu Memory Window dedicated items Context Menu Opening Al click the Mem button or select Browse menu gt Memory Explanation of Each Area 1 Addr This area displays memory addresses An arbitrary address can be selected by clicking the relevant line in this area The selected address is highlighted 204 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 0 1 2 This area is used to display and change memory contents and to display the access status Refer to 5 7 2 Access monitor function ECUBE Symbol Substituted When Display Display Information is Saved Meaning in View File od Green R Read m Red W Write m Blue A Read amp write oo No highlight color None Out of measurement range Memory contents are changed through direct input The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key Up to 256 bytes can be specified at one time Remark To change the memory contents during user program execution open the DMM Dialog Box by clicking the lt DMM gt button 3 0123 This area is used to display and change the memory contents in ASCII characters This area is displayed whe
291. mory Window in active is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Opens a new window displaying the same contents as those of the current window This menu is valid only when the current window is Source Window Assemble Window or Memory Window Cascade Cascade display of the windows in the Main window Tile Cascade display of the windows in the Main window Arrange Icons Rearranges the icons in the Main window Close All Closes all windows except the Main window Refresh Updates the contents of the window with the latest data Active Sets the window in the active status Static Sets the window in the static status Open Window 10 Help menu ID850QB Help Lists the windows that are open The window with the check mark shown on the side of the figure is the current window By selecting a window name the selected window is used as the current window Displays the help Command Reference Main Window Current Window About Opens the Help window of COMMAND REFERENCE Displays the help of the Main window Displays the help of the current window Displays the version of the ID850QB Opens the About Dialog Box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 113 Tool bar CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 1 Meaning of each button 2 Operation of tool bar 1 Meaning of each button The meaning of each button on the toolbar is as follow
292. mory using the IOR Window or Hook Procedure before download FO2a0 Bus hold error 1 CPU is in the bus hold status Reset the debugger FO2a2 Can not compulsory break 368 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES FO2a3 Reset under continuation 1 This error occurs when the RESET pin of MINICUBE2 does not become high level after reset release The following cause is assumed MINICUBE2 There is a problem in connection with the target system RESET FO2d2 Not enough memory for trace buffer FO300 User program is running FO301 User program is being breaked FO302 User program is being traced FO303 Not traced F0304 Trace memory is not set FO306 No trace block exists F0307 No event condition exists FF0308 No timer measurement is done F0309 No trigger frame exists FO3Qa Tracer is being stopped FO30b Specified snap event has not been registered FO30c Specified stub event has not been registered FO30d Timer is running FO30e Memory copy area is overlapped FOSOf Trace has been already set FO310 Event condition is not set FO311 Too many valid timer event conditions FO312 FO313 Specified timer event is not set Illegal map range 1 Check the map range in the Configuration Dialog Box When mapping to external memory has been perf
293. n View menu gt Ascii is selected Data can be changed in this area in the same manner as in the memory display area The changing method is the same as in 2 0 1 2 Remark When the display address is changed the position of the cursor in the ASCII display area is not synchronized 4 ID Tag This area displays the ID tag for the data flash memory The ID tag is a bit whose one bit is assigned to one word of the data flash memory and is used to detect power failure When it is 0 it means that data in the word has been written normally The setting for this area can be changed between 0 and 1 Whether this area is displayed can be switched by selecting ID tag from the View menu default hidden This area is displayed exclusively with the area 3 0 1 2 3 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 205 5 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Search Opens the Memory Search Dialog Box and searches for character strings from the displayed memory contents or memory contents Selected data a memory value is displayed in the Memory Search Dialog Box as data to be searched If the Memory Search Dialog Box is opened without data specified specify data from the keyboard The results of the search is highlighted in the Memory window lt lt Searches the memory contents satisfying the search condition set in the Memory Search Dialog Box forward upward on screen from the address at the cur
294. n address Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function If no line information exists at the jump destination address however you cannot jump Opens the Source Window If an active Source Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Assemble Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Assemble Window If an active Assemble Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Memory Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Memory Window If an active Memory Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 185 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Watch Window This window is used to display and change specified watch data Refer to 5 6 Watch Function This window can also display wide ranging watch data such as global variables and public symbols in real time even during program execution in the same way as the Memory Window The results of updating and rewriting data in this window will be reflected in the Memory Window Watch data is registered by clicking the lt Watch gt button in the Source Window or Assemble Window Refer to 5 6
295. n buttons Set Determine the specified sampling range Close Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened Default Clears the current setting and sets the internal RAM start address in the first row in Address and 2048 in the first row in Size Delete Deletes the setting for the numbers with a focus Jump Opens the Memory Window and displays the addresses in Address whose numbers have a focus Jump is performed for Memory Window that are in the active status If multiple memory windows are to be opened they must be set in the static status Refer to 5 16 1 Active status and static status Help Displays this dialog box online help files 136 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Flash Option Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to make the flash self programming emulation function settings Code flash This dialog box cannot be opened during user program execution For the list of supported devices the list of availability of emulation for flash function and the cautions refer to Special Notes On Flash Self Programming Emuration Caution This dialog box cannot be opened when using a device that does not incorporate the flash memory Figure 6 9 Flash Option Dialog Box Flash Option fa Enable Flash Self Programming Flash Macro Service Spec f Old Spec f New Spec W Advanced Flash Macro Servi
296. n the Debugger Option Dialog Box could be found Set a symbol of the main routine of the program Default is _ main Ffa01 The line information on PC position not found 1 The source file corresponding to program counter PC value when the program was stopped could not be found The following reasons are possible The source file exists in a location that the source path does not connect to The program stopped where the source files such as library or RX do not exist The program looped jumped to an address that is not used by the program and stopped there Wfb00 User program is running Do you want to stop user program 1 lt Yes gt button is selected execution of the user program is stopped and then the Exit Debugger Dialog Box is displayed If it is specified in the Debugger Option Dialog Box that the Exit Debugger dialog box is not to be displayed however the ID850QB is terminated lt No gt button is selected execution of the user program is not stopped and the Exit Debugger Dialog Box is not displayed The ID850QB is not terminated Wfb01 Since bit 7 of address 0x79 in the ID code are 0 The N Wire emulator becomes prohibition of use henceforth Do you exit the debugger as it is Ffc00 Online help window cannot be started Please install HTML Help environment with reference to a users manual Wfc01 There is a bank of write mode in the instruction RAM IRAMM 0x Do you go on to execute Ffd00 Failed to specify XXX Ffe00 T
297. nap events FO406 Too many stub events F0407 Too many initialization data F0408 Too large search data gt 16 byte F0409 Too large search data gt search range F040a Too many Linking event conditions F04a0 Software break conditions number overflow F04a1 Not enough memory for emulation F04a2 Too many partition of bus size F04a3 Too many execution event conditions F04a4 Too many bus event conditions A0600 Not enough memory for buffer 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files A0601 Not enough resource of operating system FOb20 This event number can not be used FOb61 FObD66 Section Trace event conditions overflow Cannot use the break before execution event and the software break at the same time 1 This is because a break before execution is used for implementing a software break MINICUBE FOb80 FOcO0 A0Oc01 Reset by hardware error Monitor file read error 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger During access of register CPU did time out 1 Check the clock signal etc The register value may not be correct A0c02 During access of memory CPU did time out 1 Check the HOLD signal WAIT signal clock signal etc The memory value may not be correct 370 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPE
298. nction as Run menu gt Come Here The user program is real time executed until execution returns Same function as Run menu gt Return Out F7 Same function as Run menu gt Break Point Next step execution Same function as Run menu gt Next Over Sets or deletes a software breakpoint Same function as Run menu gt Software Break Point oe Shift F6 Executes the program from the cursor position in the Source or Assemble Window Same function as Run menu gt Start From Here Shift F9 Resets the CPU Same function as Run menu gt CPU Reset Cirl End Displays the last line The cursor will also move to the last line CirltHome Displays the first line The cursor will also move to the first line Cirl Left arrow key Moves the cursor one word to the left If the cursor at the left most position on the screen scrolls the screen one column to the right Cirl Right arrow key Moves the cursor one word to the right If the cursor at the right most position on the screen scrolls the screen one column to the left Ctrl F5 Ignores break points being set and executes the program Same function as Run menu gt Ignore break points and Go Ctrl F9 Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source Window or Assemble Window to the PC Same function as Run menu gt Change PC Ctrl A Selects all the events registered to the Event Manager Same function as View menu
299. nd last line are assumed Display any of the following corresponding to the current window Specify Line Specify the range of the line numbers to be saved The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal If the Source Window is in the mixed display mode the mixed displayed part on the specified line is also saved Specify Frame IECUBE Specify the range of trace frames to be saved Refer to Table 6 18 Frame Number Specification Format The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal Specify Address Specify the range of address to be saved An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal 3 Function buttons Save Saves the display information of the current window to the selected file After saving this dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything Help Displays this dialog box online help files Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 1 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE View File Load Dialog Box This dialog box is used to read the view files Refer to 5 15 2 Window display information view file When a view file is loaded the reference window Source Window in static status opens and the display information at saving is displayed The window
300. nd searches for a character string of mnemonics Specify a search method in the Assemble Search Dialog Box The results of search is highlighted in the Assemble Window This is the same operation as selecting View menu gt Search lt lt Searches forward upward on screen for the contents that satisfy the search condition set in the Assemble Search Dialog Box starting from the address at the cursor position This button is displayed as the lt Stop gt button during a search gt gt Searches backward downward on screen for the contents that satisfy the search condition set in the Assemble Search Dialog Box starting from the address at the cursor position This button is displayed as the lt Stop gt button during a search Stop during a search Stops searching Watch Adds the symbols selected in 4 Disassemble display area to the Watch Window If the Watch Window is not opened it is opened If no text is selected in Disassemble display area the Watch Window is only opened This is the same operation as selecting View menu gt View Watch Quick Temporarily displays the contents such as symbols selected in 4 Disassemble display area on the Quick Watch Dialog Box Opens the Quick Watch Dialog Box If no text is selected in Disassemble display area the Quick Watch Dialog Box is only opened This is the same operation as selecting View menu gt Quick Watch Refresh Close
301. nded Option Dialog Box refer to 5 13 RRM Function However updating is not performed when the RAM monitor function is OFF IECUBE The display start position when the window Is opened is as follows First time Display from peripheral I O registers of minimum address Second and subsequent times Display from first peripheral I O registers when window was last closed If the device supports programmable I O registers and a programmable I O area has been set in the Configuration Dialog Box the programmable I O registers and expansion peripheral I O regis ters are also displayed If the value of an I O port address is defined the I O port name is displayed in light color Figure 6 43 IOR Window Refresh DMM Close Na me Attribute OSFFFOO04 O3FFFOO4 O3FFFOOS OSFFFOO6 O3FFFOO09 O3FFFOOA O3FFFOOC O3FFFOOE O3FFFO24 O3FFFO24 O3FFFO25 OSFFFO26 O3FFFO29 OSFFFO2A O3FFFO2C O3FFFO2E O3FFFO44 O3FFFO44 O3SFFFO45 OSFFFO46 O3FFFO49 O3FFFO44 O3FFFO4C O3FFFO66 O3FFFO6E OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 cm OO 00 00 00 00 oo cm 16 T t l T alee t F 1 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 T t l E 1 1 g 221 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Explanation of Each Area View Menu IOR Window dedicated items Context Menu Cautions Opening Altick the IOR button or select Browse menu gt IOR Explanation of Each Area 1 IOR d
302. nditions is enabled Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is valid B T Ti i The various events occur when its condition is satisfied Black Indicates that the event condition or event link condition which is used for various event conditions is disabled B T Ti Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is invalid The various events do not occur even when its condition is satisfied Yellow Indicates that the symbol specified for an event is held pending because it cannot be recognized by the program currently loaded B T Ti Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is held pending The various events do not occur even when its condition is satisfied 86 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 12 6 Cautions MINICUBE MINICUBE2 1 Restrictions on event detection using bit manipulation instruction When the access size of an event is set to Byte and the event is set at an address other than a multiple of 4 if the address is accessed by a bit manipulation instruction an incorrect event may be detected or no event may be detected When the access size of an event is set to Bit and the event is set at an address other than a multiple of 4 if the address is accessed by a bit manipulation instruction an incorrect event may be detected or no event may be detected 2 Restrictions exist in event detection during a misalign access Restriction on write access event No events can be detected
303. ne event condition and name and register this event condition A simple method consists in using event conditions generated by setting breakpoint in the Source Window and Assemble Window Refer to 5 4 2 Breakpoint setting 2 Creating and registering event links Event link conditions are conditions for single events that provide ordered restrictions for event conditions and are generated when user programs are executed according to the specified sequence To create an event link condition use the Event Link Dialog Box 5 12 3 Setting event conditions Various event conditions listed in Table 5 16 are individually created in the corresponding dialog box 1 Setting of Various Event Conditions The setting of the various event conditions is done by selecting the event icon of the desired event condition or event link condition displayed in the event manager area or Event Manager in the respective setting dialog box and dragging and dropping this icon in the condition area to be set Figure 5 23 Setting of Various Event Conditions a Cancel Help Break Mame T T Add Event Break Event Add Link Seen eme Shrink lt 44 Event Manager Bear Eem iat ean The shape of the mouse cursor changes to OK when it is dragged over a settable condition area Regarding the created event conditions the event icon mark becomes red and the setting is enabled by clicking the lt Set gt button or the lt OK gt
304. nerate FlashFLMDCheck Error checkbox when errors which occur when a low level is input to the FLMDO pin in the case of the FlashFLMDCheck functions need to forcibly be returned 138 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 PG FP4 Security Flag Settings Emulation The initial value of the security flag is emulated when the security has been set to the flash memory using flash memory programmer PG FP4 The settable items are as follows All items are not selected by default Disable Chip Erase Disables enables chip erase Disable Block Erase Disables enables block erase Disable Program Disables enables write Disable ReadNotet Disables enables read Disable Boot Block Cluster ReprogrammingNote2 Disables enables boot area rewrite Note1 Available only when the flash memory process is Type1 new specification Type3 or Type4 Note2 This item is selectable only when the flash memory process is Type2 or Type3 6 Reset Vector Set the reset vector address default 0 If O is specified the actual reset vector address is set to address 4 If a value other than O is specified the specified value is set as the actual reset vector address When using an MF2 device reset vector addresses higher than the end address of the block specified in the Block Protection area cannot be specified refer to Table 6 8 Relationship Between Boot Swap Cluster Set Value and Target Range Set Value C
305. nge The coverage measurement range is as follows Table 5 14 Code Coverage Measurement Range Connected IE Code Coverage Measurement Range IECUBE Internal ROM space any 1 MB space selectable by Coverage Address Dialog Box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 19 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 11 3 Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed The locations for which coverage measurement is executed in the user program are displayed in the Source Window and Assemble Window based on the coverage measurement information The display result can be saved as view files for the Source Window and Assemble Window Refer to 5 15 2 Window display information view file The numbers of line or addresses for which coverage measurement is executed are highlighted as shown in the table below In the view file the marks in the table below are appended to the relevant line number or address instead of using the background color Table 5 15 Format of View of Locations for which Coverage Measurement is Executed Coverage Background Mark Background Mark Color Color 100 Code on this line has been executed by Orange 1 to 99 Code on this line has been executed by 0 not yet executed Remark These are default colors They can be changed in the Coverage Color Dialog Box Figure 5 22 View of Locations for which Coverage Measurement is Executed Source ctp01 c EBS v char i caVar i s v ub2 5
306. not do step execution W7010 No source information exists W7011 Unknown result of step execution A7012 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files A7Ofe Bus hold error 1 CPU is in the bus hold status Reset the debugger A7Off Can not communicate with ICE F7801 End waiting state of step execution was canceled F7802 End waiting state of step execution was canceled F7f00 Aborted step execution F7f02 Suspended step execution A7f03 Failed in canceling RUN STEP F7f04 Can not execute non mapped area F7f05 This feature is not supported 9 From X8000 F8000 Specified file was not found F8001 Illegal line number F8002 F8003 Current information is not set Illegal address F8004 This feature is not supported 10 From X9000 A9000 A9001 Specified register symbol does not exist Specified register symbol ID does not exist F9002 Illegal value A9003 A9004 Illegal condition Too large register size F9005 This feature is not supported 380 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES 11 From Xa000 Fa001 Illegal expression Fa002 Start address is bigger than the end address Fa003 Illegal source path Fa004 Too long expression Aa005 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Cl
307. ns the Exit Debugger Dialog Box Lists the names of the files opened User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 107 2 Edit menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Cut Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer Copy Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position Write in Writes the modified contents to the target Restore Cancels the modification Memory Manipulates the memory contents Fill Fills the memory contents with specified codes Opens the Memory Fill Dialog Box Copy Copies the memory Opens the Memory Copy Dialog Box Compare Compares the memory Opens the Memory Compare Dialog Box DMM Rewrites the memory contents in real time during user program execution Opens the DMM Dialog Box Edit Source Opens the source file displayed in the active Source Window with the editor 3 View menu specified by the PM when the PM runs The View menu contains common parts as well as dedicated parts added according to the active window For details about the dedicated parts refer to the description of each window a Common items Search Performs a search Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window Same operation as the lt Search gt button Move Moves the display position Opens the specification dialog box corresponding to the
308. nt Refer to 5 1 Setting Debugging Environment This dialog box is automatically displayed after the ID850QB is started up However no setting is required to read a project as the results of reading the project file are reflected in this dialog box Refer to 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file Caution Devices incorporating a pin to switch ROMless mode 0 and 1 and single chip mode 0 and 1 are not supported MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Figure 6 5 Configuration Dialog Box IECUBE Contiguration Glock 1 I TOF SSe Main OSC MHe S000 Internal Memory Multiply rate Restore 1 4 ROM fi et KBytes i M Project 2 RAM B2768 Byt Sub OSC iH About 2 a Fee 2768 Data Flash 32 KBytes CID Gode Hp M Use Data Flash C50 EEEE 5 Programmable 1 0 Area 3 4 Start Address ra 10 6 Peripheral Break r Monitor Glock arget ie System L Connec i User f Not Connect 11 7 NMO M NMH M NME IY HEDI RESET STOF a21 eee raona ea A Memory Mapping aec oo so eo Ada Memory Attribute Mapping Address amp Chip Select Delete 1 3 Target T nk 118 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM MINICUBE MINICUBE2 Opening Explanation of Each Area CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Contieuration Chip Glock E me uPD 70F3732 Main OSC MHz poo hternal Memory Data Flash Tki KBytes Use Data Flash Multiply
309. nts Therefore the time set in 3 Time Out Break changes when the timer count rate at the time of the event creation the value displayed in Count Rate is different from the current timer count rate value the value set in 2 Timer IECUBE in the Extended Option Dia log Box Example In the case of a timer event whose timer count rate value at the time of the event creation is set to 16 and whose timeout time is set to 1 sec 1 When the current timer count rate value is 32 gt The current timer count rate value is two times higher than the value at the time of the event creation This leads to the occurrence of a Timer Over Break in 2 seconds 2 When the current timer count rate value is 4 gt The current timer count rate value is a quarter of the value at the time of the event creation This leads to the occurrence of a Timer Over Break in 250 m seconds Therefore do not set the timeout break in the above case No problems occur when the timeout break is set to OFF or Overflow To set the timeout break change the timer count rate value in 2 Timer IECUBE in the Extended Option Dialog Box and reset the timer event User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 71 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 10 Trace Function iecusB_e The trace function is used to save the history of the data indicating the execution process of the user program to the trace memory The DMA Direct Memory Access start point and end point are traced r
310. o the setting for the mapping User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 319 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE Usage example IDCON 1 map i l 320 1 0 Ox7fff 8 IROM 2 0x8000 0x87ff 8 Target RRM 3 0x8800 Ox9fff 8 Target 4 Oxa000 Oxf7ff 8 NonMap 5 6 7 8 Oxf800 Oxfaff NonMap Oxfb00 Oxfedf 8 IRAM OxfeeO Oxfeff 8 Register OxffOO Oxffff 8 IOR DCON 2 map erom 0x100000 0x1 Offff DCON 3 map c Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE mdi mdi Setting of expansion window Input format mdi geometry x y width height mdi title string Functions Sets the size and title name of the expansion window The command can be used only from the expansion window Usage example IDCON 1 mdi geometry 0 0 100 100 IDCON 2 mdi title foo Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 321 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE memory memory Display setting of memory Input format memory options address value memory options fill address1 address2 value memory 7options copy address1 address2 address3 Aliases m Functions Sets value in the memory of the address specified by address according to options If value is omitted display the value of the memory of the address specified by address If fill is specified data from address1 to address2 is filled with value If copy is specified data from address1 to address2 is copied to address3 The follo
311. oard and restart the debugger Ab031 Already set in memory Ab032 Out of scope Ab033 LP is not stored Fb034 Return execution from present PC position cannot be performed Wb036 Out of variable region Fb037 Too Many Line Numbers Information Fb038 Compiler version mismatch 1 Recreate the load module with the latest compiler Ab039 Failed in loading debug information Ab03a No more section information Fb040 Specified file is not load module 1 This is not a linker output file Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker Specify the load module output from the linker Ab041 Too many files in load module to download Wb042 Symbol module is not initialized Fb32e Illegal port number Fb32f Illegal port name Fb330 Illegal port position Fb331 Illegal increment number User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 383 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fb332 Port for memory bank is not set Fb333 Illegal bank number Fb334 Area for memory bank is not set Wb335 Too long symbol name 13 From Xc000 Fc001 Can not open file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Ac002 Can not close file Ac003 Reading of file went wrong 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file
312. of high speed download IECUBE High speed downloading is now supported The target areas are internal ROM and internal RAM including VSB ROM and VSB RAM refer to Download Dialog Box 5 Support of E2 core devices E2 core devices are now supported refer to Download Dialog Box 6 Support of Motorola S type 16 bit record Motorola Hex format S type 16 bit record files S1 and S9 can now be downloaded 7 Downloading to external flash memory Load module files and Hex format files can now be downloaded to a flash memory connected to an external bus refer to 5 2 2 Downloading to External Flash Memory 8 Selection of coverage colors Colors used to distinguish the coverage of a user program code can now be selected refer to Coverage Color Dialog Box 9 Automatic source path setting Source files stored in the folder where they were placed during building are automatically displayed refer to Source Text Move Dialog Box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 19 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 2 Other functions 1 Using function of in circuit emulator By using the event setting function of an in circuit emulator break events can be set the user program can be traced and time can be measured and so on Refer to 5 12 Event Function 2 Support of on chip debugging MINICUBE A debugging function implemented by the on chip debug unit of the Nx85ET RCU0 TEU TRCU Nx85E901 RCUO RCU1 is provided 3 F
313. of trace search Address 3FF 7000 1 gt Address 3FF7000 Data 1 Data 00000010B Mask 11111101B If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits of the same address are accessed therefore a trace data is searched in accordance with the specified status if the address and bit match the specified value of address bit Remark f no access size condition is specified a judgment is automatically made from the address condi tion and data condition and the following is set Bit if the address condition is set in bit units Byte if the data condition is set in 8 bit units Half Word if the data condition is set in 16 bit units Word if the address condition is set in 32 bit units No Condition if no data condition is specified 240 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 3 Address condition setting area This area is used to specify an address condition may be omitted The following can be set Table 6 17 Settable Range of Address Condition Trace 0 lt mask value lt OxFFFFFFFF None Address Set an address condition lower address higher address may be omitted The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal A symbol can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols The following can be set Setting as a point Seta value to only the lower address or set the same value to the lower address and the hi
314. og box Refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 2 Event manager area in the Break Dialog Box 3 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc These buttons are used to display or delete the event conditions displayed in the event condition setting area and to display or hide the Event manager area This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 3 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc in the Break Dialog Box 4 Function buttons for registering deleting validating and invalidating event conditions These buttons are used to register delete validate and invalidate the events The event with the specified event condition is registered by clicking the lt OK gt or lt Set gt button OK Automatically registers the event condition being edited if any and closes this dialog box In the select mode An event condition is selected and the setting dialog box indicated on the title bar that called the Event Link dialog box is displayed again If the calling dialog box has already been closed the select mode is returned to the normal mode and the Event Dialog Box is not closed Otherwise this dialog box will be closed New Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box An event condition name is automatically created and a new event condition is prepared Set Registers the various
315. oints can be set or deleted by clicking with the mouse on this program code if is not displayed for the line the breakpoint is set on the line above or below the line whichever has displayed The program code is displayed only when the symbol information downloaded by the load module file is read If an event has been set for the corresponding line one of the marks listed in the following table is displayed The color of the B mark differs according to the breakpoint type and status When a breakpoint is set in this area it is enabled at the same time that it is set Table 6 13 Event Setting Status Event Mark Software breakpoint is set blue B red Valid hardware breakpoint after execution is set B green Valid hardware breakpoint before execution is set Note Breaks before execution are set with priority B black Invalid hardware breakpoint is set This hardware breakpoint can be validated on the Event Manager or in the Break Dialog Box 166 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Remark If an address range is specified as the address condition of the event the lower addresses of the range are displayed The mask specification of the address condition is not reflected 2 Current PC mark area The mark gt which indicates the current PC value PC register value is displayed in this area Clicking this mark with the mouse displays a pop up window that shows the PC registe
316. ommended because the setting must be changed for individual registers Register settings can be changed at a time before downloading programs by performing the setting in the BeforeDownload tab in the Hook window Processing will be made more efficient by including command processing performed in step 2 into the code Downloading programs Download programs via the Download Dialog Box When using an E2 core device addresses in internal instruction RAM and external spaces may overlap To handle such a case select to external FlashROM to give priority to downloading flash memory in the external space User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 45 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 4 Cautions e Data cannot be written to the external flash memory from the Memory Window or the like can be read however e Sectors that are protected cannot be erased or written e If the device has a function to prohibit erasing and writing when power is turned on off it cannot be erased or written because a dedicated unlock command is not supported e Special sectors such as Secured Silicon Sector area that can permanently hold Electric Serial Numbers which can be randomly assigned cannot be accessed read erased or written because no dedicated command is supported 5 2 3 Upload Uploading of memory contents etc is performed in the Upload Dialog Box The saving range can be set Format of file that can be uploaded is as follows Table 5 4 Type of File T
317. on 5 6 1 Changing watch data Callout watch function Stack trace display function Displaying and changing data values Displaying and changing local variable values Registering and deleting watch data Temporarily displaying and changing data values Displaying and changing data values Data values are displayed and changed in the Watch Window Shifts in data values can be checked by registering watch data The display format is specified in the Debugger Option Dialog Box 60 5 Watch Add Delte _ Up Down Refresh Close num_data 10 num data 0 num data i num data z num data 4 num data 4 num data num data num data 8 num data 5 num data 43 i Figure 5 7 Watch Window Bele Figure 5 8 Specification of the Display Format Debugger Option Dialog Box Watch Default show Wariable Type On i Off Language fe G C ASM Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 6 2 Displaying and changing local variable values Local variables are displayed and changed in the Local Variable Window Local variables within the current function are automatically displayed in this window Variable addition deletion is not possible Figure 5 9 Local Variable Window Local Variable sample Seles Refresh Close 5 6 3 Registering and deleting watch data Data can be registered to the Watch Window from the Source Window or Assemble Window This i
318. on The display radix display size and display number can be changed in this window Figure 5 11 Quick Watch Dialog Box Quick Watch Proper B Name fdata 5 6 6 Callout watch function The corresponding variable value pops up when the mouse cursor is placed over a selected variable in the Source Window or Assemble Window Figure 5 12 Callout Watch Function void maini void 3 mug INITIAL_MODE_P1 PH4 INITIAL_WODE_P4 62 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 6 7 Stack trace display function This function displays the stack contents of the current user program in the Stack Window Figure 5 13 Stack Window Stack E m x oa i ae e E slot out slot c maint 73 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 63 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function This section explains the following items related to the memory manipulation Verify check etc is specified in the Extended Option Dialog Box Displaying and changing memory contents Access monitor function IECUBE Filling copying and comparing memory contents Flash memory writing function MINICUBE MINICUBE2 5 7 1 Displaying and changing memory contents In the Memory Window the memory contents can be displayed or changed by using mnemonic codes hexadecimal codes and ASCII codes Searching is done in the Memory Search Dialog Box displayed by clicking the lt Search gt button The resu
319. on or select Browse menu gt Assemble Explanation of Each Area 1 Point mark area This area is used for Event Setting Status Event Mark and Breakpoint setting 2 Current PC mark area The mark gt which indicates the current PC value PC register value is displayed in this area By double clicking the current PC mark area the program can be executed up to a specified line Refer to Come Here 3 Address specification area This area displays the disassembly start address In addition executed addresses are highlighted based on code coverage measurement information Refer to 5 11 3 Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed Remark The end address is not display The end address is OXFFFFFFFE 4 Disassemble display area This area displays the labels and code data of addresses and disassembled mnemonics It can be Line assembly in the mnemonic field The following line is emphasized Current PC line gt ow Yellow indicates the current PC line gt Break point setting line red Red indicates lines where a valid breakpoint is set This area also provides the following functions Come Here Start From Here Refer to Table 5 9 Type of Execution Drag amp drop function Context Menu User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 175 5 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Search Opens the Assemble Search Dialog Box a
320. on function depends on the product 4 Moreover the software breaks set with the ROM collection function are temporarily disabled by target reset or internal reset but they are enabled when a break OCCUIS Caution When the Pseudo real time monitor function Break When Readout is enabled no software break points can be set When a valid software break point has been set writing during user program execution is disabled DMM Function IECUBE Software break is managed by the Software Break Manager Figure 5 3 Management of Software Breaks a Software Break Manager LER Enable Disable Delete Delete All Close File Line Symbol Offset testle as TT test c i4 sm bOOO0 test c 16 SM bOOOOS testi c ol sw bOOO06 tests c eg User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 53 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 4 5 Fail safe break function IECUBE The fail safe break settings are performed in the Fail safe Break Dialog Box Individual settings are possible by selecting checkboxes Remark However the protect setting for the internal RAM area is performed through verify processing by software and therefore a warning is displayed during breaks During IOR Illegal and internal RAM verify checks the address is displayed on the status bar Verify is performed at 0x00 Figure 5 4 Fail safe Break Setting Fail sate Break Protect Internal ROM i Df Write Internal R A Ml yr Non Map Cancel LO Register W Nor Map fw Rea
321. onment of the ID850QB in the Configuration Dialog Box After Detail setting each item click the lt OK gt button in the dialog box 3 The Main Window will be opened and the ID850QB can be operated Mainly use this window for debugging Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 31 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3 5 Terminating 1 Select File menu gt Exit on the Main Window The following the Exit Debugger Dialog Box will be opened An execution stop confirmation message is displayed when stop operation is performed during program execution Figure 3 4 Exit Debugger Dialog Box ID8500B P This will end your Debugger session Do you want to sawe the settings in the project file 2 To save the current debugging environment to a project file click the lt Yes gt button If the lt No gt button is clicked all the windows are closed the ID850QB terminated 32 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING 3 6 Error Messages at Start Up Error messages that may be output when ID850QB starts up are listed below by order of occurrence When these messages are output refer to APPENDIX E MESSAGES Caution When multiple emulators are connected the emulator priority order is as follows IECUBE gt MINICUBE gt MINICUBE2 gt N Wire CARD 3 6 1 When the IECUBE is connected The pattern of the output error message differs as follows depending on the connection status with the target and
322. oreover this area also provides the following functions for lines start address of program code and addresses where the cursor has been placed Come Here Start From Here Refer to Table 5 9 Type of Execution Drag amp drop function Context Menu Caution If a Program code does not exist on the source line the top address of the line above or below the line on which a program code exists is manipulated by these functions These functions cannot be performed in the following cases The corresponding menu will be dimmed and cannot be selected If a file other than a source file is displayed While the user program is being executed User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 167 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 5 Function buttons Search Opens the Source Search Dialog Box and searches a character string of the source text If a character string is selected in the source text display area the Source Search Dialog Box is opened to search the character string If no character string is selected the Source Search Dialog Box is opened with nothing specified to be searched Specify a search method in the Source Search Dialog Box The results of search is highlighted in the Source window This is the same operation as selecting View menu gt Search lt lt Searches forward upward on screen for the text that satisfies the search condition set in the Source Search Dialog Box starting from the address at the cursor
323. ormed change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the IOR Window or Hook Procedure before download F0314 F0315 F0316 Only trace delay mode can set with delay trigger Delay trigger cannot set without trace delay mode Overflowed the number of mapping FO3a0 Target is not turned on 1 Check the target system power supply Check the cable connecting the emulator and target board Check that the VDD signal is input to the connector of the target board FO3a1 Step execution is being done FO3a2 F03a3 Timer and Tracer are running Event link and BRS events are mixed FO3d0 Back trace is being executed User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 369 APPENDIX E MESSAGES FOSd1 Back trace is being stopped FO3d2 Back trace execution point overrun oldest frame FO3d3 Register status or Memory status cannot be set up other than Phase of event link FO3d4 No back trace information exists FO3d5 F0400 Last command can not be backstepped Illegal condition 1 Settings of the used emulator and those of the Configuration Dialog Box may not match Check the Chip selection FO401 Result of timer measurement overflowed F0402 Too many event conditions with path count F0403 Too many address range conditions F0404 Too many simultaneously usable event conditions FO405 Too many s
324. ors The following emulators are supported IECUBE MINICUBE N Wire CARD RTE 2000H TP Caution Whether downloading programs to an external flash memory using MINICUBE2 is possible depends on the specifications of the debug monitor program Support is under discussion 2 Prepare a flash information file FDB file and confirm the supported flash memory An FDB file is necessary for downloading to the flash memory Download the FDB file from the following website Development Tools Download webpage A readme file exists in the compressed folder storing the FDB file The supported flash memories are shown in this file Be sure to read this file and check if the flash memory to be used is Supported http www necel com micro ods eng 3 Downloading procedure Download data to the flash memory in the following procedure 1 3 Mapping Map the target flash memory in the mapping area of the Configuration Dialog Box Specify the mapping attribute as Target Registering flash memory information Open the Console Window and register flash memory information on the command line For how to register the information refer to the description of the efcontig command Setting of external bus Change the peripheral I O register setting so as to use external buses which enables accessing from the target device to flash memory This setting can be changed in the IOR Window but use of the Hook window an expansion window is rec
325. ose the applications being executed and the open files Fa006 Illegal argument Fa007 Illegal program number Fa008 Source path is not set Fa009 File not found Fa00a Can not open file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Aa00b Can not close file Aa00c Failed in reading file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Fa00d Not source file of load module Fa00e Illegal line number Fador Variable does not exist Aa010 Can not communicate with ICE Fa011 Can not access register Fa012 Can not access memory Aa013 Reading of file went wrong Fa014 It was going to open the binary file Fa015 Can not get temporary path 1 The disk is full Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk Fa016 Can not create temporary file 1 The disk is full Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk Fa017 Can not remove temporary file Fa020 This feature is not supported Fa021 Fa022 Symbol assigned to register cannot be specified The character which cannot be used for the folder is contained or the folder does not exist 12 From Xb000 Fb000 Illegal command line Fb001 Program information does not exist in specified load module file
326. ottware nOnNUZE zottware nOnUZE zottware nOnUZE zottware nOnUZE zottware nOnNUZE zottware NOnUZE zottware nOnUZE software Use a S m S man D an G m G ma A m SO a G o G ma GO m GA o G ma G m A a G maa GA m GA a Click the Cov button or select Browse menu gt Code Coverage 252 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM H Code Coverage _ Ele Load Module romp out Total Coverage 92 3 Refresh Close Funetion Section Interrupt CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Coverage information display area Load Module This area is used to select the load module file that has been downloaded This area is blank when no load module file has been downloaded Total Coverage This area displays the coverage for the area for which code coverage has been measured Total coverage Total executed fetched function size total function size excluding sections outside the coverage measurement range This area is blank when no load module file has been downloaded 2 Measurement result display area This area displays the measurement result per tab function section interrupt handler The coverage measurement result is updated automatically at a break it is not updated during user program execution This area is blank when no load module file has been downloaded The display jumps from this tab to the Source Window or Assemble Window using the start address value of the
327. out break occurs execution is terminated if the section measurement time exceeds the maximum measurable time refer to Table 6 16 Measurable Values Remark In the case of a Run Break event this area is fixed to the OFF position and disabled 4 Event manager area This area displays the list of registered events Each event condition can be set easily just by dragging and dropping the event icon displayed in this area onto the event setting area in each event setting dialog box Refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 2 Event manager area in the Break Dialog Box 5 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc These buttons are used to display or delete the event conditions displayed in the event condition setting area and to display or hide the Event manager area This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 3 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc in the Break Dialog Box 6 Function buttons for registering deleting validating and invalidating event conditions These buttons are used to register delete validate and invalidate the events The event with the specified event condition is registered or set validated by clicking the lt OK gt or lt Set gt button This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Refer to 4 Function butions for registering
328. overage functions cannot be used when the trace function is selected and the RRM and trace functions cannot be used when the coverage function is selected To switch between the three functions go to the Opiton menu and select one of the RRM Function Trace Function Coverage Function Basically the three functions are used on a mutually exclusive basis however the operations below are possible The switching of the functions does not clear coverage data Even when a function other than the coverage function is selected coverage data can be downloaded uploaded and cleared When the coverage function is selected it is possible to perform traces with the trace mode fixed at All PC Conditional traces cannot be performed When the RRM function is selected the trace data displayed in the Trace View Window indicates only branch information and access information in the sampling range of Real time monitor function IECUBE Traces are performed with the trace mode fixed at Branch PC Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 81 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 12 Event Function Events specify specific states of the target system during debugging such as fetched address 0x1000 or Wrote data to address 0x2000 In ID850QB such events are used as action triggers for each debugging function such as break and trace This section explains the following items Using event function Creating events Setting event conditions
329. ow of the debugger refer to CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE set save UCKC 0 register UCKC 2 proc BeforeCpuRun register UCKC save_ UCKC proc AfterCpuStop set save_UCKC register UCKC register UCKC 2 proc AfterCpuReset set save UCKC 0 register UCKC 2 224 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE IOR Select Dialog Box This dialog box is used to select peripheral I O registers and I O ports that are not displayed the IOR Window Refer to 5 8 Register Manipulation Function It is also used to specify the sequence in which registers and ports are displayed Figure 6 44 IOR Select Dialog Box IOR Select Display Pick Up No Display 1 Hide All gt gt Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the IOR Window is the current window select View menu gt Select User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 225 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Displayed peripheral I O registers selection display order change area Display Registers displayed in the IOR Window Two or more registers can be selected by clicking any of the above buttons while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key Pick Up The following buttons are used to change peripheral I O registers to be displayed lt lt Show Moves the register selected from the No Display list to Display Hide gt gt Moves the register se
330. ox 150 Delay Count Dialog Box 250 Delay trigger trace 76 DMA 72 DMM Dialog Box 214 download 44 Download Dialog Box 158 drag amp drop function 98 DWARF2 25 E Emulation RAM 43 Emulation ROM 43 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box 281 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box 280 Error messages at start up 33 Errors 366 Event Dialog Box 264 Event function 82 Event icon 86 Event Link Dialog Box 269 Event Manager 260 Event manages 86 Event Setting Status Event Mark 166 Exit Debugger Dialog Box 283 Expansion window 340 Expressions 360 Extended Option Dialog Box 127 F Fail safe Break Dialog Box 133 Flash Option Dialog Box 137 G G dual_debug 25 g option 24 GHS 25 H hook procedure 295 I I O Protect 43 ID code 24 ID Tag 205 IECUBE 21 In circuit emulator 23 input conventions 357 Installing 26 IOR Select Dialog Box 225 IOR Window 221 J jump function 96 L List Window 183 Load Module List Dialog Box 163 U18604EJ1VOUM 391 APPENDIX F INDEX Load Save Function 92 Local Variable Window 198 Locations for which coverage measurement is executed 80 M Main Window 106 Mask 124 Memory Compare Dialog Box 212 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box 213 Memory Copy Dialog Box 211
331. performed in the Trace window The number of invalid frames can be reduced by setting the trace complement mode to ON The RETI instruction allocated to address 0x7c is not traced If the items Branch PC Access DATA and Access PC are selected for the trace function of the Extended Option Dialog Box the same instruction e g prepare dispose callt is displayed two frames in succession in the Trace window The frequency of this bug can be reduced by setting the trace complement mode to ON Use a combination other than Branch PC and Access PC A time measurement clock of 20 ns 50 MHz is used for counting the time tag in the Trace window and is not related to the actual CPU clock An error of up to 32 CPU clocks occurs In addition an error occurs in the time tag in the following cases because the CPU is stopped for a moment When the RAM monitor function is used during program execution When a hardware break or software break is set during program execution When a value is written to the memory with the DMM function during program execution When the real time monitor area is set or modified during program execution 7 The time tag value in the Trace window is the integrated value but the value may be smaller than the actual value though this is unlikely The frequency of this error can be reduced by raising the timer count rate with the Extended Option Dialog Box When a break occurs at a software breakpoint the instruction tha
332. ptions Cpu CPU is reset default debugger The ID850QB is reset symbol Symbol is reset event All events and software breaks are reset Usage example IDCON 1 reset Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 327 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE run run Reset and execution of CPU Input format run options Aliases Functions Resets the program and executes it If waitoreak is not specified the command does not wait until the program stops The following are options waitbreak The command waits for the program to stop Usage example IDCON 1 run IDCON 2 run w 328 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE step step Step execution Input format step options Aliases s step source I step instruction Functions Executes step execution If functions are called the command stops at the head of the functions The following are options source The command is executed in source line units default instruction The command is executed in instruction units Usage example IDCON 1 step i IDCON 2 step s Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 329 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE stop stop Stop executing Input format stop Functions Stops the program forcibly Usage example IDCON 1 run IDCON 2 stop 330 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM tkcon tkcon Console control Input format
333. put from the linker Fc019 Failed in writing memory Wc01a BSS area is assigned to non mapped area 1 When the program is executed a non map break may occur Either allocate the BSS area to the internal RAM by using a link directive or map the emulation memory or target memory to the BSS area using the Configuration Dialog Box of the debugger Fc0O1b Programmable IOR address not specified 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger WcO01c Programmable IOR address mismatch 1 Necessary files may be damaged Reinstall the debugger Wc01d Selected load module different from kind Chip was loaded FcO1e Flash erase is not supported Fc0O1f This feature is not supported Fc021 The debugger can t download at high speed because the object file has the code out of the internal ROM and the internal RAM 14 From Xd000 Ad000 Error occurred inside debugger Ad001 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files Ad002 Ad003 Failed in reading initialization file expc ini ICE is not connected Fd004 Can not find Dynamic Link Library 15 From Xe000 Fe000 Fe001 Illegal argument Illegal start address Fe002 Illegal end address Fe003 Fe004 Too large size Can not open file 1 The file is damaged or does no
334. quipment communications equipment test and measurement equipment audio and visual equipment home electronic appliances machine tools personal electronic equipment and industrial robots High Quality Transportation equipment automobiles trains ships etc traffic control systems anti disaster systems anti crime systems safety equipment and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support Specific Aircraft aerospace equipment submersible repeaters nuclear reactor control systems medical equipment or systems for life support e g artificial life support devices or systems surgical implantations or healthcare intervention e g excision etc and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics especially with respect to the maximum rating operating supply voltage range movement power voltage range heat radiation characteristics installation and other product characteristics Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products semiconductor products have specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under ce
335. r executes Stop CPU Reset CPU is reset Stop Forcibly stops program execution m Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 57 5 58 5 2 Note 1 2 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Cautions the following points regarding the program execution functions If a write instruction for the PRCMD or PHCMD register which is performed immediately before an instruction is performed one by one with I O registers that require a specific sequence or if an instruction is executed from such instructions the write instruction is not performed normally f a software break or hardware break before execution is set to an instruction located at the PC a step wise execution is first performed and then real time execution is performed This causes an error in the time measurement result in the timer In addition when the program operation is checked using the oscillator or logic analyzer the measured timing may differ between when Go is executed at a certain location and Go is executed one instruction before that location If return execution is performed when a function is recursively called stack is generated by the recursive processing the PC moves to the position where the processing of the function called last leaf function ended Even if this symptom appears the subsequent operation is performed normally Example If the same function is called five times because of recursive processing 1 main 2 fnucO1 Function is cal
336. r to Table 6 13 Event Setting Status Event Mark Caution A software breakpoint cannot be set delete in an externally mapped ROM area Remark Breaks set by default can also be changed in the Extended Option Dialog Box Figure 5 1 Breakpoint Setting Click the asterisk program code in this area Source serial ar SES ee m E j Watch meee ppm Clase i set baudrate UAQCTL1 UART_CTL1_115200BP8 UAQCTL2 UART_OTL2_ 115200BP8 Jt uart enable and THE RKE set to 1 data bits no parity kf enable receive and transmit lines 4 UAQCTLO UART_CTLO_DATALENGTH_8 UART_CTLO_ PARITY NONE UART CTLO LSB UART_CTLO STOPBIT_1 3 UAQCTLO UART_CTLO PWR UART_CTLO_ ENABLE TX UART_CTLO_ UART_CTLO_DATALENGTH_ UART_CTLO PARITY NONE UART CTLO LSB whilet 1 M unsigned char data fort data 1 data lt 56 datatt 1 UAOTSE UAOQSTR translation status fl Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 51 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 2 Deleting a breakpoint method Click the position at which the breakpoint to be deleted is set At the same time as setting is performed in the default setting software breakpoint B is deleted but if Breakpoint is selected in the context menu hardware breakpoint B or B is deleted As a result of deletion If another event remains however the mark of that event is displayed 5 4 3 Setting breaks to variables Access breaks can easily be
337. r value By double clicking the current PC mark area the program can be executed up to a specified line Refer to Come Here 3 Line number address display area This area displays the line numbers of a source file or text file Red indicates line numbers for which corresponding program code exists and black indicates line numbers for which corresponding program code does not exist In the Mixed display mode Source Window disassemble display addresses are displayed in gray In addition executed addresses are highlighted based on code coverage measurement information Refer to 5 11 3 Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed 4 Source text display area This area displays the line numbers of a source file or text file The following line is emphasized Current PC line yellow Note Yellow indicates the current PC line or disassemble line gt If there is no line number information at the PC position when a break occurs the execution automatically jumps to the Assemble Window In the Mixed display mode Source Window the color of only the disassemble display line is changed the source line is displayed in the normal color Break point setting line red Red indicates lines where a valid breakpoint is set In the Mixed display mode Source Window the color of only the disassemble display line is changed the source line is displayed in the normal color M
338. rate 1 r Sub OSG K Hz 32 768 Start Address Cancel Restore Project About Help Peripheral Break Monitor Glock N vWire LF C Break f System f Worn Break User Mask DGK 10MHz P NMO NMH M NME HLORG RESET STOP Walt T DBINT F MODE D12 Target Depend Memory Mapping Access Size i SBit C 16Bit C 32Bit Memory Attribute Mapping Address amp Chip Select pe Delete Add Contieuration Chip Clock a me uPD 70 Fara Main OSG tMHz 5 000 Internal Memory Multiply rate ROM oe KBytes f Te Sub OSCLKHz PAM 16384 Bytes ji 2768 Data Flash KBytes Use Data Flash ID Code Cancel Restore Project acral About ee Help Programmable VO Area Start Address Peripheral Break Monitor Clock C Break System f Hon Break User Maszk Target Device Connection M NMO FM NMI M NME rT HLDRO RESET STGP ro wall f CEINT P MODE DI Target Depend Memory Mapping Access Size fe Bit 16Bit C 32Bit Memory Attribute Mapping Address amp Chip Select User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM Add stele 119 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Automatically when the ID850QB is started up Select Option gt Configuration from the menu bar Explanation of Each Area 1 Chip This area is used to select the chip name A chip name is select
339. re subject to write protect for fail safe break Refer to Fail safe Break Dialog Box I O Protect I O protect area An I O Protect area can be set in the area specified for the target The I O protect area is displayed in the same manner as an area that is not mapped display symbol on the Memory Window By mapping an area with this attribute data cannot be read or written from to this area by the Memory Window on the area can therefore be protected from an illegal access To read or write the value of the area mapped with this attribute register the value in the IOR Window or Watch Window 5 1 4 To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory When mapping has been performed for external memory must change the values of the registers required for accessing external memory prior to downloading using the IOR Window or the hook procedure For how to change register values using the hook procedure refer to 7 9 Hook Procedure For the registers to be changed refer to the hardware manual of the CPU that is used User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 43 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 2 Download Function Upload Function ID850QB allows downloading and uploading of object files in the formats listed in the following table Table 5 3 Table 5 4 This section explains the following items Download Downloading to External Flash Memory Upload 5 2 1 Download Object files are downloaded in the Do
340. ress is displayed on the first line and the instruction code at the higher address is displayed on the second line Remark2 To display instruction codes when two instructions are simultaneously executed one instruction is displayed on the first line and the other instruction is displayed on the second line 236 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 4 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Search Opens the Trace Search Dialog Box and searches trace results The searched result will be highlighted in the Trace View Window Same function as View menu gt Search lt lt Searches forward upward on screen for a trace result that satisfies the search condition set in the Trace Search Dialog Box gt gt Searches backward downward on screen for a trace result that satisfies the search condition set in the Trace Search Dialog Box Refresh Updates the contents of the window with the latest data Close Closes this dialog box View Menu Trace View Window dedicated items The following items are added in the View menu when the Trace View Window is active Select Mix Selects the contents to be displayed Opens the Trace Data Select Dialog Box Switches whether to display the source file in mixed display mode Selected Mixed display Cleared Hidden default Window Synchronize Links the Trace View Window with the following windows Refer to 5 16 3 Trace result
341. ressed the contents are written to the memory and then the cursor moves to the next line in the mnemonic field so that the data on the next line can be changed Caution If the number of new instruction bytes is less than the number of previous instruction bytes as a result of changing aS many nop instructions as necessary are inserted If the number of new instruction bytes is more than the number of previous instruction bytes the next instruction is over written In this case also as many nop instructions as necessary are inserted The same applies to instructions that straddle over source lines User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 177 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Search Dialog Box This dialog box is used to search the contents in the Assemble Window Refer to 5 3 2 Disassemble display Successive character strings included in an input character string and disassembler character string are compared as one blank character By setting each item and then clicking the lt Find Next gt button searching can be started By clicking the lt Set Find gt button the direction buttons lt lt and gt gt in the Assemble Window can be used for the search Figure 6 23 Assemble Search Dialog Box Assemble Search Eg Find What bne _flashself 1 i Match Case Direction Set Find Scan Whole Region f Up f Down Close Address 0x0 1000 Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Wh
342. rget Specification Method Variable var file var to specify a static variable with file name file func var to specify a static variable with file name and function name prog file func var to specify a static variable with program name file name and function name Function func file func to specify a static function with file name prog file func to specify a static variable with program name and file name label file label to specify a local label with file name prog file label to specify a local label with program name and file name Line number of source file file no prog file no Remark1 Separator is used as a separator for file names variables function names and line numbers If a speci fied symbol is not found in the scope all symbols static variables static functions local labels are searched Remark2 Separator To specify a load module name when two or more load modules are read use as a Separator to delimit the load module name from a file name variable function name or symbol name In the default status a symbol name takes precedence To temporarily change the priority prefix ing to a symbol gives the priority to a register name User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 49 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 4 Break Function The break function is used to stop execution of the user program by the CPU and operation of the tracer This section explains the following items Break types
343. rl 606 f4oF 2 st h r12 TUNI GCE1 1 Corsets set Ox7 THC time_over Q 44060000 mowhi Osx cane at ii If a program code corresponds to the line of the displayed source file the disassembly line is displayed next to the source line The label of the address code data and disassembled mnemonic are displayed the display Start position of the mnemonic is adjusted by the set value of the tab size Caution1 The mixed display mode is valid only when the load module is downloaded and the symbol infor mation is read and the corresponding source file is displayed Caution2 The disassembled code cannot be edited in the Source Window even if it is in the mixed display mode To edit the disassembled code use the Assemble Window Remark When scrolling is performed using the cursor keys in the Mixed display mode excessive scrolling may occur Also scrolling down to the last line may not be possible using the cursor keys Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 3 4 Convert symbol symbol to address In the Symbol To Address Dialog Box can be displayed the address of the specified variable or function or the value of the specified symbol Convert symbol is performed by selecting the character string to be converted in the Source Window or Assemble Window and then selecting context menu gt Symbol The Specification symbols is indicated below Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols Conversion Ta
344. rmed for the IOR Remark Ifthe DMM Dialog Box is opened via the Memory Window Register Window or IOR Window the corresponding option button has already been selected 214 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 DMM setting area a When Memory is selected Memory Address This area is used to specify the memory address to which data is to be written The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to lable 5 6 Specifying Symbols Write Data This area is used to specify the data to be written to the memory address specified in Memory Address Data Size This area is used to specify the size of the data specified in Write Data to be written Byte Writes the data as 8 bit data Half Word Writes the data as 16 bit data Word Writes the data as 32 bit data b When Register is selected Register Name This area is used to specify the register name to which data is to be written The case is distinguished Both functional and absolute names can be used for specification Write Data c When IOR is selected This area is used to specify the data to be written to the register specified in Register Name IOR Name Write Data This area is used to specify the IOR name to which data is to be written The case is distingu
345. roject The ID850QB icon is displayed on the toolbar of the PM 36 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM 1 Creating a new workspace 1 Select File menu gt New Workspace on the PM gt This opens the dialog box to create a new workspace using the wizard format 2 Creating the necessary settings for the workspace with the wizard the Select Debugger dialog box will be opened Specify ID850QB in this dialog box For details of the setting refer to the User s manual 2 Using an existing workspace 1 Select Tool menu gt Debugger Settings on the PM gt The Debugger Settings dialog box will be opened 2 Specify ID850QB and click the lt OK gt button in this dialog box For details of the setting refer to the User s manual 4 2 2 Downloading multiple load module files Load module files in the same project group can be downloaded when using the ID850QB Download multiple load module files by specifying items in the Debugger Settings dialog box of PM Figure 4 1 Downloading Multiple Files Debug Options W Download the Debug Target Files in the same Project Group Debug Target File List M C Program Files NEC Electronics Tools sample4b out For details of the project group refer to the User s manual Remark Multiple load module files that are being downloaded can be selected in the Load Module Lisi Dialog Box of the ID850QB Caution If Execute symbol rese
346. rtain use conditions Further Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard them against the possibility of physical injury and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas Electronics product such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy fire control and malfunction prevention appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures Because the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult please evaluate the safety of the final products or system manufactured by you Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances including without limitation the EU RoHS Directive Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with applicable laws and regulations This document may not be reproduced or duplicated in any form in whole or in part without prior written consent of Renesas Electronics Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this document or Renesas Electron
347. ruction jr Oxfffd6 is written to address 0 Therefore when using this function at a reset vector address 0 allocate a startup routine to the area starting from address 4 If flash self programming emulation is disabled 0 is written to the four bytes area starting from address 0 Do no describe codes in which execution branches to address 0 even if this function is used as a reset vector address 0 It is recommended to perform description as shown below in order to operate the same program as the one generated by emulation in the actual device RESET handler in the case of address 0 section RESET text jr _ start Overwritten by jr Oxfffd6 jr __ start If address 0 is specified as the reset vector handling specification address the reset vector is set to address 4 If an address other than address 0 is specified then the specified address is set as the reset When flash self programming emulation function is enabled the 4 byte area starting from address 0 is vector without incrementing the value by four during emulation the timing at which the return value of FlashStatusCheck changes from FE_BUSY to FE OK differs from that in the actual device 2 Regarding the operation of FlashStatusCheck after FlashBlockErase and FlashBlockBlankCheck User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 145 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If the address specified as the third argument of FlashWordWrite FlashWordRead or FlashNWordRead is located in th
348. s Variable Break when Read from Creates a break event that can be accessed for read by using the selected item Clear Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected item Event Information Displays the event information of the variable selected If an event is set the Event Dialog Box is opened Bin Displays the selected line in binary numbers Oct Displays the selected line in octal numbers Dec Displays the selected line in decimal numbers Hex Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers String Displays the selected line as a character string Proper Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option Dialog Box default Byte Displays the selected line in 8 bit units Half Word Displays the selected line in 16 bit units Word Displays the selected line in 32 bit units Adaptive Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable default Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language Symbols in assembly language are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option Dialog Box Up Moves the selected line one line up Down Moves the selected line one line down Compulsion Read Forcibly reads IOR that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed or the data of the I O ports and I O protect area added in the Add O
349. s When the mouse cursor is placed on a button of the toolbar a tool hint pops up several seconds later Stops execution of the user program Same function as Run menu gt Stop Stop Ib Resets the CPU and executes the user program ReGo Same function as Run menu gt Restart gt Executes the user program from the current PC without resetting the CPU Go Same function as Run menu gt Go e Ignores break points being set and executes the user program Go Same function as Run menu gt Ignore break points and Go z The user program is executed until execution returns Ret Same function as Run menu Return Out Note This command is used for a function described in C language e Step execution executes instructions in the program one by one Step If a function or subroutine is called its instructions are executed one by one Same function as Run menu gt Step In ver Next step execution executes the program assuming a function call statement as one step If a function or subroutine is called its instructions are not executed on a step by step basis Same function as Run menu gt Next Over 4 Res Resets the CPU Same function as Run menu gt CPU Reset Opens the View File Load Dialog Box Open Same function as File menu gt Open E Opens the Download Dialog Box Load Same function as File menu gt Download Opens t
350. s in 16 bit units Word Displays in 32 bit units Number This area is used to change the number of data to be displayed on a line selected in the Watch Window blank or a number of 1 to 256 If this area is blank data is displayed as a simple variable If a number of 1 or more is specified data is displayed as an array variable in the Watch Window If an array variable is displayed is prefixed to the data By double clicking this all the elements of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data is prefixed to the expanded data If this is double clicked the expanded display is canceled If the number of data to be displayed is fixed such as when a variable in C language or register is to be displayed the specified number of data is invalid 3 Function buttons OK Replaces the data on a line selected in the Watch Window with the specified data and then closes this dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 197 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Local Variable Window This window is used to display the local variable in the current function and change the local variable values Refer to 5 6 2 Displaying and changing local variable values It is linked with the Jump function of the Stack Window and displays the local vari
351. s not align with access size alignment F300c Destination address does not align with access size alignment 376 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES F300d Illegal end address F300e Different access size in specified area F300f Different access size both in source and destination areas F3010 Different access size in destination area F3011 A3012 Different access size source amp destination Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files F3013 Failed in writing DMM F3014 Oveflowed mapping area F3015 Processing was interrupted F3016 This feature is not supported ASOff Can not communicate with ICE 5 From X4000 F4000 F4001 Can not delete specified event 1 The specified event cannot be deleted as it is being used under another condition Invalidate it for other usages before deleting Illegal table number F4002 Illegal start address F4003 F4004 Illegal end address Illegal status F4005 Illegal data F4006 F4007 Specified event number has been already used Too many same events are registered F4008 Specified event has not been registered F4009 F400a Illegal data size Illegal mode F400b Setting value is inaccurate F400c F400d Event link
352. s simply done by selecting the variable or symbol name in the respective window and then clicking the lt Watch gt button Registration is also possible with the following method Drag and drop the selected variable or symbol name directly on the Watch Window Refer to 5 16 4 Drag amp drop function Click the lt Add gt button in the Quick Watch Dialog Box or Add Watch Dialog Box To delete watch data click the variable name or symbol name multiple selections can also be made using the Shift key or Ctrl key and then click the lt Delete gt button However lines with an expanded hierarchy such as elements of an array and members of structures and unions cannot be deleted Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 61 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 6 4 Changing watch data Watch data is changed in the Change Waich Dialog Box Note that the symbol name can be changed even if it results in duplication of a name already in use with existing data Figure 5 10 Change Watch Dialog Box Change Watch Name hi Radix f Proper C Hex C Dec C Oct C Bin f String SIZE fe Adaptive f Byte Half Word f gt Word Number Cancel Restore Help 5 6 5 Temporarily displaying and changing data values Data values are temporarily displayed and changed in the Quick Waich Dialog Box Select the desired variable or symbol name in the Source Window or Assemble Window and click the lt Quick gt button to perform watch data registrati
353. s useful for reading or writing a specific address While the user program is being executed it momentarily breaks before data is written in this window Figure A 5 Memory Mapped I O Window Memory Mapped FO 000FFFO Maf Address oz0000f fit Jump Refresh All Refresh One Modify Address O 1 2 3 4 45 6 7 5 9 B C OOOOFFFO OooL0000 OO010010 Oo010020 nooit OOo10040 ngaoisi OO010060 OOoL0070 nooit OoOoL0090 OOOLO0A0 OOOLO0B0 OOO0100C0 OOO100D0 OOO100E0 OOOL00FO OO010100 00010110 00010120 OOOL0130 OoOoL0140 OoOoOL0150 OoOoOL10160 Address Input the address to display The display target address changes by pressing the Enter key or clicking the lt Jump gt button The data contents are not read at this time so the address numerical value is displayed in the address display section but XX is displayed in the data section lt Jump gt button Jumps to the address input in the Address field lt Refresh All gt button Reads all the areas currently displayed only once ZZ will be displayed in the data section when an attempt is made to read an unmapped area or when an error occurs upon a read lt Refresh One gt button Reads data in the memory of the address at which the cursor is placed only once The read data size depends on the display format ZZ will be displayed in the data section when an attempt is made to read an unmapped area or when an error occurs upon
354. se directory is determined in the following sequence 1 Directory to which the project file has been loaded 2 Directory to which a load module or hex file has been loaded last 3 Current directory of Windows Text box This area is used to specify the directory searched To specify a directory either directly input one to the text box or click the lt Browse gt button A relative path can also be specified Opens the Add Source path Dialog Box by clicking the lt Browse gt button To delimit paths use semicolon or comma Figure 6 12 Add Source path Dialog Box Add Source path Folder 5 hip 6 lib E lib 4 setup 4 smp 3 smp gt signal_editor Cy stdio Cy timing_chart H useropen Remark1 Directories that contain and or in the source path can be specified Non existent directories cannot be specified Remark2 Immediately after this dialog box has been opened the base directory is selected and opened If the selected directory has already been set for the source path a source path is not added Remark3 Up to 8 191 characters can be set for the source path length in total including a dot before extension If more than 8 191 characters are used to specify a source path the valid paths until the 8 191th character are set as a source path and characters that follow are ignored User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 151 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Default E
355. sed to select the file to be set in the Source Text Move Dialog Box Remark _ lf this dialog box is opened for the first time after the system has been started up the directory first specified by the source path is displayed When the dialog box is opened the second and subse quent times the previously displayed directory is recorded and displayed again If the lt Cancel gt button is clicked however the previously displayed directory is not recorded Figure 6 70 Browse Dialog Box Browse les Look irr O Chapters ma Ee Interrupt _func c Ilc slotc Files of type Source GEk a Cancel 2 Help Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Click the lt Browse gt button in the target dialog box Explanation of Each Area 1 Open file setting area Look in This area is used to specify the file name to be opened A file name can be directly input from the keyboard or selected from the list File name Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified Files of type This area is used to specify the type extension of the file to be opened Refer to Table 5 5 File Type Can Be Displayed 286 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Open Sets the selected file After setting the file this dialog box is closed Cancel Closes this dialog box without executing anything Help Displays this dialog box online help files
356. selected line as a jump pointer The jump destination window will be displayed from the jump pointer The jump function is executed by selecting a jump source line then selecting Source Text Assemble in the Jump menu Jump can also be performed by double clicking the jump source line Remark The displayed items are sorted by clicking the title on the label in each column ascending descending order is switched each time the title is clicked a When Function tab is selected Name Function name displayed as function in file units in case of assembler source file File Name of file in which the function is defined Address Function start address Size Function size unit bytes Fetch Number of bytes executed fetched Coverage Coverage of the function 0 100 When the function is outside the coverage measurement range b When Section tab is selected Name Section name Type Section type code data Address Section start address Size Section size unit bytes User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 253 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Fetch Number of bytes executed fetched Coverage Coverage of the section 0 100 When the section is outside the coverage measurement range c When Interrupt tab is selected Name Interrupt request name Type Interrupt type nonmaskable maskable software security id flash
357. ser program Various windows are opened from this window Configuration Dialog Box Displays and sets the ID850QB operation environment Extended Option Dialog Box Displays and sets the extended options of the ID850QB Fail safe Break Dialog Box Sets the fail safe breaks RRM Setting Dialog Box Sets the RRM sampling range Data Flash Option Dialog Box Sets the data flash error emulation IECUBE Flash Option Dialog Box Sets the flash self programming emulation IECUBE T e ita ee E C e Source Search Dialog Box Searches in the Source Window Debugger Option Dialog Box Displays and sets other options Source Text Move Dialog Box Specifies a file to be displayed in the Source Window and the position from which displaying the file is to be started Assemble Window Disassembles the program and executes line assembly Assemble Search Dialog Box Searches in the Assemble Window Address Move Dialog Box Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Memory Window Assemble Window or IOR Window 102 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Symbol To Address Dialog Box Displays the address of the specified variable or function or the value of the specified symbol List Window Lists functions variables symbols sections and interrupt requests IOR Select Dialog Box Selects peripheral I O registers and I O ports to be displayed in the IOR Window Add I O Port Dialog Box Registers an I O port to be di
358. set to variables from the context menu in the Source Window or Watch Window Figure 5 2 Setting Break to Variable BI Watch Seles Add Delete Up Dow Retresh lc 7 COLUMN FPortInputBuffer 10 aniannEE column Break when Access to this Variable Columnline Break when Write to this Variable Break when Read from this Variable Clear Event Change Watch Delete Watch al Bin 5 4 4 Hardware break and software break 1 Hardware break Hardware breaks are breaks that are set using one hardware resource per event condition Therefore in the ID850QB they are managed using 5 12 Event Function as break event conditions The number of valid break points varies depending on the device Refer to 5 12 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition 2 Software break Software breaks are breaks that are set by rewriting instructions of specified addresses to software break instructions Settings to external ROM stopping at variable access timing etc cannot be specified The number of valid software break is as follows 52 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION Table 5 8 The Number of Valid Software Break Connected IE Valid Number DECUBE MINICUBE 2000Nete MINICUBE2 Note Software breaks in relation to internal ROM and internal flash memory are automatically set by the ROM collection function The maximum number of software breaks that can be set with the ROM collecti
359. sor position This button is displayed as the lt Stop gt button during a search gt gt Searches the memory contents satisfying the search condition set in the Memory Search Dialog Box backward downward on screen from the address at the cursor position This button is displayed as the lt Stop gt button during a search Stop searching Stops searching Refresh Updates the contents of the window with the latest data DMM Opens the DMM Dialog Box Close Closes this window View Menu Memory Window dedicated items The following items are added in the View menu when the Memory Window is active Bin Displays binary numbers Oct Displays octal numbers Dec Displays decimal numbers Hex Displays hexadecimal numbers default Nibble Displays in 4 bit units Byte Displays in 8 bit units default Half Word Displays in 16 bit units Word Displays in 32 bit units Ascii Selects whether ASCII characters are displayed or not Selected Displayed Cleared Hidden default ID tag Switches whether to display the data flash memory ID tag Selected Displayed Not selected Hidden default This ID tag display is displayed exclusively with the Ascii display Little Endian Displays in little endian default Big Endian Displays in big endian Access Monitoring IECUBE Sets about Access monitor function 206 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM
360. splayed in the IOR Window time measurement result IECUBE Trace Move Dialog Box Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Trace View Window IECUBE User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 103 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Coverage Color Dialog Box Selects color to distinguish the coverage of executed code IECUBE Software Break Manager Display enable or disable and delete software breaks Event Manager Displays enables disables and deletes each event condition Event Dialog Box Registers event conditions Event Link Dialog Box Registers event link conditions Roses evens 104 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 2 Explanation of Windows This section explains each window or dialog box as follows Window Name Dialog Box Name Briefly explains the function of the window or dialog box and points to be noted If an invalid window dialog box exists due to a connected IE the name of the valid connected IE is indicated at the lower right of the window dialog box name In addition the display image of the window or dialog box is also illustrated ltems of related operation are also explained Opening Explains how to open the window or dialog box Explanation of Each Area Explains items to be set to or displayed in each area of the window or dialog box Context Menu Explains the context menu that is displayed in the window when the right mouse button is clicked From
361. splayed in ye ow A software break point may be deleted 5 Select Build menu gt Build and Debug or Build menu gt Rebuild and Debug on the PM User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 39 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM 4 4 2 Auto load by starting debugger If the following operation is performed on the PM with the ID850QB started the load module will be automatically downloaded to the ID850QB Selecting the Build menu gt Build and Debug on the PM Selecting the Build menu gt Rebuild and Debug on the PM Remark Specify whether to use a CPU reset after downloading from Debugger Settings on the Tool menu of PM a CPU reset is performed by default 40 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION This chapter explains about debug function of ID850QB Table 5 1 Debug Function List Flow of Debugging Operations User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 41 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 1 Setting Debugging Environment This section explains the following items related to the setting debugging environment Setting operating environment Setting option Setting mapping To change the value of a register required for access of an external memory 5 1 1 Setting operating environment The in circuit emulator operating environment settings are performed in the Configuration Dialog Box that is automatically displayed when the ID850QB starts up If a project file already exists the debugging
362. splaying the source text from the specified position Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files Source path search order The debugger searches source files in the following order and displays the file that has been found first automatic source path setting 1 Folder where source file is placed when it is built 2 Source path passed from project manager PM or source path set on Debugger Option Dialog Box 3 Folder where load module file exists The user does not need to specify the source path if the source files are stored in the folder where they were placed during build by project manager PM If no source files are found even if they are searched for in the above order a dialog box that prompts the user to specify the source path will be displayed User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 173 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Assemble Window This window is used to disassemble and display programs It is also used to execute Line assembly Refer to 5 3 Source Display Disassemble Display Function The results of line assembly are also reflected in the Memory Window In addition to Breakpoint setting and Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed a number of other operations using Context Menu Function buttons etc can be performed in this window Moreover there are two statuses Active status
363. t New Spec Flash self programming Ver 3 00 or later 3 Advanced If this ttem is selected detailed settings for flash self programing emulation function are enabled This enables setting of 4 Flash Macro Service Error Emulation and 5 PG FP4 Security Flag Settings Emulation This item is not selected by default 4 Flash Macro Service Error Emulation These items set the operation of the self library function When this checkbox is selected an error value that is returned when flash memory is damaged can forcibly be returned The error values that are returned when flash memory is damaged are not returned in normal emulation The settable items are as follows All items are not selected by default Generate FlashBlockErase Error Returns error values in FlashBlockErace functions Generate FlashBlocklVerify Error Returns error values in FlashBlocklVerify functions Generate FlashWordWrite Error Returns error values in FlashWordWrite functions Generate FlashBlockBlankCheck Error Returns error values in FlashBlockBlankCheck functions Generate FlashSetInfo Error Returns error values in FlashSetInfo functions Generate FlashFLMDCheck ErrorNote Returns error values in FlashFLMDCheck functions Note The IECUBE cannot read the values of the FLMDO pin Normally with an assumption that a high level is input to the FLMDO pin the FlashFLMDCheck functions always return a normal comple tion Check the Ge
364. t Name fx F4004 Illegal status Err type Err No hexddecimal number Product Name 1 W325 User program if running Do you want to stop User program for a moment and set it This message is not to be shown until restart Cancel 366 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX E MESSAGES E 2 Types of Messages The ID850QB outputs the following types of messages Table E 1 Types of Messages Abort Error Stops processing and terminates the debugger If this error occurs debugging cannot be continued F Fail Fo Stops processing and opened windows and dialog boxes are closed W Warning Stops processing but opened windows and dialog boxes are not closed E 3 Message Lists lt From X0000 gt lt From X1000 gt lt From X2000 gt lt From X3000 gt lt From X4000 gt lt From X5000 gt lt From X6000 gt lt From X7000 gt lt From X8000 gt lt From X9000 gt lt From Xa000 gt lt From Xb000 gt lt From Xc000 gt lt From Xd000 gt lt From Xe000 gt lt From Xf000 gt 1 From X0000 F0002 This feature is not supported FO100 Can not communicate with ICE Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board 1 Check the connection of the emulator power supply and cables 2 The driver may not be correctly installed Reinstall the driver A0101 Can not find initialization file expc ini A0102 Host name not found F0
365. t address Size Section size unit bytes 184 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE e When Interrupt tab is selected Name Interrupt request name Type Interrupt type nonmaskable maskable software security id flash mask option Status Utilization status in the program use nonuse Unknown Address Starting address of the interrupt handler Size Size of the interrupt handler unit bytes Maximum size for statuses other than use The pointer can also jump to any of the above windows just by double clicking the jump source address The display jumps from this tab to the Source Window Assemble Window or Memory Window using the start address value of the selected line as a jump pointer The jump destination window will be displayed from the jump pointer The jump function is executed by selecting a jump source line then selecting Source Text Assemble Memory in the Jump menu Remark The displayed items are sorted by clicking the title on the label in each column ascending descending order is switched each time the title is clicked The width of each column can be changed but the change is lost when the data in the window is saved as the CSV file 3 Function buttons Close Closes this window Context Menu Source Text Displays the corresponding source text and source line using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destinatio
366. t after download in the Debugger Settings dialog box of the product with a internal flash memory is selected the contents of the internal flash memory are erased before downloading Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 37 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM 4 3 To Start ID850QB from PM The ID850QB can be started from the PM as follows Click the ID850QB starting button on the toolbar of the PM Select the Build menu gt Debug on the PM Select the Build menu gt Build and Debug on the PM Select the Build menu gt Rebuild and Debug on the PM If the debugging environment of the ID850QB is saved to a project file currently being used by the PM it will be started in the debugging environment saved in the project file If the debugging environment of the ID850QB is not saved to a project file being used by the PM the Configuration Dialog Box is opened At this time the device type chip name cannot be changed Caution With PM if too many source files are registered in a project the number of files may exceed the upper limit of the source path length that can be registered to the ID850QB the source files conse quently may not be displayed automatically For details on the source path length refer to 1 Source Path in the Debugger Option Dialog Box 4 3 1 Restoring debugging environment The previous debugging environment can be restored by the following procedure when the ID850QB is started fro
367. t exist Recreate the file Fe005 Fe006 Failed in reading file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Reading of file went wrong User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 385 APPENDIX E MESSAGES Fe007 Failed in writing file 1 The file is damaged or does not exist Recreate the file Ae008 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files Fe009 Illegal file format FeO0a Verification error Fe010 This feature is not supported 16 From Xf000 Af000 Not enough memory 1 There is not enough system memory Close the applications being executed and the open files Ff000 Not enough memory Ff001 XXX not found Wf002 Not found XXX Search from the beginning Wf003 Already exceed search region Ff004 Missing parameter Ff005 Illegal function name Ff006 Illegal number Ff007 Start address is bigger than end address Ff008 Illegal symbol or expression Ff009 XXX This file is illegal type Ff100 Disk cannot write or full Ff101 File not found Ff102 File not Create Ff103 Old project file version Ff104 Illegal project file format Ff105 This file is a project file for XXX Please select a correct file Wf106 CPU in the Project File was Changed You must exit the debugger for t
368. t items to be displayed in the Trace View Window Refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE Figure 6 50 Trace Data Select Dialog Box Trace Data Select Radix J oua o Glock anime Instruction Fetch Data 2 Instruction Fetch Address Memory Access Data Instruction Fetch Data 1 Instruction Fetch status f Memory Access Address Memory Access Data Memory Access Status F Dis bl taiora Cancel Restore Help 3 Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Trace View Window is the current window select View gt Select menu Explanation of Each Area 1 Item This area is used to select items to be displayed in the Trace View Window Displaying the following fields may or may not be selected The field selected is displayed Refer to 3 Trace result display area Frame Frame field Timetag Time field Whether the Clock or Time is displayed can be selected Instruction Fetch Address Address Fetch access display area field Instruction Fetch Data Instruction Fetch Status Data Fetch access display area field Status Fetch access display area field Memory Access Address Memory Access Data Address Data access display area field Data Data access display area field Memory Access Status Status Data access display area field DisAssemble DisAsm field User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 243 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Radi
369. t sets the software breakpoint is traced as the executed instruction even though it has not been executed Similarly an unexecuted instruction is traced as it is executed when the coverage measurement function is used User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM T CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 11 Coverage Measurement Function pecuse Although there are several types of coverage measurement the ID850QB performs measurement for CO coverage CO coverage instruction coverage A percentage that all statements in a code are executed at least once Download or upload the coverage measurement result coverage data via the Download Dialog Box or Upload Dialog Box respectively This section explains the following items Coverage mesurement result display Coverage measurement range Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis Caution1 This function is disabled when no coverage boards are incorporated Caution2 RRM Function Trace Function IECUBE and Coverage Measurement Function IECUBE are functions that are used on a mutually exclusive basis refer to 5 11 4 RRM function trace function and coverage function used on a mutually exclusive basis To switch between the three functions go to the Option menu 78 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 11 1 Coverage mesurement result display The coverage meas
370. t to No Display lt lt Show All Moves all registers to Display Hide All gt gt Moves all registers to No Display No Display Registers not displayed in the Register Window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 219 2 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE OK Reflects the selection in this dialog box in the Register Window and closes this dialog box Cancel Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box Restore Restores the status before this dialog box was opened Help Displays this dialog box online help files 220 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE IOR Window This window is used to display and change the contents of peripheral I O registers and the I O ports that have been registered in the Add I O Port Dialog Box Refer to 5 8 Register Manipulation Function A number of other operations using Context Menu Function buttonsetc can be performed in this window Caution1 Caution2 Remarkt1 Remark2 However that the values of read only peripheral I O registers and I O ports cannot be changed In addition the peripheral I O registers and I O ports that cause the device to operate when they are read are read protected and therefore cannot be read To read these registers select a register and select and execute Compulsion Read from the Context Menu During user program execution the IOR contents are updated at every sampling time set in the Exte
371. tart position can be changed in the Address Move Dialog Box displayed by selecting View menu gt Move The display register is selected in the IOR Select Dialog Box Figure 5 16 Display IOR contents EDAK Refresh DMM Close Attribute 5 USFFFOU4 O3FFFO04 O3FFFOO5 O3FFFO06 O3FFFO08 O3FFFO0A O3FFFOOC O3FFFOOE O3FFFO24 O3SFFFO24 O3FFFO25 O3FFFO26 O3FFFO26 O3FFFO2A O3FFFO2C O3FFFO2E OSFFFO44 OSFFFO44 O3SFFFO45 O3FFFO46 O3FFFO46 OSFFFO4A O3FFFO4C O3SFFFO66 O3FFFO6E OO 00 00 00 00 00 00 ee ee coco co coco oo oo oo oo on oo ooo 5 8 3 Displaying and changing I O port contents User defined I O ports can be displayed and changed in the IOR Window once they have been registered in the Add I O Port Dialog Box In the case of products that support programmable I O registers programmable I O register contents can be displayed and changed by setting programmable I O area use in the Configuration Dialog Box Figure 5 17 Register I O Port Add O Port LO Port List Sens Name Po Address Cancel Access Restore fe Byte C Half Word C Word Ean Read White Read Only Write Only Read Protect 68 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 9 Timer Function iecuse The timer function measures the execution time run break time from the start of user program execution until a break or the execution time in a specific user program interval using timer events
372. te Break when Write to this Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for write Variable Break when Read from Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read this Variable Clear Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected variable Event Information Displays the event information of a line at the cursor position or a selected variable name If an event is set the Event Dialog Box is opened Mix Turns on off Mixed display mode Source Window 168 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM Context Menu CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Move Moves the display position Opens the Source Text Move Dialog Box Mix Turns on off Mixed display mode Source Window Add Watch Adds the specified data to the Watch Window Opens the Add Watch Dialog Box Symbol Displays the address of the specified variable or function or the value of the Break when Access to this Variable specified symbol Opens the Symbol To Address Dialog Box Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read write Break when Write to this Variable Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for write Break when Read from this Variable Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read Clear Event Information Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected variable Displays the e
373. ted 1 2 The profiling function is not yet supported 3 PM and TW850 cannot be used by linking to each other 4 The Stack Window is not yet supported 5 Execution cannot be stepped into functions defined in an include file 6 No breakpoints can be set to functions defined in an include file 7 Inthe function name list the names of functions defined in an include file are displayed with the name used by the side that references the include file 8 The FPU floating point operation unit is not yet supported 9 In the variable name list global variable names are displayed at the defined locations and referencing locations extern locations This item depends on the GHS compiler specifications 10 The watched variable value may be displayed incorrectly or the value may not be changed because debug information does not include valid period information of variables This item applies to cases where a variable is optimized and deleted or a value is temporarily assigned to a register Floating point rounding accuracy differs between the compiler and debugger 2 Debugging of assembler sources is not possible 3 Step execution of include statement is not possible 4 Step execution of setjmp and longjmp is not possible User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 25 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION This chapter explains the following items about installation of ID850QB Installing Uninstalling 2 1 Installing
374. th an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information e No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document e NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products No license express implied or otherwise is granted under any patents copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others e Descriptions of circuits software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples The incorporation of these circuits software and information in the design of a customer s equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits software and information e While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely To min
375. the context menu convenient functions often used in this window can be selected with a single action window only Related operations Explains the operation of a window or dialog box related to this window or dialog box User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 105 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Main Window This window is automatically opened when the ID850QB is started up and initialized In the ID850QB other windows are manipulated from this window Refer to 6 1 Window List Execution of the user program is controlled in this window Execution of the user program is controlled in the following three modes Source mode Debugs the user program at the source level Instruction mode Debugs the user program at the instruction level Auto mode Automatically selects the source mode or instruction mode default Figure 6 1 Main Window Menu bar Tool bar FES IDS500B File Edit View Option Run Event Browse Jump Window Help Diu a ml bol S a Sy FR a aalam AAi oX IT Suara tea Gee cian 42 Search lt gt gt Watch Quick Refresh Close a crte s void dbg_func void E _s_ crte0000 S int c k dbg_func_sub E t CJ INT_user c wanane BT AS R gt l Trace View E dbg_func E dbg_func_sub Abstract Search lt lt gt gt Refresh Close m Essa ano Time Address Data Status DisAsm 481512 00000564 40063F00 BRUT dispose Ox Ip _s_SY
376. tion If a status condition is omitted all frames All status are searched Remark The IF and INFO frames are not searched All Status All frames default M1 Fetch M1 fetch including BRM1 Fetch R W Data read write including Read Write Read Data read Write Data write User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 239 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 2 Access Size This area is used to select an access size condition By specifying an access size condition the access width of a data condition to be detected by an access event is determined Byte Searches for a data condition with 8 bit width only during 8 bit access Half Word Searches for a data condition with 16 bit width only during 16 bit access Word Searches for a data condition with 32 bit width only during 32 bit access No Condition Does not search based on access size nothing can be input to Data area Bit Searches for a data condition with 1 bit width only during 8 bit access Note 2 Note1 If an access event is specified as a status condition the alternative of Bit is not displayed If Bit or 1 is specified an error occurs Note2 In this case a search is made for a data condition with 1 bit width Because of the operation of the simulator access to a bit is not directly detected the simulator searches a dummy bit access by internally setting address conditions and data conditions as follows Input example Setting
377. tion of Each Area View Menu Watch Window dedicated items Context Menu 186 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Opening Q Click the Wch button or select Browse menu gt Watch Explanation of Each Area 1 Watch data display change area The left area displays symbol names and the right area displays data values Symbol name display area This area is used to display variable names symbol names and types and tag names of structures or unions is prefixed to the displayed arrays pointer variables and structures or unions These variables are expanded and displayed when they are double clicked first character changes from to Registered watch data changes are performed in the Change Watch Dialog Box opened by selecting the item to be changed and then selecting Context Menu gt Change Watch A line with an expanded hierarchy such as the elements of an array and members of structures and unions cannot be deleted If an access breakpoint is set for a variable or a symbol in the Watch Window the symbol name display area is highlighted in gold Array By double clicking the all the elements of the variable are displayed in accordance with the type of the array variable Pointer variable By double clicking the the data indicated by the pointer is displayed Structure union By double clicking the all the members of the structure union are displayed
378. tions that can be set to this area and while the dialog box refer to Table 6 23 Number of Event Conditions in Event Link Dialog Box Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area For details refer to 5 12 3 Setting event conditions Pass Count This area is used to set a pass count condition IECUBE A pass count condition specifies how many times an event condition must be satisfied during user program execution before a given condition is satisfied If no pass count is specified 1 is assumed the condition is satisfied as soon as the event condition is satisfied Table 6 23 Number of Event Conditions in Event Link Dialog Box Connected IE Each Area Total Execution Access 10 14 8 6 IECUBE MINICUBE Nx85ET 104 12 8 4 RCU0 TEU TRCU Nx85E901 RCUO RCU1 1 oO O MINICUBE2 With debug function 4 b Without debug function 2 0 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE a Can be set in Phase1 4 expect before execution b Can be set only in Phase 1 and Phase 2 must always be set in two stages C Only events before execution 2 Event manager area This area displays the list of registered events Each event condition can be set easily just by dragging and dropping the event icon displayed in this area onto the event setting area in each event setting dial
379. to 5 15 1 Debugging environment project file Auto Save Sets whether the project file is automatically saved at the ID850QB termination On Automatically saves the project file Off Does not Automatically saves the project file Query Displays the Exit Debugger Dialog Box at the ID850QB termination default 7 Source Option This area is used to set the Source Window operation at a break By selecting this checkbox a Source Window that is active at a break is displayed at the front If there is no active Source Window or no debug information in the load module file the active Assemble Window is displayed at the front 8 Tool Bar Pictures This area sets the buttons to be displayed on the toolbar Refer to 2 Operation of tool bar Pictures and Text Displays a button on which a graphic and character are displayed Pictures only Displays a button with only graphic default 9 Kanji Cannot be selected in this area 10 Tab Size This area is used to set the tab size for each extension when files are displayed Extension Set an extension Input an extension from the keyboard or select one from the drop down list Tab Size Select the tab size Select how many spaces are displayed as a tab code 2 4 or 8 Tab List Displays the tab size set for each extension lt Add gt To change the tab size setting select Extension and Tab Size and click this bu
380. tp4 _intpS _intp _inttglov _ inttoDocD _inttqOice _inttq0ioc _inttoicr Ss inttolov Opening Explanation of Each Area Context Menu Opening Select Browse menu gt List Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 183 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Explanation of Each Area 1 Load Module This area is used to select the load module file that has been downloaded This area is blank when no load module file has been downloaded 2 List view area The items such as names sizes and addresses of functions variables symbols sections and interrupt requests are listed by each tab The displayed contents are updated automatically after a load module file is downloaded This area is blank when no load module file has been downloaded a When Function tab is selected Name Function name displayed as function in file units in case of assembler source file File Name of file in which the function is defined Address Function start address Size Function size unit bytes b When Variable tab is selected Name Variable name File Name of file in which the variable is defined Address Variable start address Size Variable size unit bytes c When Symbol tab is selected Name Symbol name Address Symbol address d When Section tab is selected Name Section name Type Section type code data Address Section star
381. ts Complement frames are displayed in gray In complement frames Frame Fetch access display area and DisAsm are displayed only Whether each of the following sub areas is displayed or not can be selected in the Trace Data Select Dialog Box Frame This area displays the trace flame number Time This area displays the number of clocks required for the target chip from the execution start of the program to the execution start of an instruction of each frame or generation of memory access cause In complement frames this area is not displayed The display contents can be switched between clock count display and time display inthe Trace Data Select Dialog Box For the relationship between the timer count division ratio and maximum measurement time refer to Table 6 5 Relationship Between Time Tag Counter Division Ratio and Maximum Measurement Time Time tag counter Trace The timetag and time measurement are performed using an external clock 50MHz Note If overflow occurs the time tag maximum value is displayed in red Fetch access display This area displays the result of fetching the program area In the case of a complement frame only Address and Data are displayed User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 235 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Address Displays the fetch address Data Displays the fetch data Status The following types of statuses are available BRM1 Fetching of first byte of first instruction
382. tton lt Delete gt To delete the tab size setting select the setting from Tab List and click this button User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 153 11 Startup Routine CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE This area is used to specify the first address end address and display start symbol of the text area code area of the start up routine by symbols By specifying these items a source file can be opened immediately after the load module format object file is downloaded in the Download Dialog Box If the PC locates the address between Begin label and End label at this time the ID850QB displays the code starting from the address specified in main label Begin label Specifies the symbol of the first address default _ start End label Specifies the symbol of the end address default _startend main label Specifies the display start symbol default _main Caution1 If the specified symbol is not correct the source file cannot be opened until the PC reaches the address range of the corresponding source file In addition the start up routine cannot be skipped by step execution Caution2 Be sure to specify this area If this area is blank the dialog box cannot be closed 12 DisAssemble This area is used to set for disassemble display Show Offset Specifies whether an offset symbol offset is displayed during disassemble display When the offset is not displa
383. ue is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols 2 Function buttons Find Next Set Find Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition If the specified character string is found as a result of a search it is highlighted To continue searching click this button again Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box Stop searching Stops searching Close Closes this dialog box During searching this button is replaced by the lt Stop gt button Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 209 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Memory Fill Dialog Box This dialog box is used to fill the memory contents in the Memory Window with specified codes fill code Refer to 5 7 Memory Manipulation Function Opening Figure 6 36 Memory Fill Dialog Box Memory Fill Address 1 From ff fill code gt T 2 Cancel Restore Help Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Edit menu gt Memory gt Fill Explanation of Each Area 1 Memory fill range specification area Address This area is used to specify the filling range and fill code From Specifies the filling range start address end address The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also speci
384. unction Opens the Assemble Window If the Assemble Window in active is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Memory Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Memory Window If the Memory Window in active is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated 238 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Search Dialog Box lECUBE This dialog box is used to search in the Trace View Window Refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE By setting each item and then clicking the lt Find Next gt button searching can be started By clicking the lt Set Find gt button the direction buttons lt lt and gt gt in the Trace View Window can be used for the search Figure 6 49 Trace Search Dialog Box Trace Search i l r Event Status All Status 2 Access Size Byte m set Find 6 3 Address Ti Mask Close 4 Data Mask Help Sean Whole Region Direction 5 Fone SY pare Ea i Up f Down Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Trace View Window is the current window select View menu gt Search or click the lt Search gt button in the same window Explanation of Each Area 1 Event Status This area is used to select a status condi
385. urce path are made in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Specify a searching method in the Source Search Dialog Box opened by clicking the lt Search gt button The search result is highlighted in the Source Window Table 5 5 File Type Can Be Displayed Source c s Source file The extension can be changed in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Text txt Text file All All files 5 3 2 Disassemble display Disassemble display is performed in the Assemble Window The display start position can be changed in the Address Move Dialog Box opened by selecting View menu gt Move Offset display and register name display are specified in the Debugger Option Dialog Box Specify a searching method in the Assemble Search Dialog Box opened by clicking the lt Search gt button The search result is highlighted in the Assemble Window User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 47 48 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 3 3 Mixed display mode Source Window Programs can be disassembled and displayed combined with the source file by selecting View menu gt Mix in the Source Window The contents displayed in the mixed display mode can be saved as a view file Normal display mode ajs Timer Set A TUNT Ox2o00 BO CET 1 61 time_ower Q In the normal display mode general text files can be displayed as well as source files Mixed display mode Timer Set TUMT Ox200 eQGGO0002 movea Ox2Z00 ro
386. urement result can be checked in the Code Coverage Window In the Code Coverage Window the measurement result is displayed individually for functions sections and interrupt handlers vectors The coverage measurement result is updated at a break it is not updated automatically during user program execution Clear the coverage data by selecting Option menu Coverage data can be saved in the CSV format Refer to 5 15 2 Window display information view file The saved contents vary depending on the tab selected Clear the coverage data by selecting Option menu gt Coverage gt Clear Figure 5 21 Coverage Mesurement Result Display Gode Coverage E mlk Load Module rompout Total Coverage iy 923 Retresh Glose Function Section Interrupt RESET nonmask able 0 4 INT TPOCCO maskable 0x170 4 nonmask able THE aa e a INTWOTZ nonmask able O20 4 O TRAPOO software Use 0x40 4 TRAFOD sorhware nonuse 0x40 a TRAPU sortware nonuse 040 a TRAPOS software nonuse 0x40 5 TRAPOS4 software nonwuse 0x40 a TRAFOS sortware nonuse 0x40 a TRAPUE zoftware nonuse 0x40 a TRAPO software nonuse Ox40 a TRAFOS sothware nonuse 040 E TRAFOS sottware nonuse 0x40 a TRAPOA software nonuse Ow40 g TRAPOE software nonuse 0x40 g TRAPOC sothware nonuse 0x40 a TRAPOD sorhware nonuse 0x40 a TRAPOE software nonuse 0x40 5 TRAPOF sortware nonuse Oe40 8 TRAP10 software Use 050 4 S8OrrrTrr ore ocr oc oc eco 5 11 2 Coverage measurement ra
387. using MINICUBE2 the debugger may hang up 1 Break in flash environment 2 Stepping in of program that transfers to flash environment User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 353 APPENDIX B ADDITIONAL CAUTIONS B 2 Cautions on using Midas Lab emulator RTE 2000H TP The following table lists functional differences between the V850 IECUBE and RIE 2000HTP PG2 lE regarding cautions for connecting Midas Lab emulator RTE 2000H TP Table B 1 Functional Differences Between V850 IECUBE and RTE 2000H TP PG2 IE IECUBE RTE 2000H TP PG2 IE Connection Connection with host machine USB USB or LAN ICE RTE EXEC EX850G32RTE Configuration Dialog Box Startup option None Chip O Available Internal Memory X Not available Clock ID Code Programmable I O Area Peripheral Break Monitor Clock Target Fail safe Break Q wn x Memory Mapping Memory Attribute Emulation ROM Target Emulation RAM I O Protect Target Target ROM I O Protect 354 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM APPENDIX B ADDITIONAL CAUTIONS Trace RTE 2000H TP PG2 IE Extended Option Dialog Box Timetag Count Rate a Clear trace memory before run pean before execution mew OO we C comenenban OO C OK me OR ramones OR C fof a Verify Check VerifyCheck Clear register when reset pee during reset Check monitor overwriting when downloading RRM gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Trace Code coverage opt
388. vent conditions Average Average execution time Max Maximum execution time Min Minimum execution time 232 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 2 Function buttons CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Initialize Clears the measurement results Copy Copies the measurement result to the clipboard in text format Close Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 233 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace View Window IECUBE This window used to display the trace results Refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE Display updates are performed during breaks or during step execution This window has Mixed display mode Trace View Window Also It has 5 16 3 Trace result with linking window IECUBE Other operations using Context Menu Function buttons etc can be performed in this window Figure 6 48 Trace View Window W Trace View search ot PP Retresh Close Frame Time Address Data status Address Data status Dis sm 002408 214445 nogo06t a IEO MI calls Gate 102409 214445 000002C4 R e410 714445 qicc R e411 714455 00000454 40063F00 BRN dicpase iat ine Tiel R 00242 14455 USFF T35 002413 14465 QUUU04F 6 N41 4 214465 000004F6 0132 ERHI mov Ux r Su 5 002415 214465 000004F8 80FF1C00 M1 jarl _subl Ip 024G 214465 00000514 4515 ERN br subl ix2 i D02417 214475 OO000536 84072100 BRHI prepare Ip 0x8 02418 214475 03
389. vent information of a line at the cursor position or a selected variable name If an event is set the Event Dialog Box is opened Come Here Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position Refer to Table 5 7 Break Types Change PC Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC Break Point Sets or deletes a hardware breakpoint at the cursor position Software Break Point Assemble Note Breaks before execution B are set with priority Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Assemble Window If an active Assemble Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated Memory Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position Refer to 5 16 2 Jump function Opens the Memory Window If an active Memory Window is open that window is displayed in the forefront so that it can be manipulated User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 169 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Source Search Dialog Box This dialog box is used to search the contents of a file in the Source Window Refer to 5 3 1 Source display By setting each item and then clicking the lt Find Next gt button searching
390. w Cancel lt Other gt Opens the Set Other Dialog Box By clicking each button the corresponding event setting dialog box can be opened with the new event name set After the event setting o Em dialog box has been opened this dialog box is closed Event Link f lt Manager gt cesses Opens the Event Manager lt Cancel gt 0006 Closes the dialog box to create event condition Set Other Ed Manager Cancel 3 Function buttons for event condition contents display etc These buttons are used to display or delete the event conditions displayed in the event condition setting area and to display or hide the Event manager area This area is common to all event related dialog boxes Add Evert Opens the Event Dialog Box in the select mode and selects or newly creates an event condition to be set The event condition will be added to the area selected when the lt Add Event gt button is pressed Add Link Opens the Event Link Dialog Boxin the select mode and selects or newly creates an event link condition The event condition will be added to the area selected when the lt Add Link gt button is pressed Open Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event condition one Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event condition Same operation as double clicking the event icon or pressing the Enter key
391. wing are options byte Displayed set in one byte units default halfword Displayed set in halfword units word Displayed set in word units fill The data is filled in copy The data is copied noverify Verification is not executed on writing Remark If either of the following operations is performed during user program execution the CPU is stopped momentarily and execution continues Referencing a memory area other than the RRM area Setting of a memory Usage example IDCON 1 memory 100 0x10 IDCON 2 memory 100 2 IDCON 3 memory 100 0x02 IDCON 4 memory fill O 1ff O 322 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE module module Display of the list of files and functions Input format module progname filename Functions Displays the list of files and functions of the load module specified by progname If filename is not specified the list of files is displayed If filename is specified the list of functions of the specified files is displayed Usage example IDCON 1 module rammon mf 1 rammon c IDCON 2 module rammon Imf rammon c 1 rammon c sub1 2 rammon c main Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 323 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE next next Procedure step Input format next options Aliases Functions Executes the procedure steps If functions are called the step stops after executing function The follo
392. wing are options source The command is executed in source line units default instruction The command is executed in command units Usage example IDCON 1 next i IDCON 2 next s 324 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE refresh refresh Redrawing of window Input format refresh Functions Redraws the window and updates the data Usage example IDCON 1 batch foo tcl IDCON 2 refresh Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 325 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE register register Display setting of register value and IOR value Input format register options regname value Functions Sets value in the register specified with regname If value is omitted displays the value of the register specified by regname The following are options force Compulsory reading or writing is executed Remark If either of the following operations is performed during user program execution the CPU is stopped momentarily and execution continues Referencing a register Setting of a register Usage example IDCON 1 register pc 0x100 IDCON 2 register pc 200 IDCON 3 register pc 0x200 326 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE reset reset Reset Input format reset options Functions Resets the ID850QB CPU symbols or events If options are omitted the CPU is reset The following are o
393. wnload Dialog Box The corresponding source text file Source Window is displayed by downloading load module files with debug information Remark Multiple load module files can be downloaded Loaded files can be selected in the Load Module List Dialog Box that is opened by selecting File menu gt Load Module Format of file that can be downloaded is as follows Table 5 3 Type of File That Can Be Downloaded Load module L Load module ELF CA850 ouh out koad Moduleout Module out 3rd Party Load module ELF GHS Extended DWARF2 out Note Intel Hex format Standard extension and extension linear Note Hex Format hex Motorola Hex format S type SO S1 S2 S3 S5 S7 S8 S9 records Extended Tektronix Hex format Hex format with ID tag for data flash Hex Format with ID Tag hex Binary data Binary Data bin Coverage result IECUBE Coverage cvb Note1 Compatible with GHS compiler V3 5 1 V4 0 x Note2 Addresses of 1 MB or more can be downloaded Intel Hex Format Remark The format of a hex file is automatically determined 44 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION 5 2 2 Downloading to External Flash Memory The ID850QB can download load modules and HEX files to a flash memory connected to the external bus of the target microcontroller To correctly download modules and files to the flash memory be sure to read the following 1 Confirm supported emulat
394. x This area is used to select the radix in which data is to be displayed Displaying the following items may or may not be selected Instruction Fetch Data Data Fetch access display area Field Memory Access Data Data Data access display area Field HEX Displays hexadecimal numbers default DEC Displays decimal numbers OCT Displays octal numbers Bin Displays binary numbers 3 Function buttons OK Reflects the results of selection in this dialog box in the Trace View Window Cancel Closes this dialog box Restore Restores the original status Help Displays this dialog box online help files 244 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE Trace Move Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to specify the position from which displaying the Trace View Window is started Refer to 5 10 Trace Function IECUBE Figure 6 51 Trace Move Dialog Box f st frame C Trigger frame f Last frame f Frame No Last od Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening When the Trace View Window is the current window select View menu gt Move Explanation of Each Area 1 Frame selection area This area is used to specify the frame at the destination 1st frame Moves the display start position to a first frame of trace data Trigger frame Moves the display start position to the trigger frame of trace data
395. xffff000 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 121 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE If there is a space between the internal RAM and the peripheral I O register area fix the internal RAM start address and then change the end address of the internal RAM size see the figure below If the internal RAM area overlaps the peripheral I O register area fix the internal RAM end address and then change the start address If there is a space between internal RAM and IOR areas If internal RAM and IOR areas are contiguous Guarded Guarded lt Start address Change the start Internal RAM address according to the size Internal RAM Change the end address according Access prohibited to the size End address Settings related to the main clock and subclock are performed here 3 Clock Main OSC MHz Specifies a frequency before the main clock is multiplied A frequency can be selected from the drop down list 5 000 8 000 13 500 or 18 000 or directory input Multiply rate Specifies the main clock multiplication rate This value can be selected from the drop down list 1 to 10 or directly input Sub OSC KHz Specifies the subclock frequency setting this parameter is disabled for types that do not have a subclock A frequency can be selected from the drop down list or directory input 4 Programmable I O Area This area is used to specify use of the programmable I O area and the start address
396. xtension This area is used to specify the default extension Delimit extensions with blank Semicolon or comma Source File Set the extension of a source file that is displayed when the Browse Dialog Box is opened by selecting File menu gt Open The default extension is c s Load Module Set the extension of a load module that is displayed when the Download Dialog Box is opened The default extension is out 3 Open File History This area is used to set the number of histories of the open file displayed in the bottom field of the File menu The default value is 4 If O is set no history is displayed on the menu 4 Font This area is used to specify the font displayed on the Source Window Watch Window Quick Watch Dialog Box Local Variable Window and Stack Window Clicking the lt Font gt button opens the Font Dialog Box in which the font to be displayed and its size can be set Figure 6 13 Font Dialog Box Font Face O Courier New DotumChe FixedSys v Sample AaBbYyZz 5 Coverage The color to distinguish the coverage of executed code displayed in the Source Window and Assemble Window can be changed in the Coverage Color Dialog Box which is opened by clicking the lt Color gt button 152 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 6 Project File This area is used to set automatic saving of the project file Refer
397. y check is performed during access to the items corresponding to the selected checkboxes Internal RAM This area is used to perform the verify check setting in the internal RAM area Non Map Write Write to write prohibited area 3 Function buttons OK Validates the settings and closes this dialog box Cancel Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files Cautions 1 Usually a Non Map Break fail safe break occurs in the emulator when a program is fetched from the area not used by the program but it does not occur in the 16 byte space at the beginning of the unused area When the V850ES SG2 with a 256 KB internal ROM is used for example the Non Map Break does not occur in the 16 byte area from 0x40000 to Ox4000F 134 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE RRM Setting Dialog Box IECUBE This dialog box is used to set the sampling range for the RRM function Refer to 5 13 RRM Function Up to 8 locations can be specified in 256 byte units as the sampling range The total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations cannot exceed 2048 bytes Caution This dialog box cannot be opened when an item other than RRM Function has been selected in the Option menu Figure 6 8 RRM Setting Dialog Box RRM Setting 0x3 f 7000 256 od Bytes _entry data tai Close 1 2 fosst m2 Bytes entry data tai Restore fe Ox3tbooo 1024 Bytes _st
398. yed only a symbol that matches a numeric value is displayed if any If no matching symbol is found the numeric value is displayed as a hexadecimal number unchanged Label Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Label field In the default condition the offset is not displayed Mnemonic Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Mnemonic field In the default condition the offset is displayed Register Name This area is used to select the method of displaying register names in mnemonics during disassemble display Function Name Displays register names as function names or nicknames default Absolute Name Displays register names as absolute names 154 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE 13 Watch Default This area is used to specify a symbol to be watched in the Waich Window etc size Selects the default display size of data if Adaptive is specified from the drop down list Radix Sets the default radix in which data is to be displayed if Proper is specified from the drop down list The item selected from this list is also reflected in the subscript for watch data such as array variables or labels in the Watch Window hexadecimal by default which are registered in the Watch Window after this setting is changed Hex Displays in hexadecimal numbers default Dec Displays in dec
399. yed in an empty row in Address 256 is displayed in an empty row in Size and the value obtained by converting the variable to a symbol is displayed in an empty row in Symbol Remark If the total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations already exceeds 2048 bytes the dialog box opens but no value can be set Explanation of Each Area 1 Sampling range setting area Address This area is used to specify the sampling start address for the RRM function The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression Refer to Table 5 6 Specifying Symbols Following input click the lt Set gt button to enable the settings Size This area is used to specify the sampling range from Address The values that can be selected are 256 512 768 1024 1280 1536 1792 2048 However the total of the sizes specified for the 8 locations cannot exceed 2048 bytes Symbol This area displays the symbols of the addresses specified in Address The specified addresses are displayed as a symbol or as a symbol offset If the address has not been set nothing is displayed Remark When the settings are enabled the addresses are aligned in 256 byte units but if an address is duplicate it is not enabled 2 Size Total This area displays the total of the sizes specified in Size If the total exceeds 2048 bytes it is displayed in red 3 Functio
400. ys source files or text files Refer to 5 3 Source Display Disassemble Display Function In addition to Breakpoint setting Display of locations for which coverage measurement is executed and Mixed display mode Source Window a number of other operations using Context Menu Function buttons etc can be performed in this window Moreover there are two statuses Active status and static status for this window When the window is in the active status it has the Trace result with linking window IECUBE Moreover the items selected in the window with Drag amp drop function can be used in another window Refer to 5 16 Functions Common to Each Window Caution1 f program codes is described in an include file and these codes are included in multiple files the line numbers and addresses do not correspond on a one to one bases In such an include file function that indicates the correspondence relationship between line numbers and addresses dose not correctly operate Caution2 f a source file that includes the main function cannot be found in the source path after a load module file is downloaded or if the source file cannot be found during step execution ID850QB opens a dialog box to select the source file and prompt the user to select the source path for the source file displayed in the dialog box If the lt Cancel gt button is clicked the displayed file name is memorized so the source file name will no longer be asked until
401. ys the data in which a difference has been found Left Comparison source data Right Comparison destination data Mem2 Addr Displays the comparison destination address at which a difference has been found 2 Function buttons Close Closes this dialog box Help Displays this dialog box online help files User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 213 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE DMM Dialog Box This dialog box is used to set addresses and data for DMM Dynamic Memory Modification Refer to 5 14 DMM Function The memory contents are rewritten via the DMM function during user program execution Caution When IECUBE is connected a pseudo DMM function is performed With pseudo DMM a break occurs instantaneously upon a write during the user program execution Figure 6 40 DMM Dialog Box Ex When Memory is selected 1 f Memory t Register C OR 3 Memory Address Oxott r000 2 Write Data BFF Data Size 0 Byte C Half Word C Word Opening Explanation of Each Area Opening Select Edit menu gt DMM or click the lt DMM gt button in the Memory Window Register Window IOR Window Explanation of Each Area 1 DMM target selection area This area is used to select the target for DMM The items displayed in 2 DMM setting area change by selecting the option button Memory DMM is performed for the memory Register DMM is performed for the register IOR DMM is perfo
402. ze instead of the value of variables is displayed in decimal digits encoding name Encoding during character string display is specified By default system encoding is used name encoding name is based on the Tcl specification shiftjis euc jp etc Usage example IDCON 1 watch var 0x10 IDCON 2 watch d var 16 IDCON 3 watch array 0 Oxa 334 User s Manual U18604EJ1VOUM CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE where where Stack trace Input format where Functions Executes the back trace of the stack Usage example IDCON 1 where 1 test2 c sub2 int i 13 2 test c num int i 71 3 test c main 82 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 335 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE wish wish Startup of Tclet Input format wish scriptname Functions Starts up the script using Tk Telet The expansion window can be created with Tclet Usage example IDCON 1 wish test tcl 336 Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM xcoverage CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE xcoverage Operation of coverage Input format xcoverage option Functions Operates coverage The following are options IECUBE clear Clears the coverage memory Usage example IDCON 1 xcoverage clear Users Manual U18604EJ1VOUM 337 xtime xtime Operation of timer Input format xtime option Functions Operates timer The following are options CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE

ID850QB Ver. 3.40 Integrated Debugger Operation UM

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents